ENGLISH 14.

0 mm

SERVICE STATION INFORMATION

Fuel recommendation: Brake and clutch fluid:

See page 1-1 DOT3 or SAE J1703

Engine oil recommendation: CVT fluid:

Classification: API SL, SM or SN SUZUKI CVTF GREEN-2
Viscosity: SAE 0W-16, 0W-20, 5W-30
Tire cold pressure:
For further details, see “Engine oil and filter” in the See the “Tire Information Label” located on the
“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section. driver’s door lock pillar.

OWNER’S MANUAL

SWIFT
Keep With Vehicle At All Times.
Contains Important Information
On Safety, Operation & Maintenance.

99011-57RK0-14E
Part No. 99011-57RK0-14E January, 2018 Printed in Thailand

Suzuki Red: Magenta 100%, Yellow 100%

Suzuki Blue: Cyan 100%, Magenta 70%
Takumi Blue: Cyan 100%, Black 85%
Black
 ENGLISH 14.0 mm

This owner’s manual applies to the SWIFT series. BATTERY LABEL SYMBOL MEANINGS

No smoking, no naked flames, no sparks Battery acid

Shield eyes Note operating instructions

Keep away from children Explosive gas

Prepared by

January, 2018

Part No. 99011-57RK0-14E

Printed in Thailand

57RK083
TP314
NOTE: The illustrated model is one of the SWIFT series.

Copyright © 2018 All Rights Reserved

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or
mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Suzuki Motor Corporation.
FOREWORD IMPORTANT
This manual should be considered as a All information in this manual is based WARNING/ CAUTION/NOTICE/
permanent part of the vehicle and should on the latest product information avail- NOTE
remain with the vehicle when resold or oth- able at the time of publication. Due to Please read this manual and follow its
erwise transferred to a new owner or oper- improvements or other changes, there instructions carefully. To emphasize spe-
ator. Please read this manual carefully may be discrepancies between informa- cial information, the symbol and the
before operating your new SUZUKI vehicle tion in this manual and your vehicle. words WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE
and review the manual from time to time. It SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION and NOTE have special meanings. Pay
contains important information on safety, reserves the right to make production particular attention to messages high-
operation and maintenance. changes at any time, without notice and lighted by these signal words:
without incurring any obligation to
make the same or similar changes to WARNING
vehicles previously built or sold.
Indicates a potential hazard that
This vehicle may not comply with stan- could result in death or serious
dards or regulations of other countries. injury.
Before attempting to register this vehi-
cle in any other country, check all appli-
cable regulations and make any CAUTION
necessary modifications. Indicates a potential hazard that
could result in minor or moderate
injury.
NOTE:
Please see the warning label named “Air NOTICE
bag symbol meaning” in “BEFORE DRIV-
Indicates a potential hazard that
ING” section for information on front air
bag protection. could result in vehicle damage.

NOTE:
Indicates special information to make
maintenance easier or instructions clearer.

57RK0-14E
 MODIFICATION WARNING NOTICE
The diagnostic connector of your
WARNING vehicle is prepared only for the spe-
Do not modify this vehicle. Modifica- cific diagnostic tool for inspection
tion could adversely affect safety, and service purpose. Connecting any
handling, performance, or durability other tool or device may interfere
and may violate governmental regula- with electronic parts operations and
tions. In addition, damage or perfor- cause running out of batteries.
mance problems resulting from
modification may not be covered
under warranty.

75F135
NOTICE
The circle with a slash in this manual
Improper installation of mobile com-
means “Do not do this” or “Do not let this
happen”. munication equipment such as cellu-
lar telephones, CB (Citizen’s Band)
radios or any other wireless transmit-
ters may cause electronic interfer-
ence with your vehicle’s ignition
system, resulting in vehicle perfor-
mance problems. Consult an autho-
rized SUZUKI dealer or qualified
service technician for advice.

57RK0-14E
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing SUZUKI product and welcome to our growing family. Your choice was a wise one; SUZUKI products have great
value that will give you driving pleasure for years.

This owner’s manual was prepared to give you a safe, enjoyable, and trouble-free experience with your SUZUKI vehicle. In this manual,
you will learn about the vehicle’s operation, its safety features and maintenance requirements. Please read the manual carefully before
operating your vehicle. Afterwards, keep this manual in the glove box for further reference.

Should you resell the vehicle, please leave this manual with it for the next owner.

In addition to the owner’s manual, the other booklets provided with your SUZUKI vehicle explain the vehicle’s warranties. We recom-
mend you read them as well to familiarize yourself with this important information.

When planning the regular scheduled maintenance of your SUZUKI vehicle, we recommend you visit your local SUZUKI dealer. Their
factory-trained technicians will provide the best possible service and use only genuine SUZUKI parts and accessories or their equiva-
lents.

57RK0-14E
RECOMMENDATION OF GENUINE SUZUKI PARTS AND ACCESSORIES USE
SUZUKI strongly recommends the use of genuine SUZUKI parts and accessories. Genuine SUZUKI parts and accessories are built to
the highest standards of quality and performance, and are designed to fit your vehicle’s exact specifications.
A wide variety of non-genuine replacement parts and accessories for SUZUKI vehicles are currently available in the market. Using these
parts and accessories can affect the vehicle performance and shorten its useful life. Therefore, installation of non-genuine SUZUKI parts
and accessories is not covered under warranty.

Non-genuine SUZUKI parts and accessories

Some parts and accessories may be approved by certain authorities in your country.
Some parts and accessories are sold as SUZUKI-authorized replacement parts and accessories. Some genuine SUZUKI parts and
accessories are sold as re-use parts and accessories. These parts and accessories are non-genuine SUZUKI parts and accessories and
use of these parts is not covered under warranty.

Re-use of genuine SUZUKI parts and accessories

The resale or re-use of the following items which could cause hazards for users is expressly forbidden:
• Air bag components and all other pyrotechnic items, including their components (e.g. cushion, control devices and sensors)
• Seat belt system, including their components (e.g. webbing, buckles and retractors)
The air bag and seat belt pretensioner components contain explosive chemicals. These components should be removed and disposed
of properly by SUZUKI-authorized service shop or scrap yard to avoid unintended explosion before scrapping.

57RK0-14E
SERVICE STATION GUIDE
1. Engine hood release handle
(see section 5)
2. Engine coolant (see section 7)
3. Windshield washer fluid
(see section 7)
4. Engine oil dipstick <Yellow> 8
(see section 7)
5. CVT fluid dipstick <Orange>
(see section 7) 3
1 7
6. Lead-acid battery (see section 7)
7. Fuel lid release lever
(see section 1 / see section 5) 4 9
8. Tire pressure (see tire information 1
10
label on driver’s door lock pillar) 2 5
9. Tire/wheel replacement tools
(see section 8) 6
10. Flat tire repair kit (see section 8)

57RK001

57RK0-14E
MEMO

57RK0-14E
TABLE OF CONTENTS FUEL RECOMMENDATION 1

BEFORE DRIVING 2

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 3

DRIVING TIPS 4

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 5

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING 6

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 7

EMERGENCY SERVICE 8

APPEARANCE CARE 9

GENERAL INFORMATION 10

SPECIFICATIONS 11

INDEX 12

57RK0-14E
ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS

EXTERIOR, FRONT EXAMPLE

1. Engine hood (P.5-2)
2. Windshield wipers (P.2-92)
3. Frame (towing) hook (P.5-11)
4. Position lights & Daytime running 1 2
lights (D.R.L.) (if equipped)
(P.2-89, 2-90)
5. Front fog lights (if equipped)
(P.2-90, 7-37)
6. Headlights (P.2-89, 7-34)
7. Outside rearview mirrors (P.2-21)
8. Door locks (P.2-2)

3 4 5 6 7 8

57RK079

57RK0-14E
 ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS

EXTERIOR, REAR EXAMPLE

1. Radio antenna (P.5-26)
2. High-mount stop light (P.7-39) 1 2 3
3. Rear window wiper (P.2-94)
4. Fuel filler cap (P.5-1)
5. Rear combination lights (P.7-37)
6. Tailgate (P.2-4)
7. License plate lights (P.7-39)

4 5 6 7

57RK084

57RK0-14E
ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTERIOR, FRONT EXAMPLE

1. Front passenger’s front air bag 1 A 2
(P.2-42)
2. Power window controls (P.2-18)/
Remote mirror control switch
(if equipped) (P.2-21)/
Outside rearview mirror folding switch C B
(if equipped) (P.2-22)
3. Fuses (P.7-30)
4. Glove box (P.5-7)
5. Parking brake lever (P.3-10)
6. Side air bags (if equipped) (P.2-46)
7. Front seats (P.2-22)

3 4 5
6

57RK082

57RK0-14E
 ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Hands-free microphone (if equipped)

(P.5-53)
2. Front interior light (P.5-5, 7-39)
VIEW A EXAMPLE
3. Sun visor (P.5-4)
4. Inside rearview mirror (P.2-20) 1 2 3

57RK002

57RK0-14E
ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Remote audio controls (if equipped)

(P.5-64)
2. Driver’s front air bag (P.2-42)
VIEW B EXAMPLE
3. Cruise control switches (if equipped) 1 2 3 4 5 6
(P.3-25)
4. Lighting control lever (P.2-89)/
Turn signal control lever (P.2-91)/
Front fog light switch (if equipped)
(P.2-90)
5. Ignition switch (vehicle without key-
less push start system) (P.3-3)
6. Engine switch (vehicle with keyless
push start system) (P.3-5)
7. Tilt/telescoping (if equipped) steering
column lock lever (P.2-95)
8. Fuel lid release lever (P.5-1)
9. Engine hood release handle (P.5-2)
10. ESP® OFF switch (P.3-31)
11. ENG A-STOP OFF switch (P.3-20)
12. Headlight leveling switch (if equipped)
(P.2-90)

10 11 12

7 8 9
57RK081

57RK0-14E
 ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Hazard warning switch (P.2-92)

2. Theft deterrent alarm system
(if equipped) (P.2-14)/
VIEW C 1 2 3 4 5
EXAMPLE
Theft deterrent light (if equipped)
(P.2-18)
3. Windshield wiper and washer lever
(P.2-92)/
Rear window wiper/washer switch
(P.2-94)
4. Instrument cluster (P.2-52, 2-61)/
Information display (P.2-55, 2-64)
5. Hands-free switches (if equipped)
(P.5-53)
6. Audio (if equipped) (P.5-27)
7. Accessory socket (P.5-6)
8. AUX/USB socket (if equipped) (P.5-7)
9. Heating and air conditioning system
(P.5-14)/
Heated rear window switch
(if equipped) (P.2-96)
10. Gearshift lever (P.3-16)

6 7 8 9 10
57RK111

57RK0-14E
ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTERIOR, REAR EXAMPLE

1. Seat belts (P.2-26)
2. Assist grips (if equipped) (P.5-7) 1 2 3
3. Side curtain air bags (if equipped)
(P.2-46)
4. Rear seats (P.2-24)

52RM00071

57RK0-14E
 ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS

LUGGAGE EXAMPLE
COMPARTMENT
1. Luggage compartment cover
(if equipped) (P.5-11) 1
2. Luggage compartment light
(if equipped) (P.5-5, 7-39)
3. Luggage compartment hook (P.5-10)
4. Jack handle (P.8-1)
5. Towing hook (P.5-11)
6. Wheel wrench (P.8-1)
7. Flat tire repair kit (P.8-6)
8. Jack (P.8-1)

2 3 4 5 6 7
8

57RK003

57RK0-14E
ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS

MEMO

57RK0-14E
 FUEL RECOMMENDATION

FUEL RECOMMENDATION 1
Fuel recommendation ......................................................... 1-1

65D394

57RK0-14E
FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Gasoline-ethanol blends
Fuel recommendation Blends of unleaded gasoline and ethanol NOTICE
(grain alcohol), also known as gasohol, are
commercially available in certain areas. Be careful not to spill fuel containing
Blends of this type may be used in your alcohol while refueling. If fuel is
E20 EXAMPLE spilled on the vehicle body, wipe it up
vehicle if they are no more than 20% etha-
nol. Check that this gasoline-ethanol blend immediately. Fuels containing alco-
has octane ratings no lower than those hol can cause paint damage, which is
recommended for the gasoline. not covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Gasoline containing MTBE
Unleaded gasoline containing MTBE
(methyl tertiary butyl ether) may be used in
your vehicle if the MTBE content is not
greater than 15%. This oxygenated fuel
does not contain alcohol.

57RK109 NOTICE
To avoid damaging catalytic converter, you The fuel tank has an air space to
must use unleaded gasoline with an allow for fuel expansion in hot
octane number (RON) of 91 or higher. This weather. If you continue to add fuel
is identified by a label attached on fuel lid after the filler nozzle has automati-
that states: “UNLEADED FUEL ONLY”, cally shut off or an initial blowback
“NUR UNVERBLEITES BENZIN”, occurs, the air chamber will become
“ENDAST BLYFRI BENSIN” or “SOLO full. Exposure to heat when fully
GASOLINA SIN PLOMO”. fuelled in this manner will result in
leakage due to fuel expansion. To
prevent such fuel leakage, stop filling
after the filler nozzle has automati-
cally shut off, or when initial vent
blowback occurs, if using an alterna-
tive non-automatic system.

1-1

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

BEFORE DRIVING
Supplemental restraint system (air bags) ......................... 2-41
Instrument cluster (Type A) (if equipped) ......................... 2-52 2
Speedometer ....................................................................... 2-53
Tachometer .......................................................................... 2-53
Fuel gauge ........................................................................... 2-53
Brightness control .............................................................. 2-54
Information display ............................................................. 2-55
Instrument cluster (Type B) (if equipped) ......................... 2-61
Speedometer ....................................................................... 2-62
Tachometer .......................................................................... 2-62
Fuel gauge ........................................................................... 2-62
Temperature gauge ............................................................. 2-63
Brightness control .............................................................. 2-63
Information display ............................................................. 2-64
Information switch (if equipped) ........................................ 2-80
Warning and indicator lights .............................................. 2-80
60G404
Lighting control lever ......................................................... 2-89
Keys ......................................................................................2-1 Headlight leveling switch (if equipped) ............................. 2-90
Door locks ............................................................................2-2 Turn signal control lever .................................................... 2-91
Keyless push start system remote controller / Hazard warning switch ....................................................... 2-92
Keyless entry system transmitter (if equipped) ................2-6 Windshield wiper and washer lever .................................. 2-92
Theft deterrent alarm system (if equipped) .......................2-14 Tilt/telescoping (if equipped) steering lock lever ............. 2-95
Theft deterrent light (if equipped) ......................................2-18 Horn ...................................................................................... 2-96
Windows ...............................................................................2-18 Heated rear window switch (if equipped) ......................... 2-96
Mirrors ..................................................................................2-20
Front seats ...........................................................................2-22
Rear seats .............................................................................2-24
Seat belts and child restraint systems ..............................2-26

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Keys Immobilizer system NOTICE

This system is designed to help prevent Do not modify or remove the immobi-
vehicle theft by electronically disabling the lizer system. If modified or removed,
EXAMPLE engine starting system. the system cannot be properly oper-
The engine can be started only with your ated.
vehicle’s original immobilizer ignition key
or keyless push start system remote con-
troller, which has an electronic identifica- NOTE:
tion code programmed in it. The key or • If the immobilizer/keyless push start sys-
remote controller communicates the identi- tem warning light blinks or comes on, a
fication code to the vehicle when the igni- message may be shown on the informa-
tion switch is turned to “ON” position or the tion display.
engine switch is pressed to change the • This immobilizer system is maintenance-
ignition mode to ON. If you need to make free.
spare keys or remote controllers, see an
authorized SUZUKI dealer. The vehicle For vehicles without a keyless push
54G489 must be programmed with the correct iden- start system
tification code for the spare. A key made If this light blinks, turn the ignition switch to
Your vehicle comes with a pair of identical “LOCK” position, and then turn it back to
keys. Keep one of the keys as a spare key by an ordinary locksmith will not work.
“ON” position.
in a safe place. One key can open all of the If the light still blinks after the ignition
locks on the vehicle. switch is turned back to “ON” position,
The key identification number is stamped there may be something wrong with your
on a metal tag provided with the keys or on key or with the immobilizer system. Ask an
the keys. Keep the tag in a safe place. If authorized SUZUKI dealer to have the sys-
you lose your keys, you will need this num- tem inspected.
ber to have new keys made. Write the
80JM122
number below for your future reference.
If the immobilizer/keyless push start sys-
KEY NUMBER: tem warning light blinks when the ignition
switch is in “ON” position or the ignition
mode is ON, the engine will not start.

2-1

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

For vehicles with a keyless push start • If you attach any metal objects to the
system immobilizer key or remote controller, it Door locks
If this light blinks, change the ignition mode may not start the engine.
to LOCK (OFF), and then change it back to
ON. Also refer to “If the master warning NOTICE Side door locks
indicator light blinks and the engine cannot
be started” in “Starting engine (vehicle with The immobilizer key and remote con-
keyless push start system) (if equipped)” in troller are sensitive electronic instru- EXAMPLE
“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section. ments. To avoid damaging them:
If the light still blinks after the ignition mode • Do not expose them to impacts,
is changed back to ON, there may be moisture or high temperature such (1)
something wrong with your key or with the as on the dashboard under direct (4) (2)
immobilizer system. Ask an authorized sunlight.
SUZUKI dealer to have the system • Keep them away from magnetic
inspected. objects.

The immobilizer/keyless push start system (3)

warning light may also blink if the remote Ignition key reminder
controller is not in the vehicle when you A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind
close the door or attempt to start the you to remove the ignition key if it is in the
engine. ignition keyhole when the driver’s door is 52RM20830

opened. (1) UNLOCK

NOTE: (2) LOCK
• If you lose your immobilizer ignition key (3) Front
or remote controller, ask an authorized (4) Rear
SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible to
deactivate the lost one, and to make a To lock the driver’s door from the outside of
new key or remote controller. the vehicle:
• If you own other vehicles with immobi-
lizer keys, keep those keys away from • Insert the key and turn the top of the key
the ignition switch or the engine switch toward the front of the vehicle, or
when using your SUZUKI vehicle. Other- • Turn the lock knob forward, then pull and
wise, the engine may not be started hold the door handle as you close the
because they may interfere with your door.
SUZUKI vehicle’s immobilizer system.

2-2

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

To unlock the driver’s door from the out- key in the driver’s door lock and turn the
side of the vehicle, insert the key and turn Central door locking system top of the key toward the rear of the vehi-
the top of the key toward the rear of the (if equipped) cle twice.
vehicle.
EXAMPLE NOTE:
EXAMPLE You can switch the function that unlocks all
doors from requiring two turns to requiring
(2) one turn, and vice versa, via the informa-
(1)
(4) tion display setting mode. For details on
(2) (1) how to use the information display, refer to
“Information display” in this section.
To unlock the driver’s door only, insert the
(3) key in that door lock and turn the top of the
key toward the rear of the vehicle once.

EXAMPLE
57RK007
57RK006
(1) LOCK (1)
(1) LOCK (2) UNLOCK
(2) UNLOCK (3) Front
(4) Rear (2)
To lock the door from the inside of the vehi-
cle, turn the lock knob forward. Turn the You can lock and unlock all doors (includ-
lock knob backward to unlock the door. ing the tailgate) simultaneously by using
To lock the rear door from the outside of the key in the driver’s door lock.
the vehicle, turn the lock knob forward and To lock all doors simultaneously, insert the
close the door. You do not need to pull and key in the driver’s door lock and turn the 57RK008
hold the door handle as you close the door. top of the key toward the front of the vehi-
cle once. (1) LOCK
NOTE: (2) UNLOCK
Hold the door handle when you close the To unlock the driver’s door only, insert the
locked front door, or the door will not key in that door lock and turn the top of the You can also lock or unlock all doors by
remain locked. key toward the rear of the vehicle once. To pressing the front or rear of the switch,
unlock all doors simultaneously, insert the respectively.

2-3

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

NOTE:
• If your vehicle is equipped with the key- Child-proof locks (rear door) Tailgate
less entry system or keyless push start
system, you can also lock or unlock all EXAMPLE WARNING
doors by operating the transmitter or
remote controller. Refer to “Keyless Always check that the tailgate is
push start system remote controller / closed and latched securely. Com-
Keyless entry system transmitter (if (2) pletely closing the tailgate helps pre-
equipped)” in this section. vent occupants from being thrown
• If your vehicle is equipped with the key- (1) from the vehicle in the event of an
less push start system, you can also lock accident. Completely closing it also
or unlock all doors by pushing the helps keep exhaust gases from enter-
request switch. Refer to “Keyless push ing the vehicle.
start system remote controller / Keyless
entry system transmitter (if equipped)” in Type1
this section. EXAMPLE
52RM20030

(1) LOCK
(2) UNLOCK

Each of the rear doors is equipped with a

child-proof lock which can be used to help
prevent unwanted opening of the door
from inside the vehicle. When the lock
lever is in LOCK position (1), the rear door
can only be opened from outside. When
the lock lever is in UNLOCK position (2), (1)
the rear door can be opened from inside or
outside. 57RK102

(1) Tailgate unlatch switch

WARNING
Place the child-proof lock in LOCK You can lock and unlock the tailgate by
position whenever children are using the key in the driver’s door lock.
seated in the rear. To open the tailgate, push and hold the tail-
gate unlatch switch (1) and lift the tailgate.

2-4

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

NOTE: NOTE: Type2

When the tailgate is closed incompletely, Be careful not to lose the cover (2)
follow the procedure below: because it is small and detachable. EXAMPLE
1) Push the tailgate unlatch switch (1) and
open the tailgate. EXAMPLE
2) After a few seconds, close the tailgate.
3) Check that the tailgate is closed com-
pletely.

If you cannot unlock the tailgate by using

the key in the driver’s door lock due to a
discharged lead-acid battery or malfunc- (3)
tion, follow the procedure below to unlatch
the tailgate from inside the vehicle.
1) Fold the rear seat forward for easier (3)
57RK010
access. Refer to “Folding rear seats”
section for details on how to fold the 65P30080 To open the tailgate, insert the key and
rear seat forward. turn it clockwise to unlatch and lift the tail-
3) Move the lever (3) in arrow direction by gate.
EXAMPLE using a flat-bladed screwdriver to
unlock the tailgate. NOTICE
4) Push open the tailgate from inside. The
tailgate will be latched again by simply Do not use the key to lift up the tail-
closing the tailgate. gate, or the key may break off in the
lock.
If the tailgate cannot be unlatched by push-
ing the unlatch switch (1), have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI
dealer.

(2) CAUTION
52RM20640 Check that there is no one near the
tailgate when pushing open the tail-
2) Open the cover (2) in the lock mecha-
gate from inside the vehicle.
nism of the tailgate.

2-5

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Keyless push start system WARNING Keyless push start system remote
controller (Type A)
remote controller / Keyless Radio waves from the keyless push
start system antenna(s) may interfere The remote controller enables the follow-
entry system transmitter ing operations:
with operation of electrical medical
(if equipped) equipment such as pacemakers. Fail- • You can lock or unlock the doors by
ure to take the precautions listed operating LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on
below can increase the risk of severe the remote controller. Refer to the expla-
injury or death due to radio wave nation in this section.
Type A Type B • You can lock or unlock the doors by
interference.
• Anyone who uses electrical medi- pushing the request switch. For details,
cal equipment such as a pace- refer to the explanation in this section.
maker should consult the medical • You can start the engine without using
equipment supplier or their medical an ignition key. For details, refer to
advisor about whether radio waves “Engine switch (vehicle with keyless
from the antenna(s) can interfere push start system)” in “OPERATING
with the medical equipment. YOUR VEHICLE” section.
• If radio wave interference is a con-
cern, have the function of the
antenna(s) disabled by an autho-
rized SUZUKI dealer.
52RM20050
(2)
Your vehicle is equipped with either a key-
less push start system remote controller (1)
(Type A) or a keyless entry system trans-
mitter (Type B). The remote controller has
a keyless entry system and a keyless push
start system. The transmitter has only a
keyless entry system. For details, refer to
the following explanations.
52RM20060

(1) LOCK button

(2) UNLOCK button

2-6

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

There are two ways to lock or unlock all • If the interior light switch is in DOOR Keyless unlocking/locking using the
doors (including the tailgate) simultane- position, the interior light will turn on for request switches
ously by operating the remote controller about 15 seconds and then fade out. If
near the vehicle. you press the engine switch during this
time, the light will start to fade out imme-
Central door locking system diately.
• To lock all doors, push LOCK button (1)
once. Check that the doors are locked after you
• To unlock only the driver’s door, push operate LOCK button (1).
UNLOCK button (2) once. To unlock
other doors, push UNLOCK button (2) NOTE:
once again. If no door is opened within about 30 sec-
onds after UNLOCK button (2) is operated,
NOTE: the doors will automatically lock again.
EXAMPLE (1)
You can switch the function that unlocks all
doors from requiring two pushes to requir- NOTE: 57RK103
ing one push, and vice versa, via the infor- • The maximum operating distance of the
mation display setting mode. For details on remote controller is about 5 m (16 ft.), When the remote controller is within the
how to use the information display, refer to but this can vary depending on the sur- operating range described in this section,
“Information display” in this section. roundings, especially near other trans- you can lock or unlock the doors (including
mitting devices such as radio towers or the tailgate) by pushing the request switch
The turn signal lights will flash once and CB (Citizen’s Band) radios. (1) on the driver’s door handle, front pas-
the exterior buzzer will sound once when • The door locks cannot be operated with senger’s door handle or tailgate.
the doors are locked. the remote controller if the ignition mode When all doors are unlocked:
When the doors are unlocked: is in any other mode than LOCK (OFF). • To lock all doors, push one of the
• The turn signal lights will flash twice and • When any door is open, if you push request switches once.
the exterior buzzer will sound twice. LOCK button on the remote controller,
the exterior buzzer will sound and doors
cannot be locked.
• If you lose one of the remote controllers,
ask an authorized SUZUKI dealer as
soon as possible for replacement. Have
an authorized SUZUKI dealer program
the new remote controller code in your
vehicle’s memory so that the old code is
erased.

2-7

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

The turn signal lights will flash once and NOTE: When the remote controller is within
the exterior buzzer will sound once when • The door locks cannot be operated by approximately 80 cm (2 1/2 feet) from a
the doors are locked. the request switch under the following front door handle or the tailgate switch, you
conditions: can lock or unlock the doors by pushing
To unlock a door or all doors: – If any door is open or is not completely the request switch.
To unlock only one door, push one of the closed.
request switches once. To unlock all doors, – If the ignition mode is in any other NOTE:
push one of the request switches twice. mode than LOCK (OFF). • If the remote controller is outside the
• If no doors are opened within about 30 request switch operating range
NOTE: seconds after unlocking the doors by described above, you will not be able to
You can switch the function that unlocks all pushing the request switch, the doors operate the request switch.
doors from requiring two pushes to requir- will be locked again automatically. • If the battery of the remote controller
ing one push, and vice versa, via the infor- runs down or there are strong radio
mation display setting mode. For details on EXAMPLE waves or noise, the request switch oper-
how to use the information display, refer to ating range may be reduced or the
“Information display” in this section. (1) remote controller may be inoperative.
• If the remote controller is too close to the
When the doors are unlocked: door glass, the request switches may not
• The turn signal lights will flash twice and (1) operate.
the exterior buzzer will sound twice. • If a spare remote controller is in the vehi-
• If the interior light switch is in DOOR cle, the request switches may not oper-
position, the interior light will turn on for ate normally.
about 15 seconds and then fade out. If • The remote controller will only operate a
you press the engine switch during this (1) request switch if it is within the switch’s
time, the light will start to fade out imme- operating range. For example, if the
diately. remote controller is within the operating
68PH00210 range of the driver’s door request switch
Check that the doors are locked after you (1) 80 cm (2 1/2 feet) but not the front passenger’s door
operate the request switch to lock the request switch or the tailgate request
doors. switch, the driver’s door switch can be
operated but the front passenger’s door
switch or tailgate switch cannot be oper-
ated.

2-8

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

• Check that the driver always carries the

NOTICE remote controller.
• If you lose one of the remote controllers,
The remote controller is a sensitive ask an authorized SUZUKI dealer as
electronic instrument. To avoid dam- )A(
soon as possible for a replacement.
aging the remote controller: Have an authorized SUZUKI dealer pro-
• Do not expose it to impacts, mois- gram the new remote controller code in
ture or high temperature such as your vehicle’s memory so that the old
by leaving it on the dashboard code is erased.
under direct sunlight. • You can use up to four remote control-
• Keep the remote controller away lers and the keys for your vehicle. Ask
from magnetic objects such as a an authorized SUZUKI dealer for details.
television. • The battery life of the remote controller
is about two years, but it can vary
NOTE: depending on usage conditions. 52RM20090
The keyless push start system may not
function correctly in certain environments To remove the key from the remote control-
or under certain operating conditions such ler, slide the lock knob (A) in arrow direc-
as the following: tion and pull the key out from the remote
• When there are strong signals coming controller.
from a television, power station or a cel-
lular phone. Request switch warning buzzer
• When the remote controller is in contact The exterior buzzer beeps for about 2 sec-
with or covered by a metal object. onds in the following conditions to warn
• When a radio wave type remote keyless you that the request switch is not working:
entry is used nearby. • The request switch is pressed after all
• When the remote controller is placed doors are closed with the ignition mode
near an electronic device such as per- changed to ACC or ON by pressing the
sonal computer. engine switch.
• The request switch is pressed in any of
Some additional precautions you should 52RM20080
the following conditions after changing
take and information you should be aware To stow the key into the remote controller, the ignition mode to LOCK (OFF) by
of are: push the key in the remote controller until pressing the engine switch.
• Check that the key is stowed in the you hear a click. – The remote controller is left inside the
remote controller. If the remote controller vehicle.
becomes unusable, you will not be able – Any door (including the tailgate) is
to lock or unlock the doors. open.

2-9

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Press the request switch again after doing The indicator light will turn off within sev- Battery replacement
the following: eral seconds after the remote controller is If the remote controller becomes unusable,
With the ignition mode changed to LOCK returned to an area of the vehicle other replace the battery.
(OFF) by pressing the engine switch, bring than the rear luggage area.
To replace the battery of the remote con-
out the remote controller if it is inside the
If the remote controller is left in the vehicle troller:
vehicle and check that all doors are com-
and you lock the driver’s door or front pas-
pletely closed.
senger’s door as described below, the door
will be automatically unlocked.
Reminder function
• If you open the driver’s door and lock the
EXAMPLE door by turning the lock knob forward or
pushing the power door locking switch,
the driver’s door will be automatically
unlocked.
• If you open the front passenger’s door
and lock the door by turning the lock
knob forward or pushing the power door
locking switch, the front passenger’s
door will be automatically unlocked.

NOTE: 52RM20650
• The reminder will not operate when the 1) Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver covered
remote controller is on the instrument with a soft cloth in the slot of the remote
52RM20610 panel, in the glove box, in a storage controller and pry it open.
If the remote controller is not in the vehicle compartment, in the sun visor or on the
under the following conditions, the buzzer floor, etc.
sounds intermittently for about 2 seconds • Check that the driver always carries the
and the immobilizer/keyless push start sys- remote controller.
tem warning light on the instrument cluster • Do not leave the remote controller in the
blinks: vehicle when leaving the vehicle.
When one or more doors are opened and
all of the doors are later closed with the
ignition in any other mode than LOCK
(OFF).

2-10

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

WARNING
(1) Swallowing a lithium battery may
cause serious internal injury. Do not
allow anyone to swallow a lithium (1)
battery. Keep lithium batteries away
from children and pets. If swallowed,
contact a physician immediately.

NOTICE
• The remote controller is a sensitive
electronic instrument. To avoid
56RH00214 damaging it, do not expose it to 80JM133
dust or moisture or tamper with
(1) Lithium disc type battery: (1) Crossed-out wheeled bin symbol
internal parts.
CR2032 or equivalent
• When replacing the battery by
The crossed-out wheeled bin symbol (1)
yourself, the remote controller
2) Replace the battery (1) so its – terminal indicates that a used battery should be col-
could be damaged affected by
faces the bottom of the case as shown lected separately from ordinary household
static electricity. Discharge the
in the illustration. trash.
static electricity built up in your
3) Close the remote controller firmly.
body by touching metal before By ensuring the used battery is disposed
4) Check that the door locks can be oper-
replacing the battery. of or recycled correctly, you will help pre-
ated with the remote controller.
5) Dispose of the used battery properly vent potential negative consequences for
according to applicable rules or regula- NOTE: the environment and human health, which
tions. Do not dispose of lithium batter- Used batteries must be disposed of prop- could otherwise be caused by inappropri-
ies with ordinary household trash. erly according to applicable rules or regu- ate battery disposal. The recycling of
lations and must not be disposed of with materials will help to conserve natural
ordinary household trash. resources. For more detailed information
about disposing of or recycling the used
battery, consult an authorized SUZUKI
dealer.

2-11

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Central door locking system NOTE:

Keyless entry system transmitter • To lock all doors, push LOCK button (1) • The maximum operating distance of the
(Type B) once. keyless entry system transmitter is about
• To unlock only the driver’s door, push 5 m (16 ft.), but this can vary depending
UNLOCK button (2) once. on the surroundings, especially near
• To unlock other doors, push UNLOCK other transmitting devices such as radio
button (2) once again. towers or CB (Citizen’s Band) radios.
• The door locks cannot be operated with
NOTE: the transmitter, if the ignition key is
You can switch the function that unlocks all inserted in the ignition switch.
doors from requiring two pushes to requir- • When any door is open, the door locks
ing one push, and vice versa, via the infor- can only be unlocked with the transmit-
mation display setting mode. For details on ter, and the turn signal light will not flash.
(1) how to use the information display, refer to • If you lose one of the transmitters, ask
(2) “Information display” in this section. an authorized SUZUKI dealer as soon
as possible for a replacement. Have an
The turn signal lights will flash once when authorized SUZUKI dealer program the
79MH0237 the doors are locked. new transmitter code in your vehicle’s
memory so that the old code is erased.
(1) LOCK button
When the doors are unlocked:
(2) UNLOCK button
• The turn signal lights will flash twice. NOTICE
• If the interior light switch is in DOOR
There are two ways to lock or unlock all The transmitter is a sensitive elec-
position, the interior light will turn on for
doors (including the tailgate) simultane- tronic instrument. To avoid damaging
about 15 seconds and then fade out. If
ously by operating the transmitter near the the transmitter:
you insert the key into the ignition switch
vehicle. • Do not expose it to impacts, mois-
during this time, the light will start to fade
out immediately. ture or high temperature such as
by leaving it on the dashboard
Check that the doors are locked after you under direct sunlight.
operate LOCK button (1). • Keep the transmitter away from
magnetic objects such as a televi-
NOTE: sion.
If no door is opened within about 30 sec-
onds after UNLOCK button (2) is operated,
the doors will automatically lock again.

2-12

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Battery replacement
If the transmitter becomes unusable, WARNING
replace the battery. (2) Swallowing a lithium battery may
To replace the battery of the transmitter: cause serious internal injury. Do not
allow anyone to swallow a lithium
battery. Keep lithium batteries away
from children and pets. If swallowed,
(1) contact a physician immediately.
(3)
(2) NOTICE
• The transmitter is a sensitive elec-
tronic instrument. To avoid damag-
68LM249 ing it, do not expose it to dust or
moisture or tamper with internal
(3) Lithium disc type battery:
parts.
CR1616 or equivalent
• When replacing the battery by
yourself, the transmitter controller
68LM248 3) Put the edge of a flat-bladed screw-
could be damaged affected by
driver in the slot of the transmitter (2)
1) Remove the screw (1), and open the static electricity. Discharge the
and pry it open.
transmitter cover. static electricity built up in your
4) Replace the battery (3) so its + terminal
2) Remove the transmitter (2). body by touching metal before
faces “+” mark of the transmitter.
replacing the battery.
5) Close the transmitter and install it into
the transmitter holder.
6) Close the transmitter cover, install and NOTE:
tighten the screw (1). Used batteries must be disposed of prop-
7) Check that the door locks can be oper- erly according to applicable rules or regu-
ated with the transmitter. lations and must not be disposed of with
8) Dispose of the used battery properly ordinary household trash.
according to applicable rules or regula-
tions. Do not dispose of lithium batter-
ies with ordinary household trash.

2-13

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

NOTE:
Theft deterrent alarm system • The theft deterrent alarm system gener-
(if equipped) ates alarms when any of the predeter-
mined conditions is met. However, the
NOTE: system does not have any function of
(1)
For the theft deterrent light (for vehicles blocking unauthorized entry into your
without keyless entry system or keyless vehicle.
push start system), refer to “Theft deterrent • Always use the keyless push start sys-
light (if equipped)” in this section. tem remote controller, the request switch
or the keyless entry system transmitter
A theft deterrent alarm system is armed in to unlock the doors when the theft deter-
about 20 seconds after you lock the doors. rent alarm system has been armed.
Keyless push start system – Use the Using a key instead will trigger the
remote controller or push the request alarm.
80JM133
switch on driver’s door handle, front pas- • If a person who does not know the theft
(1) Crossed-out wheeled bin symbol senger’s door handle or tailgate. deterrent alarm system is going to drive
Keyless entry system – Use the transmit- your vehicle, we recommend you explain
The crossed-out wheeled bin symbol (1) ter. the system and its operation to the per-
indicates that a used battery should be col- Once the system is armed, any attempt to son, or disable the system beforehand.
lected separately from ordinary household open a door by using any other means (*) Mistakenly triggering the alarm may
trash. than the keyless push start system remote cause a nuisance to others.
controller, the request switch or the key- • Even if the theft deterrent alarm system
By ensuring the used battery is disposed is armed, you should still be careful to
of or recycled correctly, you will help pre- less entry system transmitter will cause the
alarm to be triggered. guard against theft. Do not leave money
vent potential negative consequences for or things of value in your vehicle.
the environment and human health, which * These means include the following:
– The key • The theft deterrent alarm system is
could otherwise be caused by inappropri- maintenance-free.
ate battery disposal. The recycling of – The lock knob on a door
materials will help to conserve natural – The power door locking switch
resources. For more detailed information
about disposing of or recycling of the used NOTICE
battery, consult an authorized SUZUKI Do not modify or remove the theft
dealer. deterrent alarm system. If modified or
removed, the system cannot be prop-
erly operated.

2-14

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

How to arm the theft deterrent alarm NOTE: How to disarm the theft deterrent alarm
system (when enabled) • To prevent the alarm from being acci- system
Lock all doors (including the tailgate) using dentally triggered, avoid arming it while Simply unlock the doors using the keyless
the keyless push start system remote con- anyone remains inside the vehicle. The push start system remote controller, the
troller, the request switch or the keyless alarm will be triggered if any person request switch or the keyless entry system
entry system transmitter. The theft deter- inside unlocks a door by operating the transmitter. The theft deterrent light will go
rent light (1) will start blinking, and the theft lock knob or power door locking switch. out, indicating that the theft deterrent alarm
deterrent alarm system will be armed in • The theft deterrent alarm system is not system is disarmed.
about 20 seconds. armed when all doors are locked using
While the system is being armed, the indi- the key from outside, or using the door How to stop the alarm
cator continues to blink at intervals of lock knobs or the power door locking Should the alarm be triggered accidentally,
approximately 2 seconds. switch from inside. unlock the doors using the keyless push
• If any door is not operated within approx- start system remote controller, the request
imately 30 seconds after the doors have switch or the keyless entry system trans-
been unlocked using the keyless push mitter, or press the engine switch to
start system remote controller, the change the ignition mode to ON or turn the
request switch or the keyless entry sys- ignition switch to “ON” position. The alarm
tem transmitter, the doors are automati- will then stop.
cally locked again. After the doors are
locked, the theft deterrent alarm system NOTE:
will be armed in about 20 seconds if the • Even after the alarm has stopped, if you
system is in the enabled state. lock the doors using the keyless push
start system remote controller, the
(1) request switch or the keyless entry sys-
tem transmitter, the theft deterrent alarm
EXAMPLE system will be rearmed with a delay of
57RK011 about 20 seconds.

2-15

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

• If you disconnect the lead-acid battery Enabling and disabling the theft deter- How to switch the state of the theft
while the theft deterrent alarm system is rent alarm system deterrent alarm system
in the armed condition or the alarm is The theft deterrent alarm system can be You can switch the theft deterrent alarm
actually in operation, the alarm will be either enabled or disabled. system from the enabled state to the dis-
triggered or re-triggered when the bat- abled state, and vice versa, using the fol-
tery is then reconnected, although, in the When enabled (factory setting) lowing method.
latter case, the alarm remains stopped When the system is enabled, it causes the
for the period between disconnection hazard warning lights to flash for about 40 EXAMPLE
and reconnection of the lead-acid bat- seconds if any of the alarm trigger condi-
tery. tions is met. The system also causes the
• Even after the alarm has stopped at the interior buzzer to beep intermittently for (2)
end of the predetermined operation time, about 10 seconds, which is followed by
it will be triggered again if any door is intermittent sounding of the horn for about
opened without disarming the theft 30 seconds.
deterrent alarm system. The theft deterrent light continues to blink (1)
during this time.
Checking whether the alarm has been
triggered during parking When disabled
If the alarm was triggered due to an unau- When the system is disabled, it stays dis-
thorized entry into the vehicle and you then armed even if you perform any system
press the engine switch to change the igni- arming operation. 57RK012
tion mode to ON or turn the ignition switch
to “ON” position, the theft deterrent light
will blink rapidly for about 8 seconds and a
EXAMPLE
buzzer will beep 4 times during this period.
If this happens, check whether your vehi-
cle has been broken into while you were
away from it.

(3)

57RK013

2-16

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

1) Close all the doors and turn the lock Every time you perform the series of the
knob (1) on the driver’s door in the EXAMPLE above steps, the state of the theft deterrent
unlocking direction (2) (rearward). Turn alarm system changes from the currently
the knob on the lighting control lever to selected one to the other. You can check
“OFF” position (3). (5) whether the system is enabled or disabled
by the number of interior buzzer beeps at
NOTE: the end of the procedure as follows.
All operations included in the following (7) (6)
Step 2) and 3) must be completed within System state Number of beeps
15 seconds.
Disabled
Once
(Mode A)
EXAMPLE
Enabled
4 times
57RK015 (Mode D)
(5) LOCK
(6) UNLOCK NOTE:
(4) • You cannot disable the theft deterrent
(3) 3) Push the lock end (5) (forward end) of alarm system while it is in the armed
the power door lock switch (7) to lock condition.
the doors, and then the unlock end (6) • If you fail to complete the operations in
(backward end) to unlock the doors. Step 2) and 3) within 15 seconds, per-
Repeat these operations 3 times and form the procedure again from the
finally push the lock end of the switch. beginning.
57RK014 • Check that all doors are closed when
2) Turn the knob on the lighting control performing the above procedure.
lever to the position (4) and then to
“OFF” position (3). Repeat this opera- NOTE:
tion 4 times with the control lever finally You can also switch the theft deterrent
set to “OFF” position. alarm system from the enabled state to the
disabled state, and vice versa, via the
information display setting mode. For
details on how to use the information dis-
play, refer to “Information display” in this
section.

2-17

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Theft deterrent light Windows Electric window controls

(if equipped) The electric windows can only be operated
Manual window control when the ignition switch is in “ON” position
or the ignition mode is ON.
(if equipped)
Driver’s side (Type A)
EXAMPLE
(1)

EXAMPLE (2)
57RK016

This light will blink with the ignition switch 60G010A

in “LOCK” or “ACC” position. The blinking 57RK017
light is intended to deter theft by leading Raise or lower the door windows by turning
others to believe that the vehicle is the handle located on the door panel.
equipped with a security system.

NOTE:
For the theft deterrent alarm system (for
vehicles with keyless entry system or key-
less push start system), refer to “Theft
deterrent alarm system (if equipped)” in
this section.

2-18

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Driver’s side (Type B) Passenger’s door

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE CLOSE
(1)
(3)

OPEN

(2) (5)

(4)
81A009
57RK018 57RK019
To open a window, push the top part of the
The driver’s door has a switch (1) to oper- The passenger’s door has a switch (5) to
switch. To close the window, lift up the top
ate the driver’s window, and a switch (2) to operate the passenger’s window.
part of the switch.
operate the front passenger’s window or
there are switches (3), (4), to operate the The driver’s window has AUTO-DOWN
rear right and left passenger windows, features for greater convenience (at toll
respectively. booths or drive-through restaurants, for
example). These features allow the driver
to open the window without holding the
window switch in DOWN position. Press
down the driver’s window switch com-
pletely and release it. To stop the window
before it reaches the FULL-DOWN posi-
tion, pull up the switch briefly.

2-19

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Lock switch (Type A) operating any of the switches (2), (3), (4)
or (5). To restore normal operation, release Mirrors
EXAMPLE the lock switch by pushing it again.

WARNING Inside rearview mirror

• You should always lock the pas-
senger’s window operation when
there are children in the vehicle.
Children can be seriously injured if
they get part of their body caught
by the window during operation.
• To avoid injuring an occupant by
window entrapment, check that no 68LMT0205
part of the occupant’s body such as
57RK020 hands or head is in the path of the
electric windows when closing
Lock switch (Type B) them.
EXAMPLE • Always remove the ignition key or (1)
take the keyless push start system
remote controller with you when (2) (3)
leaving the vehicle even only for a
68LMT0206
short time. Also do not leave chil-
dren alone in a parked vehicle. (2) Day driving
Unattended children could use the (3) Night driving
electric window switches and get You can adjust the inside rearview mirror
trapped by the window. by hand to see the rear of your vehicle in
the mirror. To adjust the mirror, set the
NOTE: selector tab (1) to the day position, and
If you drive with one of the rear windows then move the mirror up, down or sideways
open, you may hear a loud sound caused by hand to obtain the best view.
57RK021 by air vibration. To reduce the sound, open
The driver’s door also has a lock switch for the driver’s or front passenger’s window, or
the passenger’s window(s). When you narrow the rear window opening.
push in the lock switch, the passenger’s
window(s) cannot be raised or lowered by

2-20

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

When driving at night, you can move the

selector tab to the night position to reduce Outside rearview mirrors Electric mirrors (if equipped)
glare from the headlights of vehicles
behind you. EXAMPLE EXAMPLE (1)
WARNING (3)
(2)
• Always adjust the mirror with the
selector set to the day position. (4)
• Only use the night position if it is (1)
necessary to reduce glare from the
headlights of vehicles behind you.
Be aware that in this position you (2) L R (3)
may not be able to see some
objects that could be seen in the (4)
day position.
57RK022 57RK023

Adjust the outside rearview mirrors so you The switch to control the electric mirrors is
can just see the side of your vehicle in the located on the driver’s door panel. You can
mirrors. adjust the mirrors when the ignition switch
is in “ACC” or “ON” position, or the ignition
WARNING mode is ACC or ON. To adjust the mirrors:
Be careful when judging the size or 1) Rotate the selector switch to the left or
distance of a vehicle or other object right to select the mirror you wish to
seen in the side convex mirror. Be adjust.
aware that objects look smaller and 2) Push the side of the switch to the direc-
appear farther away than when seen tion in which you wish to move the mir-
in a flat mirror. ror.
3) Return the selector switch to the center
position to prevent unintended mirror
movement.

2-21

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Outside rearview mirrors folding Front seats WARNING

switch (if equipped)
Do not place any object under the
Seat adjustment front seat. If an object becomes
EXAMPLE caught under the front seat, the fol-
lowing may occur.
WARNING • The seat will not be latched.
Never attempt to adjust the driver’s
(1) seat or seatback while driving. The
seat or seatback could move unex- EXAMPLE
pectedly, causing loss of control.
Check that the driver’s seat and seat-
back are properly adjusted before
you start driving.

WARNING
57RK024
To avoid excessive seat belt slack,
You can fold the mirrors when you park the which reduces the effectiveness of
vehicle in a narrow space. Push the folding the seat belts as a safety device,
switch (1) to fold and unfold the mirrors. check that the seats are adjusted
Make sure the mirrors are completely before the seat belts are fastened.
unfolded before you start driving.

CAUTION WARNING
Moving mirrors can pinch and injure All seatbacks should always be in an
a hand. Do not allow anyone’s hand upright position when driving, or seat
to get near the mirrors when folding belt effectiveness may be reduced.
and unfolding the mirrors. Seat belts are designed to offer maxi-
mum protection when seatbacks are
in the upright position.
(2) (3)
(1)
57RK025

2-22

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Seat position adjustment lever (1) NOTE:

Pull the lever up and slide the seat. Head restraints (Adjustable type) It may be necessary to recline the seat-
back to provide enough overhead clear-
Seatback angle adjustment lever (2) ance to remove the head restraint.
Pull the lever up and move the seatback.
Front
Seat height adjustment lever (3)
(if equipped) EXAMPLE
Pull the lever up to raise the seat. Push the
lever down to lower the seat.

After adjustment, move the seat and seat-

back back and forth to check if it is
securely latched.

80J001

Head restraints are designed to help

reduce the risk of neck injuries in the case
of an accident. Adjust the head restraint to 75RM004
the position which places the center of the To raise the front head restraint, pull
head restraint closest to the top of your upward the head restraint until it clicks. To
ears. If this is not possible for very tall pas- lower the head restraint, push down the
sengers, adjust the head restraint as high head restraint while holding in the lock
as possible. lever. If a head restraint must be removed
(for cleaning, replacement, etc.), push in
WARNING the lock lever and pull the head restraint all
• Never drive the vehicle with the the way out.
head restraints removed.
• Do not attempt to adjust the head
restraint while driving.

2-23

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Rear Rear center head restraint

Rear seats
EXAMPLE
Head restraints (if equipped)
Head restraints are designed to help
reduce the risk of neck injuries in the case
of an accident.

WARNING
• Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed.
• Do not attempt to adjust the head
restraint while driving.
61MM0A033 52RM251

NOTE: To raise the rear head restraint, pull When using the rear center head restraint,
It may be necessary to fold forward the upward the head restraint until it clicks. To pull it up and lock it securely before driving.
seatback to provide enough overhead lower the head restraint, push down the
clearance to remove the head restraint. head restraint while holding in the lock WARNING
lever. If a head restraint must be removed
Adjust the head restraint to the position (for cleaning, replacement, etc.), push in Do not allow anyone to sit in the rear
which places the center of the head the lock lever and pull the head restraint all center seat with the rear center head
restraint closest to the top of your ears. If the way out. restraint removed or in stowed posi-
this is not possible for very tall passengers, tion.
When installing a child restraint system,
adjust the head restraint as high as possi-
adjust the height of the head restraint or
ble.
remove it for fitting the child restraint, as
necessary.

2-24

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Folding rear seats NOTICE NOTICE

The rear seats of your vehicle can be • When you move a seatback, make After folding the rear seatback for-
folded forward to provide additional cargo sure the belt webbing is hooked in ward, do not allow any foreign mate-
space. the seat belt hangers so the seat rial to enter the lock opening. This
To fold the rear seats forward: belts are not caught by the seat- may cause damage to the inside of
back, seat hinge, or seat latch. This the lock and prevent the seatback
1) Lower the head restraint (if equipped) helps prevent damage to the belt from being locked securely.
fully. system.
• Make sure the belt webbing is not
EXAMPLE twisted. WARNING
If you need to carry cargo in the pas-
senger compartment with the rear
EXAMPLE seatback folded forward, secure the
cargo or it may be thrown about,
causing injury. Never pile cargo
higher than the seatbacks.

To return the seat to the normal position,

follow the procedure below.

CAUTION
52RM20150
When returning the rear seatback to
2) Hook the webbing of the outboard lap- the normal position, be careful that
shoulder belts in the belt hangers. your finger is not caught between the
52RM20160
lock and the striker.
3) Pull the release lever on the top of each
split seat, and fold the seatbacks for-
ward.

2-25

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

NOTICE CAUTION Seat belts and child restraint

• When returning the rear seatback Do not put your hand into the rear systems
to the normal position, check that seatback lock opening, or your finger
there is nothing around the striker. may get caught and be injured.
Any foreign materials prevent the
seatback from being locked
securely. CAUTION
• When you move a seatback, make After securing the rear seatback,
sure the belt webbing is hooked in check that it is locked securely. If it is
the seat belt hangers so the seat not, red will appear in the release
belts are not caught by the seat- lever.
back, seat hinge, or seat latch. This
helps prevent damage to the belt
system. NOTICE
• When returning the rear seatback
EXAMPLE to the normal position, do not allow
Unlock any foreign material to enter the 65D231S
Red lock opening. This may prevent the
seatback from being locked
securely. WARNING
• When returning the rear seatback Wear your seat belts at all times.
to the normal position, handle it
Lock carefully by hand to avoid any dam-
age to the lock itself. Do not push it WARNING
by using some material or by
An air bag supplements or adds to
applying excessive force.
the frontal crash protection offered
• As the lock is designed exclusively
by seat belts. The driver and all pas-
for securing the rear seatback, do
sengers must be properly restrained
52RM20170 not use it for any other purpose.
by fastening seat belts at all times,
Incorrect use of it may cause dam-
Raise the seatback until it locks into place. whether or not an air bag is mounted
age to the inside of the lock and
at their seating position, to minimize
After returning the seat, move the seat- prevent the seatback from being
the risk of severe injury or death in
back back and forth to check if it is locked securely.
the event of a crash.
securely latched.

2-26

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

WARNING
Do not modify, remove, disassemble
seat belts. Doing so may prevent
them from functioning properly and
cause the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
Above the pelvis Across the pelvis

65D606 65D201

WARNING WARNING
• Never allow persons to ride in the (Continued)
cargo area of a vehicle. In the event • Seat belts should never be worn
of an accident, there is a much with the straps twisted and should
greater risk of injury for persons be adjusted as tightly as is com-
who are not riding in a seat with fortable to provide the protection
their seat belt securely fastened. for which they have been designed.
• Seat belts should always be A slack belt will provide less pro-
adjusted as follows: tection than a snug belt.
– the lap portion of the belt should • Check that each seat belt buckle is
be worn low across the pelvis, inserted into the proper buckle
not across the waist. catch. It is possible to cross the
– the shoulder straps should be buckles in the rear seat.
worn on the outside shoulder (Continued)
only, and never under the arm.
– the shoulder straps should be
away from your face and neck,
but not falling off your shoulder.
(Continued)

2-27

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

WARNING WARNING
(Continued) (Continued)
• Never use the same seat belt for • For child, if the seat belt irritates
more than one occupant and never the neck or face, use a child
as low as possible attach a seat belt over an infant or restraint system appropriately for
across the hips child being held on an occupant’s the child. The seat belts of your
lap. Such seat belt use could cause vehicle are principally designed for
serious injury in the event of an persons of adult size.
accident. • Avoid contamination of seat belt
• Periodically inspect seat belt webbing by polishes, oils, chemi-
assemblies for excessive wear and cals, and particularly battery acid.
damage. Seat belts should be Cleaning may safely be carried out
65D199
replaced if webbing becomes using mild soap and water.
frayed, contaminated or damaged • Do not insert any items such as
in any way. It is essential to replace coins and clips into the seat belt
WARNING the entire seat belt assembly after it buckles, and be careful not to spill
(Continued) has been worn in a severe impact, liquids into these parts. If foreign
• Pregnant women should use seat even if damage to the assembly is materials get into a seat belt
belts, although specific recommen- not obvious. buckle, the seat belt may not work
dations about driving should be • Children aged 12 and under should properly.
made by the woman’s medical advi- ride properly restrained in the rear • All seatbacks should always be in
sor. Remember that the lap portion seat. an upright position when driving,
of the belt should be worn as low • Infants and small children should or seat belt effectiveness may be
as possible across the hips, as never be transported unless they reduced. Seat belts are designed to
shown in the illustration. are properly restrained. Restraint offer maximum protection when
• Do not fasten your seat belt over systems for infants and small chil- seatbacks are in the upright posi-
hard or breakable objects in your dren can be purchased locally and tion.
pockets or on your clothing. If an should be used. Check that the
accident occurs, objects such as system you purchase meets appli-
glasses, pens, etc. under the seat cable safety standards. Read and
belt can cause injury. follow all the directions provided
(Continued) by the manufacturer.
(Continued)

2-28

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Lap-shoulder belt
Emergency locking retractor (ELR) Low on hips
The seat belt has an emergency locking
retractor (ELR), which is designed to lock
the seat belt only during a sudden stop or
impact. It also may lock if you pull the belt
across your body very quickly. If this hap-
pens, let the belt go back to unlock it, and
then pull the belt across your body more
slowly.

Safety reminder
Sit up straight and 60A040 60A036
fully back
To reduce the risk of sliding under the belt To fasten the seat belt, sit up straight and
during a crash, position the lap portion of far back into the seat, pull the latch plate
the belt across your lap as low on your hips attached to the seat belt across your body
Low on hips as possible and adjust it to a snug fit by and press it straight into the buckle until
pulling the shoulder portion of the belt you hear a click.
upward through the latch plate. The length
of the diagonal shoulder strap adjusts itself
to allow freedom of movement.

60A038

2-29

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Seat belt reminder

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE
(1)

80J2008 60A039

NOTE: To unfasten the seat belt, push the red

The word “CENTER” is marked on the “PRESS” button on the buckle and retract 57RK026
buckle for the rear center belt. The buckles the belt slowly while holding the belt or/and (1) Driver’s seat belt reminder light / front
are designed so a latch plate cannot be the latch plate. passenger’s seat belt reminder light
inserted into the wrong buckle.
When the driver and/or front passenger
do(does) not fasten their seat belts, the
seat belt reminder lights will come on or
blink and a buzzer will sound to remind the
driver and/or passenger to fasten their seat
belts. For more details, refer to the expla-
nation below.

2-30

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Step 1). When the vehicle’s speed is more

WARNING than 15 km/h, the reminder will start from Shoulder anchor height adjuster
Step 2).
It is absolutely essential that the The reminder will be automatically can-
driver and passengers fasten their EXAMPLE
celed when the driver’s seat belt is buckled
seat belts at all times. Persons who or the ignition switch is turned off, or the
are not fastening seat belts have a engine switch is pressed to change the
much greater risk of injury if an acci- ignition mode to LOCK (OFF).
dent occurs. Make a regular habit of
buckling your seat belt before putting Front passenger’s seat belt reminder
the key in the ignition or pressing the The front passenger’s seat belt reminder
engine switch. will activate only when there is a passen-
ger sitting in the front seat. In some situa-
Driver’s seat belt reminder tions, however, such as when you place
If the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled heavy objects in the front seat, the seat
when the ignition switch is turned to “ON” belt reminder can be activated as if a pas-
position or the engine switch is pressed to senger was present. The front passenger’s 64J198
change the ignition mode to ON, the seat belt reminder works in the same man-
reminder works as follows: Adjust the shoulder anchor height so that
ner as the driver’s seat belt reminder. the shoulder belt rides on the center of the
1) The driver’s seat belt reminder light will
come on. The front passenger’s seat outboard shoulder. To move upward, slide
belt reminder light will also come on if a the anchor up. To move downward, slide
front passenger does not fasten his/her the anchor down while pulling the lock
seat belt. knob out. After adjustment, check that the
2) After the vehicle’s speed has reached anchor is securely locked.
about 15 km/h, the driver’s seat belt
reminder light will blink and a buzzer WARNING
will sound for about 95 seconds. Check that the shoulder belt is posi-
3) The reminder light will remain on until tioned on the center of the outside
the driver’s seat belt is buckled. shoulder. The belt should be away
If the driver has buckled his or her seat belt from your face and neck, but not fall-
and later unbuckles the seat belt, the ing off your shoulder. Misadjustment
reminder system will be activated from of the belt could reduce the effective-
Step 1) or 2) according to the vehicle’s ness of the seat belt in a crash.
speed. When the vehicle’s speed is less
than 15 km/h, the reminder will start from

2-31

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Seat belt hanger Seat belt inspection WARNING

Inspect all seat belt assemblies after
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE any crash. Any seat belt assembly
which was in use during a crash
(other than a very minor one) should
be replaced, even if damage to the
assembly is not obvious. Any seat
belt assembly which was not in use
during a crash should be replaced if
it does not function properly, it is
damaged in any way or the seat belt
pretensioners were activated (that is,
if the front air bags were activated).

52RM20150 65D209S

Periodically check if the seat belts work

NOTICE properly and are not damaged. Check the
webbing, buckles, latch plates, retractors,
When you move a seatback, make anchorages and guide loops. Replace any
sure the belt webbing is hooked in seat belts which do not work properly or
the seat belt hangers so the seat are damaged.
belts are not caught by the seatback,
seat hinge, or seat latch. This helps
prevent damage to the belt system.

2-32

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Child restraint that the restraint system you select meets

Child restraint systems applicable safety standards.
EXAMPLE
All child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats either by seat
belts (lap belts or the lap portion of lap-
shoulder belts) or by special rigid lower
anchor bars built into the seat. Whenever
possible, SUZUKI recommends that child
restraint systems be installed on the rear
seat. According to accident statistics, chil-
dren are safer when properly restrained in
rear seating positions than in front seating
positions.

80JC016
If you must use a front-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s seat,
60G332S Booster seat adjust the passenger’s seat as far back as
The following types of child restraint sys- EXAMPLE possible.
tem are available generally.
NOTE:
Infant restraint - rear seat only Observe any statutory regulation about
child restraints.
EXAMPLE

80JC008

SUZUKI highly recommends that you use

a child restraint system to restrain infants
and small children. Many different types of
80JC007 child restraint systems are available; check

2-33

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

WARNING
Children could be endangered in a
crash if their child restraint systems
are not properly secured in the vehi-
cle. When installing a child restraint
system, follow the instructions
below. Secure the child in the
restraint system according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.

58MS030 65D608

WARNING
Do not install a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s
seat. If the passenger’s front air bag
inflates, a child in a rear-facing child
restraint could be killed or severely
injured. The back of a rear-facing
child restraint would be too close to
the inflating air bag.

WARNING
If you install a child restraint system 65D609
in the rear seat, slide the front seat
far enough forward so that the child’s
feet do not touch the front seatback.
This will help avoid injury to the child
in the event of an accident.

2-34

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

ELR type belt Install your child restraint system accord-

Installation with lap-shoulder seat ing to the instructions provided by the child
belts EXAMPLE restraint system manufacturer.
Check that the seat belt is securely
CAUTION latched.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Move the child restraint system in all direc-
rear head restraint, adjust the height tions to check that it is securely installed.
of the rear head restraint or remove it When you put your child in the child
for fitting the child restraint, as nec- restraint system, appropriately slide the
essary. However, if a booster cushion front seat forward not to touch a part of
not equipped with the seatback is fit- your child’s body.
ted, the rear seat head restraint
should not be removed. If the rear
head restraint is removed for fitting
80JC021
the child restraint, you need to install
it again after removing the child Whenever possible, SUZUKI recom-
restraint. mends that child restraint systems be
If the child restraint is fitted improp- installed on the rear seat. According to
erly, a child sitting in it could be accident statistics, children are safer when
injured in a crash. properly restrained in rear seating posi-
tions than in front seating positions.
NOTE: • If you must install the child restraint sys-
Stow the removed head restraint in the lug- tem on the front passenger’s seat, follow
gage compartment so it will not cause instructions below.
inconvenience to the occupants. – Slide the seat to the most rear position
by the seat position adjustment lever.
– Adjust the seatback at the 5th step
inclined position (counted from most
upright position) with the seatback
angle adjustment lever.
– If your vehicle is equipped with the
seat height adjustment lever, raise the
seat to the uppermost position by the
seat height adjustment lever.

2-35

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Install the ISOFIX type child restraint sys- Here is a general instruction:
Installation with ISOFIX type tem according to the instructions provided
anchorages by the child restraint system manufacturer. CAUTION
After installation, try moving the child
restraint system in all directions especially If your vehicle is equipped with the
forward to check that connecting bars are rear head restraint, adjust the height
securely latched to the anchorages. of the rear head restraint or remove it
for fitting the child restraint, as nec-
essary. However, if a booster cushion
EXAMPLE not equipped with the seatback is fit-
ted, the rear seat head restraint
should not be removed. If the rear
head restraint is removed for fitting
the child restraint, you need to install
it again after removing the child
restraint.
EXAMPLE If the child restraint is fitted improp-
erly, a child sitting in it could be
52RM20270
injured in a crash.
Your vehicle is equipped with the lower
anchorages in the rear seat outboard seat- NOTE:
ing positions for securing a ISOFIX type of 84MM00252 Stow the removed head restraint in the lug-
child restraints with the connecting bars. gage compartment so it will not cause
The lower anchorages are located where Your vehicle is equipped with the top tether inconvenience to the occupants.
the rear of the seat cushion meets the bot- anchorages. Use the top tether strap of the
tom of the seatback. child restraint according to the instructions
provided by the child restraint system man-
WARNING ufacturer.
Install the ISOFIX type of child
restraint(s) in the only outboard seat-
ing positions, not in the central posi-
tion for the rear seat.

2-36

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE EXAMPLE

78F114 68LM268 54G184

1) Place the child restraint in the rear seat, 2) Use your hands to carefully align the 3) Push the child restraint toward the anchor-
inserting the connecting bars to the connecting bar tips with the anchor- ages so that the connecting bar tips are
anchorages between the seat cushion ages. Take care not to pinch your fin- partially hooked to the anchorages. Use
and the seatback. gers. your hands to confirm the position.

2-37

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Installation of child restraint with

EXAMPLE top tether EXAMPLE
Front

CAUTION
If your vehicle is equipped with the
rear head restraint, adjust the height
of the rear head restraint or remove it
for fitting the child restraint, as nec-
essary. However, if a booster cushion
not equipped with the seatback is fit-
ted, the rear seat head restraint
should not be removed. If the rear
54G185 head restraint is removed for fitting 52RM20180
the child restraint, you need to install
4) Grasp the front of the child restraint and it again after removing the child Some child restraint systems require the
push the child restraint forcefully to restraint. use of a top tether strap. Top tether anchor-
latch the connecting bars. Check that If the child restraint is fitted improp- age brackets are provided in your vehicle at
they are securely latched by trying to erly, a child sitting in it could be the locations shown in the illustrations.
move the child restraint system in all injured in a crash. The number of the top tether anchorage
directions, especially forward. brackets provided in your vehicle depends
5) Attach the top tether strap referring to on the vehicle specification. Install the child
“Installation of child restraint with top NOTE: restraint system as follows:
tether” section. Stow the removed head restraint in the lug-
When you put your child in the child gage compartment so it will not cause
restraint system, appropriately slide the inconvenience to the occupants.
front seat forward not to touch a part of
your child’s body.

NOTICE
When installing a child restraint sys-
tem to the rear seat, adjust the front
seat position so that the front seat
does not interfere with the child
restraint system.

2-38

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

1) Remove the luggage compartment cover

(if equipped). EXAMPLE Seat belt pretensioner system
2) Secure the child restraint on the rear
seat using the procedure described EXAMPLE
above for securing a restraint system and/or
that does not require a top tether strap.
3) Hook the top tether strap to the top
tether anchorage bracket and tighten
the top tether strap according to the
instructions provided by the child
restraint system manufacturer. Attach
the top tether strap to the correspond-
ing top tether anchorage bracket
located directly behind the child
Label
restraint. Do not attach the top tether
strap to the luggage restraint loops (if
equipped). 63J269

WARNING WARNING
Do not attach the child restraint top 52RS20431 This section describes your SUZUKI
tether strap to the luggage restraint vehicle’s seat belt pretensioner sys-
loops (if equipped). Incorrectly 4) When routing the top tether strap, pass
the top tether strap as shown in the tem. Read and follow all these
attached top tether strap will reduce instructions carefully to minimize
the intended effectiveness of the illustration. (Refer to “Head restraints”
section for details on how to adjust the your risk of severe injury or death.
child restraint system.
height of head restraint or remove it.)
5) Check that cargo does not interfere
with routing of the top tether strap.

NOTICE
When installing a child restraint sys-
tem to the rear seat, adjust the front
seat position so that the front seat
does not interfere with the child
restraint system.

2-39

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

To determine if your vehicle is equipped These conditions are not harmful and do system may not work properly. Have both
with a seat belt pretensioner system at the not indicate a fire in the vehicle. systems inspected by an authorized
front seating positions, check the label on SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible.
The driver and all passengers must be
the seat belt at the bottom part. If the let-
properly restrained by fastening seat belts Service on or around the pretensioner sys-
ters “p” and/or “PRE” appear as illustrated,
at all times, whether or not a pretensioner tem components or wiring must be per-
your vehicle is equipped with the seat belt
is equipped at their seating position, to formed only by an authorized SUZUKI
pretensioner system. You can use the pre-
minimize the risk of severe injury or death dealer who is specially trained. Improper
tensioner seat belts in the same manner as
in the event of a crash. service could result in unintended activa-
ordinary seat belts.
tion of pretensioners or could render the
Read this section and “Supplemental Sit fully back in the seat; sit up straight; do pretensioner inoperative. Either of these
restraint system (air bags)” section to learn not lean forward or sideways. Adjust the two conditions may result in personal
more about the pretensioner system. belt so the lap portion of the belt is worn injury.
low across the pelvis, not across the waist.
The seat belt pretensioner system works
Please refer to “Seat adjustment” section To prevent damage or unintended activa-
with the supplemental restraint system (air
and the instructions and precautions about tion of the pretensioners, check that the
bags). The crash sensors and the elec-
the seat belts in this “Seat belts and child lead-acid battery is disconnected and the
tronic controller of the air bag system also
restraint systems” section for details on ignition switch has been in “LOCK” position
control the seat belt pretensioners. The
proper seat and seat belt adjustments. or the ignition mode has been LOCK
pretensioners are triggered only when
(OFF) for at least 90 seconds before per-
there is a frontal or side crash severe Please note that the pretensioners along forming any electrical service work on your
enough to trigger the air bags and the seat with the air bags will activate in severe SUZUKI vehicle.
belts are fastened. For precautions and frontal or side crashes. They are not
general information including servicing the designed to activate in rear impacts, roll- Do not touch pretensioner system compo-
pretensioner system, refer to “Supplemen- overs, or minor frontal side crashes. The nents or wiring. The wires are wrapped
tal restraint system (air bags)” section in pretensioners can be activated only once. with yellow tape or yellow tubing, and the
addition to this “Seat belt pretensioner sys- If the pretensioners are activated (that is, if couplers are yellow. When scrapping your
tem” section, and follow all those precau- the air bags are activated), have the pre- SUZUKI vehicle, ask an authorized
tions. tensioner system serviced by an autho- SUZUKI dealer, body repair shop, or scrap
rized SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible. yard for assistance.
The pretensioner is located in each front
seat belt retractor. The pretensioner tight- If AIR BAG light on the instrument cluster
ens the seat belt so the belt fits the occu- does not blink or come on briefly when the
pant’s body more snugly in the event of a ignition switch is turned to “ON” position or
frontal or side crash. The retractors will the engine switch is pressed to change the
remain locked after the pretensioners are ignition mode to ON, stays on for more
activated. Upon activation, some noise will than 10 seconds, or comes on while driv-
occur and some smoke may be released. ing, the pretensioner system or the air bag

2-40

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Supplemental restraint EXAMPLE

4 2
system (air bags) 4
1
3
WARNING
8 7
This section describes the protection
provided by your SUZUKI vehicle’s 5
supplemental restraint system (air
bags). Read and follow all instruc-
tions carefully to minimize your risk 8
of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.

Your vehicle is equipped with a supple-

mental restraint system consisting of the
following components in addition to a lap-
shoulder belt at each seating position.

(1) Driver’s front air bag module 6

(2) Front passenger’s front air bag mod- 8
ule
(3) Side air bag module (if equipped) 5
(4) Side curtain air bag module 3
(if equipped)
(5) Front seat belt pretensioners 8
(6) Air bag controller
(7) Forward crash sensor
(8) Side crash sensor (if equipped) 57RK121

2-41

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Air bag symbol meaning

WARNING Front air bags
EXAMPLE
An air bag supplements or adds to
the crash protection offered by seat EXAMPLE
belts. The driver and all passengers
must be properly restrained by fas-
tening seat belts at all times, whether
or not an air bag is mounted at their
seating position, to minimize the risk
of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.

AIR BAG light

84MS0T209 63J113
You may find this label on the sun visor. Front air bags are designed to inflate in
severe frontal crashes when the ignition
WARNING switch is in “ON” position or the ignition
63J030
NEVER use a rearward facing child mode is ON.
If AIR BAG light on the instrument cluster restraint on a seat protected by an
does not blink or come on when the igni- ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH NOTE:
tion switch is first turned to “ON” position, or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD In a frontal angle crash, the side air bags (if
or the ignition mode is first changed to ON, can occur. equipped) and side curtain air bags (if
or AIR BAG light stays on, or comes on equipped) may inflate.
while driving, the air bag system (or the
seat belt pretensioner system) may not Front air bags are not designed to inflate in
work properly. Have the air bag system rear impacts, side impacts, rollovers or
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer minor frontal crashes, since they would
as soon as possible. offer no protection in those types of acci-
dents. Since an air bag deploys only one
time during an accident, seat belts are
needed to restrain occupants from further
movements during the accident.

2-42

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Therefore, an air bag is not a substitute for Front passenger’s front air bag
seat belts. To maximize your protection,
always fasten your seat belts. Be aware EXAMPLE
that no system can prevent all possible
injuries that may occur in an accident.

Driver’s front air bag

EXAMPLE

58MS030
52R30360

The driver’s front air bag is located behind

the center pad of the steering wheel and WARNING
the front passenger’s front air bag is Do not install a rear-facing child
located behind the passenger’s side of the restraint in the front passenger’s
dashboard. seat. If the passenger’s front air bag
52R30350
The words “SRS AIRBAG” are molded into inflates, a child in a rear-facing child
the air bag covers to identify the location of restraint could be killed or severely
the air bags. injured. The back of a rear-facing
child restraint would be too close to
the inflating air bag.

Refer to “Seat belts and child restraint sys-

tems” section for details on securing your
child.

2-43

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Conditions of front air bags deployment Conditions of front air bags may inflate
(inflation) Receiving a strong impact to the lower
body of your vehicle, the front air bags may
inflate.

80J101

• Landing hard or falling

80J097

• Frontal crash with a fixed wall that does

80J099
not move or deform at more than about
25 km/h (15 mph) • Hitting a curb or medial strip

(1)

(1)

80J098E 80J100E

• Strong impact equivalent to frontal crash • Falling into a deep hole or ditch
such as above at left and right angles of
about 30 degrees (1) or less from the
front of your vehicle

2-44

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Front air bags may not inflate

The front air bags may not inflate when a
strong impact has not occurred since the
crash object was easy to be deformed or (1)
moved, or the crashed portion of your vehi-
cle was easy to be deformed.
Also, front air bags may not inflate in many
cases when the crash angle is greater than
about 30 degrees at left and right angles
from the front of your vehicle.

80J103 80J105E

• Crash that the front of your vehicle goes • Crash with a fixed wall or guardrail at left
under the bed of a truck etc. and right angles of greater than about 30
degrees (1) from the front of your vehicle

80J102

• Frontal crash to a stopped vehicle at less

than about 50 km/h (30 mph)

80J104
80J106
• Crash with a utility pole or stumpage
• Frontal crash with a fixed wall that does
not move or deform at less than about
25 km/h (15 mph)

2-45

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Front air bags do not inflate

Front air bags do not inflate in rear Side air bags and side curtain air
impacts, side impacts or rollovers, etc. bags (if equipped)
However, these might inflate in a strong
impact. EXAMPLE

80J110

• Vehicle rollover

80J120

• Impact from the rear 57RK027

Side air bags and side curtain air bags are

designed to inflate in severe side impact
crashes when the ignition switch is in “ON”
position or the ignition mode is ON.
Side air bags and side curtain air bags are
not designed to inflate in frontal or rear
crashes, rollovers or minor side crashes,
since they would offer no protection in
those types of accidents. Only the side air
bag and side curtain air bag on the side of
the vehicle that is struck will inflate. How-
80J119 ever, in a frontal angle crash, the side air
bags and side curtain air bags may inflate.
• Impact from the side Since an air bag deploys only one time
during an accident, seat belts are needed
to restrain occupants from further move-
ments during the accident.

2-46

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Therefore, an air bag is not a substitute for Side curtain air bags (if equipped) Conditions of side air bags and side
seat belts. To maximize your protection, curtain air bags deployment (inflation)
always fasten your seat belts. Be aware EXAMPLE
that no system can prevent all possible
injuries that may occur in an accident.

Side air bags (if equipped)

EXAMPLE

80J119

57RK029 • Impacts from the side at about a right

Side curtain air bags are located in the roof angle by a general passenger car to your
lining. The words “SRS AIRBAG” are vehicle at more than about 30 km/h (19
molded into the pillar to identify the loca- mph) or in a greater impact
tion of the side curtain air bags.
Side air bags and side curtain air bags
57RK028 may inflate in a strong impact
Side air bags are located in the part of the Side air bags and side curtain air bags
front seatbacks closest to the doors. The may inflate even in a frontal crash, if there
“SRS AIRBAG” labels are attached to the is a strong impact to the lateral direction.
seatbacks to identify the location of the
side air bags.

80J102

• Frontal crash

2-47

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Side air bags and side curtain air bags

may not inflate

52RM20730 80J101

• Hitting a curb or bump • Landing hard or falling

80J121

80J100E 80J122

• Falling into a deep hole or ditch • Impact from the side to the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment

2-48

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Side air bags and side curtain air bags

do not inflate

80J123 80J125

• Impact from the side at an oblique angle • Impact from the side by a motorcycle or
80J120
bicycle
• Impact from the rear

80J124
80J126
• Impact from the side by a high hood
80J110
vehicle • Crash with a utility pole or stumpage
• Vehicle rollover

2-49

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

A seat belt helps keep you in the proper

How the system works position for maximum protection when an
In a frontal crash, the crash sensors will air bag inflates. Adjust your seat as far
detect rapid deceleration, and if the con- back as possible while still maintaining
troller judges that the deceleration rep- control of the vehicle. Sit fully back in your
resents a severe frontal crash, the seat; sit up straight; do not lean over the
controller will trigger the inflators. If your steering wheel or dashboard. Front occu-
vehicle is equipped with side air bags and pants should not lean on or sleep against
side curtain air bags, crash sensors will the door. Refer to “Seat adjustment” sec-
detect a side crash, and if the controller tion and “Seat belts and child restraint sys-
judges that the side crash is severe tems” section in this section for details on
enough, it will trigger the side air bag and proper seat and seat belt adjustments.
side curtain air bag inflators. The inflators
inflate the appropriate air bags with nitro-
gen or argon gas. The inflated air bags 65D610
provide a cushion for your head (front air
bags and side curtain air bags only) and
upper body. The air bag inflates and
deflates so quickly that you may not even
realize that it has activated. The air bag will
neither hinder your view nor make it harder
to exit the vehicle.
Air bags must inflate quickly and forcefully
in order to reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries. However, an unavoidable
consequence of the quick inflation is that
the air bag may irritate bare skin, such as
the facial area against a front air bag. Also,
upon inflation, a loud noise will occur and
54G582
some powder and smoke will be released.
These conditions are not harmful and do
not indicate a fire in the vehicle. Be aware,
however, that some air bag components
may be hot for a while after inflation.

2-50

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Even though your vehicle is moderately Special procedures are required for servic-
WARNING damaged by a crash, it may not be severe ing or replacing an air bag. For that rea-
enough to trigger front, side or side curtain son, only an authorized SUZUKI dealer
• The driver should not lean over the air bags to inflate. If your vehicle sustains should be allowed to service or replace
steering wheel. The front passen- any front-end or side damage, have the air your air bags. Remind anyone who ser-
ger should not rest his or her body bag system inspected by an authorized vices your SUZUKI vehicle that it has air
against the dashboard, or other- SUZUKI dealer to ensure that it works bags.
wise get too close to the dash- properly.
board. For vehicles with side air Service on or around air bag components
bags and side curtain air bag, Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic or wiring must be performed only by an
occupants should not lean on or module which records information about authorized SUZUKI dealer. Improper ser-
sleep against the door. In these sit- the air bag system if the air bags deploy in vice could result in unintended air bag
uations, the out-of-position occu- a crash. The module records information deployment or could render the air bag
pant would be too close to an about overall system status, and which inoperative. Either of these two conditions
inflating air bag, and may suffer sensors activated the deployment, and for may result in severe injury.
severe injury. a certain vehicle only, whether the driver’s
To prevent damage or unintended inflation
• Do not attach any objects to, or seat belt was in use.
of the air bag system, check that the lead-
place any objects over, the steering acid battery is disconnected and the igni-
wheel or dashboard. Do not place Servicing the air bag system
tion switch has been in “LOCK” position or
any objects between the air bag If the air bags inflate, have the air bags
the ignition mode has been LOCK (OFF)
and the driver or front passenger. and related components replaced by an
for at least 90 seconds before performing
These objects may interfere with air authorized SUZUKI dealer as soon as pos-
any electrical service work on your
bag operation or may be propelled sible.
SUZUKI vehicle. Do not touch air bag sys-
by the air bag in the event of a If your vehicle ever gets in deep water and tem components or wires. The wires are
crash. Either of these conditions the driver’s floor is submerged, the air bag wrapped with yellow tape or yellow tubing,
may cause severe injury. controller could be damaged. If this hap- and the couplers are yellow for easy identi-
• For vehicles with side air bags, do pens, ask an authorized SUZUKI dealer to fication.
not place seat covers on the front check the air bag system as soon as possi-
seats, because seat covers could ble.
Scrapping a vehicle that has an uninflated
restrict the air bag’s inflation. Also, air bag can be hazardous. Ask an autho-
do not place any cup holders on the rized SUZUKI dealer, body repair shop or
door, as the cup holder could be scrap yard for help with disposal.
propelled by the air bag in the event
of a crash. Either of these condi-
tions may cause severe injury.

2-51

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Instrument cluster (Type A) (if equipped)

1. Speedometer
2. Tachometer
3. Information display
4. Trip meter selector knob
5. Indicator selector knob
6. Warning and indicator lights

EXAMPLE
2 6 1

4 6 3 5

57RK112

2-52

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

NOTE:
Speedometer Fuel gauge The activation point of the low fuel warning
light (1) varies depending on road condi-
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed. tions (for example, slope or curve) and
driving conditions because of fuel move-
ment in the tank.
Tachometer
Refer to “Low fuel warning light” in “Warn-
The tachometer indicates engine speed in ing and indicator lights” in this section for
revolutions per minute. (2) details.
The mark (2) indicates that the fuel filler
NOTICE door is located on the left side of the vehi-
Never drive the vehicle with the (1) cle.
engine revving in the red zone or
severe engine damage can result.
Keep the engine speed below the red EXAMPLE
zone even when downshifting to a 52RM20470
lower gear position.
Refer to “Downshifting maximum When the ignition switch is in “ON” posi-
allowable speeds” in “OPERATING tion, this gauge gives a rough indication of
YOUR VEHICLE” section. the amount of fuel in the fuel tank. “F”
stands for full and “E” stands for empty.
If the fuel meter indicator shows only one
segment to “E”, refill the tank as soon as
possible.

NOTE:
If the last segment blinks, it means that the
fuel is almost empty.

If the low fuel warning light (1) comes on,

refill the fuel tank immediately.

2-53

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

When the ignition switch is turned to “ON” NOTE:

Brightness control position, the instrument panel lights come • If you do not turn the knob within several
on. seconds of activating, the brightness
control display will be canceled automat-
Your vehicle has a system to automatically
EXAMPLE ically.
dim the brightness of the instrument panel • When you reconnect the lead-acid bat-
lights when the position lights or headlights tery, the brightness of the instrument
are on. panel lights will be reinitialized. Readjust
When the position lights and/or headlights the brightness according to your prefer-
are on, you can adjust the meter illumina- ence.
tion brightness.
NOTE:
To increase the brightness of the instru- If you adjust to the maximum brightness
ment panel lights, turn the indicator selec- level when the position lights or headlights
tor knob (1) clockwise. are on, the following functions will be can-
To reduce the brightness of the instrument celled.
panel lights, turn the indicator selector • The function which automatically dims
52RS20090 knob (1) counterclockwise. the brightness of instrument panel lights
• The function which operates with the
WARNING brightness control, except maximum
brightness level
Do not adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel lights while driving.
Otherwise, you could lose control of
the vehicle.

(1)
EXAMPLE
52RM20480

2-54

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Information display Clock

EXAMPLE
The display (A) shows the time.
Information display is shown when the igni-
tion switch is turned to “ON” position. To change the time indication:
(A) 1) Push the trip meter selector knob (1)
and the indicator selector knob (2)
EXAMPLE together.
(B) 2) To change the hour indication, turn the
indicator selector knob (2) left or right
(C) repeatedly when the hour indication
(D) blinks. To change the hour indication
quickly, turn and hold the indicator
(3) selector knob (2). To set the hour indi-
57RK110 cation, push the indicator selector knob
(2) and the minute indication will blink.
(3) Information display 3) To change the minute indication, turn
the indicator selector knob (2) left or
(1) (2) The information display shows the follow- right repeatedly when the minute indi-
ing information. cation blinks. To change the minute
52RM20490
Display (A) indication quickly, turn and hold the
(1) Trip meter selector knob indicator selector knob (2). To set the
(2) Indicator selector knob Clock
minute indication, push the indicator
Display (B) selector knob (2).
Selector position (for CVT vehicles)
Display (C) To select 12/24H format, refer to “Setting
Trip meter / Odometer / Fuel consumption / mode” in this section.
Driving range
WARNING
Display (D)
Fuel gauge If you attempt to adjust the display
while driving, you could lose control
of the vehicle.
Do not attempt to adjust the display
while driving.

2-55

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Selector position (for CVT vehicles) Push the trip meter selector
EXAMPLE
knob (1).
EXAMPLE (a) Push the indicator selector
knob (2).

(a) Trip meter A

(b) (b) Trip meter B
52RM21360 (c) Odometer
(d) Instantaneous fuel consumption
Selector position (for CVT vehicles) (e) Average fuel consumption
When the ignition switch is turned to “ON” (f) Driving range
position, the display (B) indicates the gear (c)
position. WARNING
For details on how to use the transaxle,
refer to “Using transaxle” in “OPERATING If you attempt to adjust the display
YOUR VEHICLE” section. while driving, you could lose control
(d) of the vehicle.
Do not attempt to adjust the display
Trip meter / Odometer / while driving.
Fuel consumption / Driving range
(e) NOTE:
The display (C) shows one of the following
indications; trip meter A, trip meter B, • Indications will change when you push
and release a knob.
odometer, instantaneous fuel consump-
• The display shows estimated values.
tion, average fuel consumption or driving
range. (f) Indications may not be the same as
actual values.
To switch the display indication (C), push
the trip meter selector knob (1) or the indi- 57RK123
cator selector knob (2) quickly.

2-56

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Trip meter Instantaneous fuel consumption Average fuel consumption

The trip meter can be used to measure the The display shows the value of instanta- If you selected average fuel consumption
distance traveled on short trips or between neous fuel consumption only when the the last time you drove the vehicle, the dis-
fuel stops. vehicle is moving. play shows the last value of average fuel
You can use the trip meter A or trip meter B consumption from previous driving when
independently. NOTE: the ignition switch is turned to “ON” posi-
• The display does not show the value tion. Unless you reset the value of average
To reset the trip meter, push and hold the unless the vehicle is moving. fuel consumption, the display indicates the
trip meter selector knob (1) until the display • Depending on the vehicle’s specification, value of average fuel consumption which
shows 0.0. the fuel consumption units of initial set- includes average fuel consumption during
ting are indicated as L/100km or km/L. previous driving.
NOTE: • For “L/100km” setting, the indicated
The indicated maximum value of the trip maximum value of instantaneous fuel
To reset the average fuel consumption,
meter is 9999.9. When you run past the consumption is 30. No more than 30 will
push and hold the indicator selector knob
maximum value, the indicated value will be indicated on the display even if the
(2) for a while when the display shows the
return to 0.0. actual instantaneous fuel consumption is
average fuel consumption.
higher.
Odometer • For “km/L” setting, the indicated maxi-
NOTE:
The odometer records the total distance mum value of instantaneous fuel con-
When you reset the indication or reconnect
the vehicle has been driven. sumption is 50. No more than 50 will be
the negative (–) terminal to the lead-acid
battery, the value of average fuel con-
indicated on the display even if the
NOTICE actual instantaneous fuel consumption is
sumption will be shown after driving for a
while.
Keep track of your odometer reading higher.
and check the maintenance sched- • The indication on the display may be
ule regularly for required services. delayed if fuel consumption is greatly
Increased wear or damage to certain affected by driving conditions.
parts can result from failure to per- • The display shows estimated values.
form required services at the proper Indications may not be the same as
mileage intervals. actual values.
• For “L/100km” or “km/L” setting, you can
change the units that instantaneous fuel
consumption is displayed in. Refer to
“Average fuel consumption” in this sec-
tion.

2-57

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

(For “L/100km” or “km/L” setting) Driving range

To change the unit of average fuel con- If you selected driving range the last time Fuel gauge
sumption, while pushing and holding the you drove the vehicle, the display indicates The display (D) shows the fuel gauge.
trip meter selector knob (1), turn the indica- “---” for a few seconds and then indicates
tor selector knob (2). the current driving range when the ignition Refer to “Fuel gauge” in this section.
switch is turned to “ON” position.
EXAMPLE The driving range shown in the display is
the approximate distance you can drive
(Initial
setting)
until the fuel gauge indicates “E”, based on
current driving conditions.
When the low fuel warning light comes on,
the display “---” will appear.
If the low fuel warning light comes on, fill
the fuel tank immediately regardless of the
value of driving range shown in the display.
When you refuel, the driving range is
updated. However, if you only add a small
68PH02207 amount of fuel, the correct value will not be
NOTE: displayed.
When you change the units that average
fuel consumption is displayed in, the NOTE:
instantaneous fuel consumption units will • If you refuel when the ignition switch is in
be changed automatically. “ON” position, the driving range may not
indicate the correct value.
• When you reconnect the negative (–)
terminal to the lead-acid battery, the
value of driving range will be shown after
driving for a while.

2-58

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Setting mode
In the setting mode, you can set up and customize the following functions.
Indication Functions

Time indication of clock “ ”

Central door locking system “ ”

Additional flashes of the turn signal “ ”

Security system “ ”

Initialization setting “ ”

Exit the setting mode “ ”

Turn the indicator selector knob (2).

Push the indicator selector knob (2).

NOTE:
Depending on vehicle’s specifications, some items may not be displayed.

2-59

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

How to use the setting mode: Time indication of clock “ ”

1) When the ignition switch is in “ON” • : 12-hour format (default set-
position, and the vehicle is stationary. ting)
2) Push and hold the indicator selector • : 24-hour format
knob (2) until the display shows
“ ”. Central door locking system “ ”
3) Turn and/or push the indicator selector (if equipped)
knob (2) to select a function that you • : Unlock all doors by turning
want to set up according to the chart in the key once
the previous page. • : Unlock all doors by turning
4) Turn and/or push the indicator selector the key twice (default setting)
knob (2) to register settings of the fol-
lowing functions. Additional flashes of the turn signal
“ ”
EXAMPLE • : Turn signal flashes three
times after the turn signal
lever is returned (default set-
ting)
• : Disable the additional flashes
of turn signal
68PM00272
Security system “ ” (if equipped)
NOTE: • : Enable the security system
• As shown in the above illustration, “ ” (default setting)
indicates on the display of currently set- • : Disable the security system
ting item.
• To go back to the higher level display Initialization setting “ ”
during operation, turn the indicator • : Initialize all settings
selector knob (2) to display “ ” or
“ ” and then push the indicator How to exit the setting mode:
selector knob (2). Switch the display to show “ ” and then
push the indicator selector knob (2).

2-60

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Instrument cluster (Type B) (if equipped)

1. Speedometer
2. Tachometer
3. Fuel gauge
4. Temperature gauge
5. Information display
6. Trip meter selector knob
7. Indicator selector knob
8. Warning and indicator lights

EXAMPLE 2 8 1

6 8 4 5 8 3 7
57RK115

2-61

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

If the low fuel warning light (1) comes on,

Speedometer Fuel gauge refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.
Refer to “Low fuel warning light” in “Warn-
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed. ing and indicator lights” in this section for
details.

Tachometer The mark (2) indicates that the fuel filler

door is located on the left side of the vehi-
The tachometer indicates engine speed in cle.
revolutions per minute.
(2)
NOTICE
Never drive the vehicle with the
engine revving in the red zone or
severe engine damage can result.
(1)
Keep the engine speed below the red EXAMPLE
zone even when downshifting to a 52RM20540
lower gear position.
Refer to “Downshifting maximum When the ignition mode is ON, this gauge
allowable speeds” in “OPERATING gives a rough indication of the amount of
YOUR VEHICLE” section. fuel in the fuel tank. “F” stands for full and
“E” stands for empty.
If the indicator approarches a low level
(near “E”) on fuel gauge, refill the tank as
soon as possible.

NOTE:
The indicator moves a little depending on
road conditions (for example, slope or
curve) and driving conditions because of
fuel movement in the tank.

2-62

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

When the ignition mode is ON, the instru-

Temperature gauge Brightness control ment panel lights come on.
Your vehicle has a system to automatically
dim the brightness of the instrument panel
EXAMPLE lights when the position lights or headlights
are on.
When the position lights and/or headlights
are on, you can adjust the meter illumina-
tion brightness.
To increase the brightness of the instru-
ment panel lights, turn the indicator selec-
tor knob (1) clockwise.
To reduce the brightness of the instrument
EXAMPLE panel lights, turn the indicator selector
knob (1) counterclockwise.
52RM20550 52RS20160

When the ignition mode is ON, this gauge WARNING

indicates the engine coolant temperature. EXAMPLE Do not adjust the brightness of the
Under normal driving conditions, the indi- instrument panel lights while driving.
cator should stay within the normal, Otherwise, you could lose control of
acceptable temperature range between the vehicle.
“H” and “C”. If the indicator approaches
“H”, overheating is indicated. Follow the
instructions for engine overheating in
“EMERGENCY SERVICE” section.

NOTICE
Continuing to drive the vehicle when
engine overheating is indicated can (1)
result in severe engine damage. 52RM20560

2-63

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

NOTE: (2) Trip meter selector knob

• If you do not turn the knob within several Information display (3) Indicator selector knob
seconds of activating, the brightness
control display will be canceled automat- The information display is shown when the The information display shows the follow-
ically. ignition mode is ON. ing information.
• When you reconnect the lead-acid bat-
Display (A)
tery, the brightness of the instrument
Clock
panel lights will be reinitialized. Readjust (A) (B)
the brightness according to your prefer- Display (B)
ence. Thermometer

NOTE: (C) Display (C)

If you adjust to the maximum brightness Warning and indicator messages /
level when the position lights or headlights Fuel consumption / Driving range /
are on, the following functions will be can- (E) Average speed / Driving time / Total idling
celled. (D) stop time / Total idling fuel saved
(F)
• The function which automatically dims (1) Display (D)
the brightness of instrument panel lights Selector position
• The function which operates with the EXAMPLE
brightness control, except maximum 52RM20570 Display (E)
brightness level Trip meter
(1) Information display
Display (F)
EXAMPLE Odometer

(2) (3)

52RM20580

2-64

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

NOTE:
Clock • The outside temperature indication is not
When the ignition mode is ON, the display the actual outside temperature when
(A) shows the time. driving at low speed, or when stopped.
• If there is something wrong with the ther-
To set the clock, follow “Setting mode” mometer, or just after the engine switch
instructions in this section. is pressed to change the ignition mode
to ON, the display may not indicate the
WARNING outside temperature.
If you attempt to adjust the display
while driving, you could lose control To change the unit of temperature, refer to
of the vehicle. “Setting mode” in this section.
Do not attempt to adjust the display
while driving. EXAMPLE
52RS20420

When the engine switch is pressed to

change the ignition mode to ON, the mes- Thermometer (Initial
setting)
sage shown in the above illustration will When the ignition mode is ON, the display
appear on the display for several seconds. (B) shows the thermometer.
Some warning and indicator messages The thermometer indicates the outside
may appear on the display when the igni- temperature.
tion mode is ACC or LOCK (OFF).
EXAMPLE
(a)
52RM20880

52RM20870

If the outside temperature nears freezing

condition, the mark (a) will appear on the
display.

2-65

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

To switch the display indication, push the

Fuel consumption / Driving range / Average speed / Driving time / indicator selector knob (3) quickly.
Total idling stop time / Total idling fuel saved
When there are no warning or indicator messages on the display (C), you can select one NOTE:
of the following indications to appear on the display: instantaneous fuel consumption, The value of fuel consumption, driving
average fuel consumption, driving range, average speed, driving time, total idling stop range and average speed shown on the
time, total idling fuel saved or no indication. display are affected by the following condi-
tions;
EXAMPLE • road condition
• surrounding traffic condition
(a) (b) (c) (d) • driving condition
• vehicle condition
• a malfunction which causes the malfunc-
tion indicator light to come on or blink

(h) (g) (f) (e)

57RK033

(a) Instantaneous fuel consumption

(b) Average fuel consumption
(c) Driving range
(d) Average speed
(e) Driving time
(f) Total idling stop time
(g) Total idling fuel saved
(h) No indication

2-66

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Instantaneous fuel consumption Average fuel consumption NOTE:

The display shows instantaneous fuel con- If you selected average fuel consumption If you add only a small amount of fuel
sumption with a bar graph only when the the last time you drove the vehicle, the dis- when you select “Reset after refuel”, the
vehicle is moving. play shows the last value of average fuel average fuel consumption value may not
consumption from previous driving when be reset.
NOTE: the engine switch is pressed to change the
Driving range
• The display does not show the bar graph ignition mode to ON. Unless you reset the
If you selected driving range the last time
unless the vehicle is moving. value of average fuel consumption, the dis-
you drove the vehicle, the display indicates
• Depending on the vehicle’s specification, play indicates the value of average fuel
“---” for a few seconds and then indicates
the fuel consumption units of initial set- consumption based on the average fuel
the current driving range when the engine
ting are indicated as L/100km, km/L or consumption during previous driving.
switch is pressed to change the ignition
MPG (UK).
mode to ON.
• The indicated maximum value of instan- NOTE:
taneous fuel consumption is one of the When you reconnect the negative (–) ter- The driving range shown in the display is
followings. No more than the maximum minal to the lead-acid battery, the value of the approximate distance you can drive
value will be indicated on the display average fuel consumption will be shown until the fuel gauge indicates “E”, based on
even if the actual instantaneous fuel after driving for a period of time. current driving conditions.
consumption is higher.
– For L/100km setting: 30 You can select the timing to reset the value When the low fuel warning light comes on,
– For km/L setting: 50 of average fuel consumption by one of the the display “---” will appear.
– For MPG (UK) setting: 80 following three methods;
• Reset after refuel: the value of average If the low fuel warning light comes on, fill
• The indication on the display may be the fuel tank immediately regardless of the
delayed if fuel consumption is greatly fuel consumption will be reset automati-
cally by refueling. value of driving range shown in the display.
affected by driving conditions.
• The display shows estimated values. • Reset with trip meter A: the value of When you refuel, the driving range is
Indications may not be the same as average fuel consumption will be reset updated. However, if you only add a small
actual values. automatically by resetting trip meter A. amount of fuel, the correct value will not be
• Reset manually: the value of average displayed.
fuel consumption will be reset by push-
ing and holding the indicator selector
knob (3) when the display indicates the
average fuel consumption.
To change the timing to reset the value of
average fuel consumption, refer to “Setting
mode” in this section.

2-67

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

NOTE: Driving time Total idling fuel saved

• If you refuel when the ignition mode is The display shows the total amount of driv- The display shows the total amount (in mil-
ON, the driving range may not indicate ing time since the indication was reset. liliters) of fuel conservation by ENG A-
the correct value. • To reset the driving time, push and hold STOP system since the indication was
• When you reconnect the negative (–) the indicator selector knob (3) for a while reset.
terminal to the lead-acid battery, the when the display shows the driving time. • To reset the total idling fuel saved, push
value of driving range will be shown after and hold the indicator selector knob (3)
driving for a period of time. NOTE: for a while when the display shows the
• When you reset the indication or recon- total idling fuel saved.
Average speed nect the negative (–) terminal to the
If you selected average speed the last time lead-acid battery, the driving time will be NOTE:
you drove the vehicle, the display indicates shown after driving for a while. When you reconnect the negative (–) ter-
the last value of average speed from previ- • The indicated maximum value of driving minal to the lead-acid battery, the value of
ous driving when the engine switch is time is 99:59:59. No more than the maxi- the total idling fuel saved will be reset.
pressed to change the ignition mode to mum value will be indicated on the dis-
ON. Unless you reset the value of average play until you reset the driving time.
speed, the display indicates the value of Selector position
average speed which includes average Total idling stop time
speed during previous driving. The display (D) shows the transaxle selec-
The display shows the total length (in tor position (4).
To reset the value of average speed, push hours, minutes and seconds) of engine
and hold the indicator selector knob (3) for stopping time by ENG A-STOP system EXAMPLE
a while when the display indicates an aver- since the indication was reset. (4)
age speed. The display shows “---” and • To reset the total idling stop time, push
then indicates a new average speed after and hold the indicator selector knob (3)
driving for a short time. for a while when the display shows the
total idling stop time.
NOTE:
57RK034
When you reconnect the negative (–) ter- NOTE:
minal to the lead-acid battery, the value of • The indicated maximum value of the (4) Selector position
average speed will be shown after driving total idling stop time is 99:59:59.
for a period of time. • When you reconnect the negative (–)
terminal to the lead-acid battery, the
value of the total idling stop time will be
reset.

2-68

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

NOTE:
Trip meter Eco-driving display • You can change the setting so that the
The display (E) shows the trip meter. When you press the engine switch to Eco-driving display will not be displayed.
change the ignition mode to LOCK (OFF), For details on the setting mode, refer to
The trip meter can be used to measure the “Setting mode” in this section.
the following information appears for sev-
distance traveled on short trips or between • The total amount of fuel conservation by
eral seconds on the information display.
fuel stops. the ENG A-STOP system and total idling
You can use trip meter A or trip meter B stop time can be displayed in the infor-
independently. EXAMPLE
mation display when the ignition switch
To reset the trip meter, push and hold the is in “ON” position or the ignition mode is
trip meter selector knob (2) for a while. ON.

NOTE: (5)
The indicated maximum value of the trip
meter is 9999.9. When you run past the
maximum value, the indicated value will
return to 0.0. (6)

Odometer
The display (F) shows the odometer. 57RK122

The odometer records the total distance (5) Idling stop time
the vehicle has been driven. The display shows the length (in
hours, minutes and seconds) of
NOTICE engine stopping time by ENG A-
STOP system for one drive.
Keep track of your odometer reading (6) Idling stop fuel saved
and check the maintenance sched- The display shows the amount (in mil-
ule regularly for required services. liliters) of fuel conservation by the
Increased wear or damage to certain ENG A-STOP system for one drive.
parts can result from failure to per-
form required services at the proper
mileage intervals.

2-69

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

NOTE: Temperature
Setting mode • If you push and hold the indicator selec- (Temperature unit setting)
When the ignition mode is ON and the tor knob (3) to enter the setting mode You can change the units that temperature
vehicle is stationary, you can enter the set- when the display (C) shows average fuel is displayed in.
ting mode of the information display by consumption, average speed, driving • To change the temperature unit, select
pushing and holding the indicator selector time, total idling stop time or total idling “Temperature” in “Setting mode”. Then,
knob (3) for more than 3 seconds. fuel saved the value will be reset simul- select “°C” or “°F”.
taneously. If you do not want to reset the
• To select the setting that you want to value, push the indicator selector knob NOTE:
change, turn the indicator selector knob quickly to switch the indication of the dis- When you change the units that tempera-
(3) left or right. play. ture is displayed in, the automatic heating
• To change the setting, push the indicator • If you press the engine switch or start to and air conditioning system (if equipped)
selector knob (3). move the vehicle when the display is in temperature display units will be changed
• To exit the setting mode, select “Back” the setting mode, the setting mode will automatically.
and push the indicator selector knob (3). be canceled automatically.
Clock setting
EXAMPLE Distance unit (Adjusting the clock)
(Odometer / trip meter / driving range / • Adjust the clock by selecting “Clock set-
average speed distance unit setting) ting” in “Setting mode”. Then, select
You can change the units in which odome- “Adjust clock”.
ter / trip meter / driving range / average • To change the hour indication, turn the
speed distance is displayed. indicator selector knob (3) left or right
repeatedly when the hour indication
Fuel economy appears as reversed color. To change
(Fuel consumption unit setting) the hour indication quickly, turn and hold
You can change the units that fuel con- indicator selector knob (3). To set the
sumption is displayed in. hour indication, push the indicator selec-
Language tor knob (3) and the minute indication
You can change the language of the infor- appears as reversed color.
52RM20910 mation display. • To change the minute indication, turn the
NOTE: indicator selector knob (3) left or right
Fuel reset repeatedly when the minute indication
The currently selected setting item is sur- (Average fuel consumption reset setting)
rounded by a frame. appears as reversed color. To change
You can change when the value of aver- the minute indication quickly, turn and
age fuel consumption is reset. hold indicator selector knob (3). To set

2-70

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

the minute indication, push the indicator Antitheft Display item

selector knob (3). (Theft deterrent alarm system setting) (“Idling disp” setting)
You can switch the theft deterrent alarm You can switch whether the information
(Selecting 12H/24H format) system from the enabled state to the dis- display shows the Eco-driving display
• Switch the time indication between 12- abled state, and vice versa. when the engine switch is pressed to
hour and 24-hour format by selecting The state of the theft deterrent alarm sys- change the ignition mode to LOCK (OFF).
“Clock setting” in “Setting mode”. Then, tem is shown on the information display as
select “12H” or “24H”. (“Idling warn” setting)
follows:
You can switch whether the information
Door lock • Mode A: Disabled state
display shows the warning and indicator
(Door unlock setting) (if equipped) • Mode D: Enabled state
messages related on the ENG A-STOP
You can choose either once or twice oper- IS A/C system.
ation(s) to unlock all doors (including the (ENG A-STOP system setting)
tailgate) by turning the key, or operating • When using the automatic heating and Default
the keyless push start system remote con- air conditioning system, you can select (Initialization setting)
troller or request switch. one of the following engine auto stop If you select “YES” and push the indicator
You can also turn off or on the buzzer settings. selector knob (3), all settings will be reini-
sound when the door(s) is (are) locked or – Standard tialized.
unlocked. – Economy
– Comfort
Lights • When “Economy” is selected, engine
(Lane change setting) auto stop condition is eased, compared
The turn signal and its indicator can be set with “Standard”. Engine auto stop condi-
whether they flash three times even if you tion will occur more frequently, the stop
return the turn signal control lever shortly time will be longer, leading to reduction
after operating it. of fuel consumption.
• To change the lane change setting, • When “Comfort” is selected, engine auto
select “Lane change” in “Setting mode”. stop condition becomes severe, com-
Then, select “ON” or “OFF” pared with “Standard”. Engine auto stop
• If you want to change the number of condition will occur less frequently, the
flashing, consult an authorized SUZUKI stop time will be shorter, leading to more
dealer. comfortable cabin condition by air condi-
tioner.

2-71

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

NOTE:
Warning and indicator messages • When the problem that causes a mes-
The display shows warning and indicator sage to appear is corrected, the mes-
messages to let you know about certain sage will disappear.
vehicle problems. • If a message is displayed, and other
In some cases, the external or internal problems requiring a message occur, the
buzzer may also sound at the same time to message for each of the problems will
alert you. be alternately displayed about every 5
seconds.
If warning and indicator messages appear • When you push and hold the indicator
on the display, follow the messages. selector knob (3) for about 2 seconds
while a message is displayed, the mes-
Master warning indicator light sage will disappear temporarily. If the
problem that caused the message is not
corrected, the message will appear
again after 5 seconds.

80P0382

When the display shows warning and indi-

cator messages, the master warning indi-
cator light may also blink.

2-72

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Warning and indicator messages

All models

Warning and indicator Master warning

Sound Cause and remedy
message indicator light
Blinks Beep (one time from interior A door or tailgate is not properly closed. Stop
(only while vehicle buzzer; only while vehicle is the vehicle in a safe place and close the door or
is in motion) in motion) tailgate properly. (#1)

52RM20920

Blinks Continuous beep (from inte- The parking brake is not released. Stop the
rior buzzer) vehicle in a safe place and release the parking
brake.

52RM20930

Blinks Continuous beep (from inte- The headlights and/or the position lights are left
rior buzzer) on. Turn them off.

52RM20940

(#1) This message will disappear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to appear is not corrected.

2-73

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Warning and indicator Master warning

Sound Cause and remedy
message indicator light
Off Beep (one time from interior Fuel level is low. Refill it as soon as possible.
buzzer) (#1)

52RM20950

Off Off The road may be icy. Drive very carefully. (#1)

52RM20960

Off Off This message is displayed when the ACC posi-

tion is selected as the ignition mode. (#1)

52RS20180

Off Off The brake pedal is depressed. Press the

engine switch to start the engine.

52RS20190

(#1) This message will disappear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to appear is not corrected.

2-74

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Warning and indicator Master warning

Sound Cause and remedy
message indicator light
Blinks Beep (one time from interior There is a problem with the steering lock sys-
buzzer) tem.
Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized
SUZUKI dealer.

52RS20200

Blinks Beep (one time from interior There is a problem with the immobilizer/keyless
buzzer) push start system. Also, the vehicle battery
voltage may be decreased.
When the message is displayed even if you
start the engine with normal voltage of the vehi-
cle battery, have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized SUZUKI dealer.
52RS20210

Blinks By certain conditions, some The remote controller may be outside the vehi-
kind of sound you will hear cle or its battery may have become discharged.
from interior and/or exterior Locate the remote controller or touch the
of the vehicle. engine switch with the remote controller.
If the message still appears, replace the remote
controller battery.
52RS20220

52RS20230

2-75

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Warning and indicator Master warning

Sound Cause and remedy
message indicator light
Off Off This message is displayed when the ON posi-
tion is selected as the ignition mode. (#1)

52RS20240

Blinks Beep (one time from interior The steering lock is not disengaged. While
buzzer) lightly turning the steering wheel in both direc-
tions, press the engine switch again.

52RS20250

Off Off The remote controller battery is about to

become flat. Replace the battery. (#1)

52RS20260

Off Off The engine switch is pressed with the gearshift

lever in a position other than “P” or “N” and
depressing the brake pedal. Try again as
instructed by message.

52RS20270

(#1) This message will disappear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to appear is not corrected.

2-76

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Warning and indicator Master warning

Sound Cause and remedy
message indicator light
Off Off The engine switch is pressed with the gearshift
lever in a position other than “P”. Try again as
instructed by the message.

52RS20280

Blinks Beep (one time from interior The CVT fluid temperature becomes too high.
buzzer) Stop the vehicle in a safe place and let the fluid
cool down.

52RS20300

Blinks Beep (one time from interior There may be a problem with ESP® system.
buzzer) Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized
SUZUKI dealer.

52RM20980

Hill hold control system Blinks Beep (one time from interior There may be a problem with hill hold control
buzzer) system.
Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized
SUZUKI dealer.

52RM20990

2-77

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Warning and indicator Master warning

Sound Cause and remedy
message indicator light
Off Off The engine does not stop automatically by the
ENG A-STOP system, because any of the auto
stop conditions is not met.
Refer to “ENG A-STOP system (engine auto
stop start system)” in “OPERATING YOUR
VEHICLE” section for details.
52RM21000

Off Off The engine is restarting automatically because

one of the following automatic engine restart
conditions is met.
• The temperatures at air conditioner outlets
have changed considerably after the auto-
matic engine stop to the point of affecting the
cooling/heating performance.
52RM21020
• The defroster is turned on.
• The lead-acid battery has discharged sub-
stantially.
• Some time has elapsed after the start of the
automatic engine stop.
Refer to “ENG A-STOP system (engine auto
stop start system)” in “OPERATING YOUR
VEHICLE” section for details.
Also, the duration time of the ENG A-STOP
system, depending on using the air conditioning
system can be set. Refer to “Setting mode” in
this section.

2-78

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Warning and indicator Master warning

Sound Cause and remedy
message indicator light
Off Series of beeps under cer- The engine restarts automatically, because the
tain conditions (from interior brake booster vacuum pressure is low, the
buzzer) driver’s door is opened, or the driver’s seat belt
is unfastened. Refer to “ENG A-STOP system
(engine auto stop start system)” in “OPERAT-
ING YOUR VEHICLE” section for details.
52RM21030

Off Off The engine restarts automatically, because the

vehicle is started to move on a slope.
Refer to “ENG A-STOP system (engine auto
stop start system)” in “OPERATING YOUR
VEHICLE” section for details.

52RM21380

2-79

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

To switch to the setting mode

Information switch 1) Push and hold the information switch Warning and indicator lights
(if equipped) (1) when the vehicle is stationary.
2) After the display of setting mode is NOTE:
shown, select the setting item that you If warning and indicator lights blink or
You can use the information switch to
want to change by turning the indicator come on, the corresponding messages
switch the display indication when the igni-
selector knob (2) left or right. Refer to may be shown on the information display.
tion switch is in “ON” position or the igni-
tion mode is ON and the vehicle is “Setting mode” in this section for
stationary. details.
Brake system warning light
NOTE:
EXAMPLE If you switch to the setting mode while
either of the following items is shown on the
information display, the current value will be
reset. If you do not want to reset its value,
push the indicator selector knob (2) quickly
beforehand and switch to the other item.
• Average fuel consumption 82K170
• Average speed (if equipped)
• Driving time (if equipped) Three different types of operations exist
• Total idling stop time and total idling stop depending on the vehicle’s specification.
(1) (2) fuel saved (if equipped) • The light comes on briefly when the igni-
tion switch is turned to “ON” position or
52R31310
To exit the setting mode the engine switch is pressed to change
1) Push the indicator selector knob (2) the ignition mode to ON.
(1) Information switch and select “Back”. • The light comes on when the parking
(2) Indicator selector knob 2) Push the information switch (1) quickly. brake is engaged with the ignition switch
in “ON” position or the ignition mode is
NOTE: ON.
You can exit the setting mode by either of • The light comes on under either or both
the following operations: of above two conditions.
• Turn the ignition switch to “ACC” or
“LOCK” position. The light also comes on when the fluid in
• Press the engine switch to change the the brake fluid reservoir falls below the
ignition mode to ACC or LOCK (OFF). specified level.
• Start driving your vehicle.

2-80

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

The light should go out after starting the

engine and fully releasing the parking WARNING Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warn-
brake, if the fluid level in the brake fluid ing light
reservoir is adequate. If any of the following conditions
occur, you should immediately ask
The light also comes on together with the an authorized SUZUKI dealer to
ABS warning light when the rear brake inspect the brake system.
force control function (proportioning valve • If the brake system warning light
function) of the ABS system fails. does not go out after the engine
If the brake system warning light comes on has been started and the parking
while you are driving the vehicle, it may brake has been fully released.
mean that there is something wrong with • If the brake system warning light 65D529
the vehicle’s brake system. does not come on when the igni- When the ignition switch is turned to “ON”
If this happens: tion switch is turned to “ON” posi- position or the engine switch is pressed to
tion or the engine switch is pressed change the ignition mode to ON, this light
1) Pull off the road and stop carefully.
to change the ignition mode to ON. comes on briefly so you can check that the
• If the brake system warning light light is working.
WARNING comes on at any time during vehi- If the light stays on or comes on when driv-
Remember that stopping distance cle operation. ing, there may be something wrong with
may be longer, you may have to push the ABS.
harder on the pedal, and the pedal NOTE:
may go down farther than normal. Because the brake system is self-adjust- If this happens:
ing, the fluid level will drop as the brake 1) Pull off the road and stop carefully.
pads become worn. Replenishing the 2) Turn the ignition switch to “LOCK” posi-
2) Test the brakes by carefully starting and
brake fluid reservoir is considered normal tion or change the ignition mode to
stopping the vehicle on the shoulder of
periodic maintenance. LOCK (OFF) by pressing the engine
the road.
switch and then start the engine again.
3) If you determine that it is safe, drive the
vehicle cautiously at low speed to the If the warning light comes on briefly and
nearest an authorized SUZUKI dealer then turns off, the system is normal. If the
for repairs or tow the vehicle to the warning light still stays on, something is
nearest an authorized SUZUKI dealer wrong with the system.
for repairs.
If the light and the brake system warning
light stay on or come on simultaneously
when driving, your ABS system is
equipped with the rear brake force control
function (proportioning valve function) and

2-81

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

there may be something wrong with both When the ignition switch is turned to “ON”
the rear brake force control function and position or the engine switch is pressed to ESP® OFF indicator light
the anti-lock function of the ABS system. change the ignition mode to ON, the light
comes on briefly so you can check that the
If one of the above occurs, have the sys- light is working. If the light stays on or
tem inspected by an authorized SUZUKI comes on when driving, there may be
dealer. something wrong with the ESP® systems
If the ABS becomes inoperative, the brake
(other than ABS). You should have the
system will function as an ordinary brake
system inspected by an authorized
system that does not have this ABS sys-
SUZUKI dealer.
tem. 57L30045
For details of the ESP® systems, refer to When the ignition switch is turned to “ON”
For details of ABS system, refer to “Anti-
“Electronic stability program (ESP®)” in position or the engine switch is pressed to
lock brake system (ABS)” in “OPERATING
“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section. change the ignition mode to ON, this light
YOUR VEHICLE” section.
comes on briefly so you can check that the
WARNING light is working.
ESP® warning light ESP®
The systems cannot prevent When the ESP® OFF switch is pushed to
accidents. Always drive carefully. turn off the ESP® systems (other than
ABS), the ESP® OFF indicator light comes
on and stays on.
For details of the ESP® systems, refer to
“Electronic stability program (ESP®)” in
“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.
52KM133

ESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler

AG.
This light blinks 5 times per second when
one of the following systems is activated.
• Stability control system
• Traction control system

If this light blinks, drive carefully.

2-82

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Oil pressure light Charging light Driver’s seat belt reminder light /
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light

50G051 50G052

When the ignition switch is turned to “ON” When the ignition switch is turned to “ON”
position or the engine switch is pressed to position or the engine switch is pressed to 60G049
change the ignition mode to ON, this light change the ignition mode to ON, this light When the driver or front passenger does
comes on. When the engine is started, the comes on. When the engine is started, the not buckle his or her seat belt, this light will
light goes out. The light will come on and light goes out. The light will come on and come on and/or blink.
remain on if there is insufficient oil pres- remain on if there is something wrong with For details of the seat belt reminder, refer
sure. If the light comes on when driving, the battery charging system. If the light to “Seat belts and child restraint systems”
pull off the road as soon as you can and comes on when the engine is running, the in this section.
stop the engine. charging system should be inspected
Check the oil level and add oil if necessary. immediately by an authorized SUZUKI
If there is enough oil, the lubrication sys- dealer.
tem should be inspected by an authorized
SUZUKI dealer before you drive the vehi-
cle again.

NOTICE
• If you operate the engine with this
light on, severe engine damage can
result.
• Do not rely on the oil pressure light
to indicate the need to add oil. Peri-
odically check the engine oil level.

2-83

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

AIR BAG light Malfunction indicator light NOTICE

Continuing to drive the vehicle when
the malfunction indicator light is on
or blinking can cause permanent
damage to the vehicle’s emission
control system, and can affect fuel
economy and driveability.
63J030 65D530

When the ignition switch is turned to “ON” Your vehicle has a computer-controlled Transaxle warning light
position or the engine switch is pressed to emission control system. A malfunction (if equipped)
change the ignition mode to ON, this light indicator light is provided on the instrument
blinks or comes on for several seconds so cluster to indicate when it is necessary to
you can check that the light is working. have the emission control system serviced.
When the ignition switch is turned to “ON”
The light will come on and stay on if there position or the engine switch is pressed to
is a problem in the air bag system or the change the ignition mode to ON, this light
seat belt pretensioner system. comes on. When the engine is started, the
light goes out.
WARNING 80J219
If the malfunction indicator light comes on When the ignition switch is turned to “ON”
If AIR BAG light does not blink or or blinks when the engine is running, there
come on briefly when the ignition position or the engine switch is pressed to
is a damage in the emission control sys- change the ignition mode to ON, this light
switch is turned to “ON” position or tem.
the engine switch is pressed to comes on for several seconds so you can
Bring the vehicle to an authorized SUZUKI check that the light is working.
change the ignition mode to ON, dealer to have the damage fixed.
stays on for more than 10 seconds, If this light comes on when the engine is
or comes on while driving, the air bag Also, if this light comes on when the running, there is a problem with the contin-
system or the seat belt pretensioner engine is running, there is a problem with uously variable transaxle system. Ask an
system may not work properly, which the continuously variable transaxle sys- authorized SUZUKI dealer to have the sys-
could result in serious injury in the tem. Ask an authorized SUZUKI dealer to tem inspected.
event of a crash. Have both systems have the system inspected.
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI
dealer.

2-84

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

(For CVT models) When this light comes on, a ding sounds
If the CVT fluid temperature becomes too Open door warning light once to remind you to refuel.
high, this light will blink. Stop the vehicle in If you do not refuel, a ding sounds every
a safe place and let the fluid cool down. time when the ignition switch is turned to
“ON” position or the engine switch is
pressed to change the ignition mode to
Immobilizer/keyless push start sys- ON.
tem warning light
NOTE:
54G391
The activation point of this light varies
depending on road conditions (for exam-
This light remains on until all doors (includ- ple, slope or curve) and driving conditions
ing the tailgate) are completely closed. because of fuel movement in the tank.
If any door (including the tailgate) is open
when the vehicle is moving, a ding sounds Electric power steering light
80JM122 to remind you to close all doors completely.
When the ignition switch is turned to “ON”
position or the engine switch is pressed to Low fuel warning light
change the ignition mode to ON, this light
comes on briefly so you can check that the
light is working.
If this light blinks or stays on, there is a
problem with the system or the steering 79J039
lock cannot be released. If this happens, When the ignition switch is turned to “ON”
press the engine switch, turning the steer- position or the engine switch is pressed to
ing wheel to the right or left. 54G343 change the ignition mode to ON, this light
If this light still blinks or stays on even if If this light comes on, refuel the fuel tank comes on. When the engine is started, the
you start the engine with normal voltage of as soon as possible. light goes out.
the vehicle battery, ask an authorized If this light comes on while driving, the
SUZUKI dealer to have the system power steering system may not work prop-
inspected. erly. Have the system inspected by an
authorized SUZUKI dealer.

2-85

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

NOTE: High engine coolant temperature warn-

The following steering wheel operations Engine coolant temperature light ing light (red color)
may gradually take more effort while park- (if equipped)
If this light blinks while driving, it means the
ing or driving at a very low speed. This is
engine is running hot. Avoid driving condi-
not a malfunction of the steering system,
tions that may lead to actual overheating. If
but the power steering control system lim-
the light stays on without blinking, then the
its the power assist in order to prevent it
engine is overheating. Follow the instruc-
from overheating.
tions in “Engine trouble: Overheating” of
• The steering wheel is operated very
“EMERGENCY SERVICE” section.
often.
• The steering wheel is kept in a fully
turned position for a long while.
54G344 NOTICE
When the power steering control system When the ignition switch is turned to the Continuing to drive the vehicle when
cools down, the power steering system will “ON” position, this light comes on briefly so engine overheating is indicated can
return to its original condition. you can check that the light is working. result in severe engine damage.
However, repeating these operations could
cause damage to the power steering sys- This indicator has the following two func-
tem. tions.

NOTE: Low engine coolant temperature light

If the power steering system does not work (blue color)
properly, it will require greater effort to This light stays on while the engine is still
steer, but you still will be able to steer. cold and goes off when the engine has
warmed up.
NOTE:
If the steering is operated, you may hear If this light blinks, there is a problem with
noise caused by electric power steering the system. Have your vehicle inspected
operation. This is normal and indicates that by an authorized SUZUKI dealer.
the power steering system works properly.

2-86

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

LED headlight warning light Turn signal indicators Illumination indicator light
(if equipped)

50G055 64J045
54P000234 When you turn on the left or right turn sig- This indicator light comes on while the
When the engine switch is pressed to nals, the corresponding green arrow on the position lights, tail light and/or the head-
change the ignition mode to ON, this light instrument cluster will flash along with the lights are on.
comes on briefly so you can check that the respective turn signal lights. When you
light is working. turn on the hazard warning switch, both
arrows will flash along with all of the turn Front fog light indicator light
If this light comes on, there is a problem signal lights. (if equipped)
with the LED headlight. Park the vehicle in
a safe place and consult an authorized
SUZUKI dealer to have the problem cor- Main beam (high beam) indicator
rected. light

68PM00268

The front fog light indicator light comes on

when the front fog light operates.
50G056

This indicator comes on when headlight

main beams (high beams) are turned on.

2-87

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

ENG A-STOP indicator light ENG A-STOP OFF light S (sport) mode indicator
(if equipped)

72M00159
72M00032 52RM20600
When the ignition switch is turned to “ON”
When the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position or the engine switch is pressed to This light comes on when S (sport) mode
position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to ON, this light switch is ON.
change the ignition mode to ON, this light comes on briefly so you can check that the
comes on briefly so you can check that the light is working.
light is working. Master warning indicator light
When you push the ENG A-STOP OFF (if equipped)
When the engine stops automatically, this switch, this light comes on.
light comes on.
This light blinks in either of the following
For details, refer to “ENG A-STOP system cases.
(engine auto stop start system)” in “OPER- • There may be something wrong with the
ATING YOUR VEHICLE” section. ENG A-STOP OFF system.
• It may be time to replace the battery.
You should have the system inspected by
68PM00278
an authorized SUZUKI dealer.
When the engine switch is pressed to
For details, refer to “ENG A-STOP system change the ignition mode to ON, this light
(engine auto stop start system)” in “OPER- comes on briefly so you can check that the
ATING YOUR VEHICLE” section. light is working.
When the information display shows warn-
ing and indicator messages, this indicator
light may also blink.
For details, refer to “Information display” in
this section.

2-88

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Lighting control lever Lighting operation

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

66RH033

With the headlights on, push the lever for-

66RH032 ward to switch to the high beams (main
To turn the lights on or off, twist the knob beams) or pull the lever toward you to
65D611 on the end of the lever. There are three switch to the low beams. When the high
positions: beams (main beams) are on, a light on the
instrument cluster will come on. To
WARNING momentarily activate the high beams (main
OFF
To avoid possible injury, do not oper- All lights are off. beams) as a passing signal, pull the lever
ate controls by reaching through the slightly toward you and release it when you
steering wheel. have completed the signal.
Front position lights, tail lights, license
plate light and instrument lights are on, but
headlights are off.

Front position lights, tail lights, license

plate light, instrument lights and headlights
are on.

2-89

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Light reminder buzzer Front fog light switch (if equipped) Headlight leveling switch
The interior buzzer continuously beeps if (if equipped)
you open the driver’s door without turning EXAMPLE
off the headlights and position lights. This
function is triggered under the following
condition:
The headlights and/or position lights are
on even after the ignition switch is turned
off, or the engine switch is pressed to
change the ignition mode to LOCK (OFF).
The buzzer stops sounding when you turn
off the headlights and position lights.

NOTE: 66RH034
A message is indicated on the information To turn the front fog light on, twist the knob
display in the instrument cluster (Type B) as shown in the illustration with the posi-
while the buzzer is sounding. tion lights, tail lights and/or the headlights 75RM008
are on. When the front fog light is on, an
indicator light on the instrument cluster will Level the headlight beam according to the
Daytime running light (D.R.L.) sys- load condition of your vehicle by turning
tem (if equipped) come on.
this switch. The chart shows the appropri-
When the engine is started, the daytime NOTE: ate switch position for different vehicle load
running lights are turned on by this system. In some countries the lighting operation conditions.
Conditions for D.R.L. system operation may be different from the above descrip-
1) The engine is running. tion according to local regulations.
2) Headlights and front fog light (if
equipped) are off.

NOTE:
Brightness of the daytime running lights is
different from the brightness of the position
lights, but it is not a malfunction.

2-90

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Switch Turn signal control lever Turn signal operation

Vehicle Load Condition
Position With the ignition switch in “ON” position or
the ignition mode ON, move the lever
Driver only 0
upward or downward to activate the right
Driver + 1 passenger or left turn signals.
0.5
(in front seat)
Normal turn signal
Driver + 4 passengers,
1.5 EXAMPLE
no cargo
Driver + 4 passengers,
2
cargo added
Driver + full cargo 3

65D611

WARNING
66RH035
To avoid possible injury, do not oper-
ate controls by reaching through the Move the lever all the way upward or
steering wheel. downward to signal. When the turn is com-
pleted, the signal will cancel and the lever
will return to its normal position.

2-91

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Lane change signal

Hazard warning switch Windshield wiper and washer
EXAMPLE
lever

66RH036

Move the lever partially upward or down-

ward to turn right or left and hold the lever
in the moved position. EXAMPLE
• The turn signal and its indicator flash
57RK035
while the lever is held at the moved posi-
tion. Push the hazard warning switch to activate 57L21128
• The turn signal and its indicator flash 3 the hazard warning lights. All turn signal
times even if you returned the lever lights and both turn signal indicators will
flash simultaneously. To turn off the lights, WARNING
immediately after the activation.
push the switch again. To avoid possible injury, do not oper-
NOTE: Use the hazard warning lights to warn ate controls by reaching through the
The turn signal and its indicator can be set other drivers of possible risk of traffic haz- steering wheel.
whether they flash 3 times after the turn ard when you park your vehicle in case of
signal lever is returned via the information emergency.
display. Refer to “Information display” in
this section.

NOTE:
You can customize the setting for the num-
ber of flashing times of the turn signal and
its indicator (1 to 4 times). Please ask an
authorized SUZUKI dealer for the customi-
zation.

2-92

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

Wiper and washer operation Windshield wipers

EXAMPLE
When the ignition switch is in “ON” position
or the ignition mode is ON, you can use EXAMPLE
the wiper/washer lever.
When the wipers are under heavy load MIST
such as covered by snow, the breaker will
be activated and the wipers will stop oper- OFF
ating to protect the wiper motor from over-
heating. If the wiper stops during
operation, do the following methods. INT

1) Stop the vehicle in a safe place, and LO 57RK037

turn the engine off.
2) Move the wiper lever and switch to HI If the lever is equipped with “INT TIME”
“OFF” position. control, turn the control knob forward or
3) Remove obstacles such as snow on the 57RK036 backward to adjust the intermittent wiper
wipers. operation to the desired interval.
To turn the windshield wipers on, move the
4) After a while, when the temperature of lever down to one of the three operating
the wiper motor becomes low enough, positions. In “INT” position, the wipers
the breaker will be reset automatically operate intermittently. The “INT” position is
and the wipers will be able to use. very convenient for driving in mist or light
If you cannot use the wipers after a while, rain. In “LO” position, the wipers operate at
there may be another problem. Ask an a steady low speed. In “HI” position, the
authorized SUZUKI dealer to have the wip- wipers operate at a steady high speed. To
ers inspected. turn off the wipers, move the lever back to
“OFF” position.
Move the lever up and hold it to “MIST”
position, the windshield wipers will turn on
continuously at low speed.

2-93

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

Windshield washer NOTICE Rear window wiper/washer switch

To help prevent damage to the wind-
EXAMPLE shield wiper and washer system EXAMPLE
components, you should take the fol-
lowing precautions: Washer
• Do not continue to hold in the lever
Wiper
when there is no windshield
washer fluid being sprayed or the
washer motor can be damaged.
• Do not attempt to remove dirt from
a dry windshield with the wipers or
you can damage the windshield Intermittent wiper
and the wiper blades. Always wet
57RK038 the windshield with washer fluid
To spray windshield washer fluid, pull the before operating the wipers.
57RK039
lever toward you. The windshield wipers • Clear ice or packed snow from the
wiper blades before using the wip- To turn the rear wiper on, twist the rear
will automatically turn on at low speed if
ers. wiper switch on the end of the lever for-
they are not already on and your vehicle is
• Check the washer fluid level regu- ward to “ON” position. If your vehicle is
equipped with “INT” position.
larly. Check it often when the equipped with “INT” position (if equipped),
weather is bad. the rear wiper operates intermittently when
WARNING you twist the switch forward to “INT” posi-
• Fill a reservoir to 3/4 level with
• To prevent windshield icing in cold washer fluid for its expansion, if tion. To turn the rear wiper off, twist the
weather, turn on the defroster to temperature falls low enough to switch rearward to “OFF” position.
heat the windshield before and freeze the fluid. With the rear wiper in “OFF” position, twist
during windshield washer use. the switch rearward and hold it there to
• Do not use radiator antifreeze in spray window washer fluid.
the windshield washer reservoir. It
can severely impair visibility when With the rear wiper in “ON” position, turn
sprayed on the windshield, and can the switch forward and hold it there to
also damage your vehicle’s paint. spray window washer fluid.

2-94

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

NOTICE Tilt/telescoping (if equipped) WARNING

Clear ice or snow from the rear win- steering lock lever Never attempt to adjust the steering
dow and rear wiper blade before wheel while the vehicle is moving or
using the rear wiper. Accumulated you could lose control of the vehicle.
ice or snow could prevent the wiper EXAMPLE
blade from moving, causing damage
to the wiper motor.

(1)

(2)

57RK040

(1) LOCK
(2) UNLOCK

The lock lever is located under the steering

column. To adjust the steering wheel
height and fore-aft position:
1) Push down the lock lever to unlock the
steering column.
2) Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
height and fore-aft position and lock the
steering column by pulling up the lock
lever.
3) Try moving the steering wheel up and
down and back and forth to check that it
is securely locked in position.

2-95

57RK0-14E
 BEFORE DRIVING

NOTE:
Horn Heated rear window switch • The defogger will work only when the
(if equipped) engine is running.
• The defogger will automatically turn off
EXAMPLE after the defogger remains on for 15 min-
utes to prevent discharging of the lead-
EXAMPLE acid battery.

(1)
52RM20420

Press the horn button of the steering wheel 52RM20430

to sound the horn. The horn will sound with When the rear window is misted, push this
the ignition switch in any position or any switch (1) to clear the window.
ignition mode.
An indicator light will come on when the
defogger is on. The defogger will work only
when the engine is running. To turn off the
defogger, push the switch (1) again.

NOTICE
The heated rear window use a large
amount of electricity. Turn off the
switch after the window have become
clear.

2-96

57RK0-14E
BEFORE DRIVING

MEMO

2-97

57RK0-14E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Exhaust gas warning .......................................................... 3-1
Daily inspection checklist .................................................. 3-1
Engine oil consumption ..................................................... 3-2
Ignition switch 3
(vehicle without keyless push start system) .................... 3-3
Engine switch
(vehicle with keyless push start system) .......................... 3-5
Keyless push start system (if equipped) .......................... 3-6
Parking brake lever ............................................................. 3-10
Pedal ..................................................................................... 3-11
Starting engine
(vehicle without keyless push start system) .................... 3-12
Starting engine
(vehicle with keyless push start system) .......................... 3-13
Using transaxle ................................................................... 3-16
ENG A-STOP system (engine auto stop start system) .... 3-20
60G408
Cruise control (if equipped) ............................................... 3-25
Braking ................................................................................. 3-27
Electronic stability program (ESP®) .................................. 3-29

57RK0-14E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Exhaust gas warning WARNING Daily inspection checklist

(Continued)
• Do not park with the engine run-
ning for a long period of time, even
Before driving
in an open area. If it is necessary to
sit for a short time in a parked vehi-
cle with the engine running, check
that the air intake selector is set to
FRESH AIR and the blower is at
high speed.
• Avoid operating the vehicle with
the tailgate or trunk open. If it is
necessary to do so, check that the
sunroof (if equipped) and all win-
dows are closed, and the blower is
52D334
at high speed with the air intake
selector set to FRESH AIR.
• To allow proper operation of your
WARNING vehicle’s ventilation system, keep 60A187

Avoid breathing exhaust gases. the air inlet grill in front of the wind- 1) Check that windows, mirrors, lights and
Exhaust gases contain carbon mon- shield clear of snow, leaves or reflectors are clean and unobstructed.
oxide, a potentially lethal gas that is other obstructions at all times. 2) Visually check the tires for the following
colorless and odorless. Since carbon • Keep the exhaust tailpipe area clear points:
monoxide is difficult to detect by of snow and other material to help – the depth of the tread groove
itself, take the following precautions reduce the buildup of exhaust – abnormal wear, cracks and damage
to help prevent carbon monoxide gases under the vehicle. This is – loose wheel nuts
from entering your vehicle. particularly important when parked – existence of foreign material such as
• Do not leave the engine running in in blizzard conditions. nails, stones, etc.
garages or other confined areas. • Have the exhaust system inspected
(Continued) periodically for damage and leak- Refer to “Tires” in “INSPECTION AND
age. Any damage or leakage MAINTENANCE” section for details.
should be repaired immediately. 3) Look for fluid and oil leakage.

3-1

57RK0-14E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: 6) Hood latch operation

It is normal for water to drip from the air Pull the hood release handle inside the Engine oil consumption
conditioning system while and after use. vehicle. Check that you cannot open
the hood further without releasing the It is normal for the engine to consume
4) Check that the hood is fully closed and secondary latch. Close the hood some engine oil during normal vehicle
latched. securely after checking for proper latch operation.
5) Check the headlights, turn signal lights, operation. See the item “All latches,
The amount of engine oil consumption
brake lights and horn for proper opera- hinges and locks” of “Chassis, body
depends on viscosity and quality of the oil
tion. and others” in “Maintenance schedule”
and your driving conditions.
6) Adjust the seat and head restraint. in “INSPECTION AND MAINTE-
More oil is consumed during high-speed
7) Check the brake pedal and the parking NANCE” section for lubrication sched-
driving and when there is frequent acceler-
brake lever. ule.
ation and deceleration. Under high loads,
8) Adjust the mirrors.
your engine also will consume more oil.
9) Check that you and all passengers WARNING A new engine also consumes more oil,
have properly fastened by the seat
Check that the hood is fully closed since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder
belts.
and latched before driving. If it is not, walls have not yet become conditioned.
10)Check that all warning lights come on
it can fly up unexpectedly during New engines reach the normal level of oil
as the ignition switch is turned to “ON”
driving, obstructing your view and consumption only after approximately
position or the engine switch is pressed
resulting in an accident. 5000 km (3000 miles) driving.
to change the ignition mode to ON.
11)Check all gauges.
Once a month, or each time you fill your Oil consumption:
12)Check that the brake system warning
fuel tank, check the tire pressure using a Max. 1.0 L per 1000 km
light turns off when the parking brake is
tire pressure gauge. (1 Qt. per 600 miles)
released.
When judging the amount of oil consump-
Once a week, or each time you fill your fuel tion, note that the oil may become diluted
tank, perform the following under-hood and it is difficult to judge the accurate oil
checks: level.
As an example, if a vehicle is used for
1) Engine oil level
repeated short trips, and consumes a nor-
2) Coolant level
mal amount of oil, the dipstick may not
3) Brake fluid level
show any drop in the oil level at all, even
4) Lead-acid battery solution level
after 1000 km (600 miles) or more of driv-
5) Windshield washer fluid level
ing. This is because the oil gradually
becomes diluted with fuel or moisture,

3-2

57RK0-14E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

making it appear that the oil level has not

changed. Ignition switch EXAMPLE
You should also be aware that the diluting (vehicle without keyless push
ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle
is subsequently driven at high speeds, start system)
such as on an expressway, making it
appear that oil is excessively consumed
after high-speed driving.

68PH00310

The ignition switch has the following four

positions:

LOCK
This is the normal parking position. It is the
65D611
only position in which the key can be
removed.
WARNING
To avoid possible injury, do not oper-
ate controls by reaching through the
steering wheel.

3-3

57RK0-14E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Manual transaxle ACC

Accessories such as the radio can oper-
Turn to “LOCK”
ate, but the engine is off.

ON
This is the normal operating position. All
Push
electrical systems are on.

START
This is the position for starting the engine
using the starter motor. The key should be
released from this position as soon as the
engine starts.

60G033
Ignition key reminder 81A297S
A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind
• Manual transaxle vehicles you to remove the ignition key if it is in the
You must push in the key to turn it to WARNING
ignition switch when the driver’s door is
“LOCK” position. It locks the ignition, and opened. • Never return the ignition switch to
prevents normal use of the steering “LOCK” position and remove the
wheel after the key is removed. ignition key while the vehicle is
moving. The steering wheel will
• CVT vehicles lock and you will not be able to
The gearshift lever must be in “P” (Park) steer the vehicle.
position to turn the key to “LOCK” posi- (Continued)
tion. It locks the ignition and prevents
normal use of the steering wheel and
gearshift lever.

To release the steering lock, insert the key

and turn it clockwise to one of the other
positions. If you have trouble turning the
key to unlock the steering wheel, try turn-
ing the steering wheel slightly to the right
or left while turning the key.

3-4

57RK0-14E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

IGNITION SWITCH POSITION. Refer to

WARNING Engine switch “Information display” in “BEFORE DRIV-
(vehicle with keyless push ING” section for details.
(Continued)
• Always return the ignition switch to start system) ON
“LOCK” position and remove the • With the engine off
ignition key when leaving the vehi- You can use such electric equipment as
cle even only for a short time. Also the power windows and wipers with the
do not leave children alone in a EXAMPLE
engine off. When this ignition mode is
parked vehicle. Unattended chil- selected by pressing the engine switch,
dren could cause accidental move- the information display in the instrument
ment of the vehicle or could tamper cluster shows the following message:
with power windows or power sun- “ON” IGNITION SWITCH POSITION.
roof. They also could suffer from
heat stroke in warm or hot weather. • With the engine on
These could result in severe injury All electric equipment is operational. The
or even death. vehicle can be driven when you have
selected this ignition mode by pressing
the engine switch.
NOTICE
• Do not use the starter motor for 57RK041
START
more than 12 seconds at a time. If Provided you have the keyless push start
LOCK (OFF) system remote controller with you, the
the engine does not start, wait 15 This mode is for parking the vehicle. When
seconds before trying again. If the engine automatically starts when you
this mode is selected by pressing the press the engine switch to select this igni-
engine does not start after several engine switch and then any door (including
attempts, check the fuel and igni- tion mode after placing the gearshift lever
the tailgate) is opened or closed, the steer- in “P” position and depressing the brake
tion systems or consult an autho- ing will be locked automatically.
rized SUZUKI dealer. pedal. (If you need to re-start the engine
• Do not leave the ignition switch in while the vehicle is moving, shift into “N”.)
ACC
“ON” position if the engine is not Press the engine switch to select this igni-
running as the lead-acid battery NOTE:
tion mode to use such electric equipment You do not need to keep the engine switch
will discharge. as the audio system, outside rearview mir- pressed until the engine starts.
rors and accessory socket with the engine
off. When this position is selected, the
information display in the instrument clus-
ter shows the following message: “ACC”

3-5

57RK0-14E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTICE Unreleased steering lock warning Keyless push start system

Do not leave the engine switch in If the steering lock remains engaged when (if equipped)
ACC or ON mode when the engine is you press the engine switch to change the
not running. Avoid using the radio or ignition mode to ON, the information dis- Provided the keyless push start system
other electric accessories for a long play in the instrument cluster shows the remote controller is within the interior work-
time when the engine switch is in message: “TRN. STEERING WHEEL TO able area (refer to the related explanation
ACC or ON mode when the engine is RELEASE LOCK”. Refer to “Information in this section), you can use the engine
not running, otherwise the lead-acid display” in “BEFORE DRIVING” section for switch for starting the engine and selecting
battery may discharge. details. an ignition mode (ACC or ON). In addition,
the following functions can be used:
NOTE:
NOTE: The steering lock may not be released and • Keyless entry function. Refer to “Keyless
In the presence of strong radio wave or the immobilizer/keyless push start system push start system remote controller /
noise, you may not be able to change the warning light turns on if some load is keyless entry system transmitter (if
ignition mode to ACC or ON or to start the applied on the steering wheel. If this hap- equipped)” in “BEFORE DRIVING” sec-
engine using the engine switch. In this pens, turn the steering wheel system to the tion for details.
case, the information display in the instru- right or left to relieve it from the load before • Locking and unlocking doors (including
ment cluster will show the following mes- you press the engine switch again to the tailgate) using a request switch.
sage: KEY FOB NOT DETECTED. change to the desired ignition mode. Refer to “Keyless push start system
remote controller / keyless entry system
transmitter (if equipped)” in “BEFORE
DRIVING” section for details.
• Immobilizer (anti-theft) function. Refer to
“Immobilizer system” in “BEFORE DRIV-
ING” section for details.

3-6

57RK0-14E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Every time you press the engine switch,

Engine switch illumination Selection of ignition modes the ignition mode changes as follows.
The engine switch is illuminated (lit) in the Press the engine switch to select ACC or
following situations: ON mode as follows when you use an
• When the engine is off and the driver’s electric accessory or check the operation Gearshift
door is open, or for 15 seconds after the of instruments without running the engine. lever in P
driver’s door is closed. The illumination
1) Bring the keyless push start system
will fade out after 15 seconds passed.
remote controller with you and sit in the
• When the engine is off and the position
driver’s seat. LOCK ACC ON
lights are on. The illumination will go out
2) Without depressing the brake pedal,
when the position lights are turned off. (Audio equipment)
press the engine switch (1). (OFF)
• When the engine is on and the position
lights and/or the headlights are on. The Gearshift lever in a
illumination will go out when the position position other than P
lights and/or the headlights are turned
off.
57L31006

NOTE:
• If the gearshift lever is in any position
other than “P”, or if the knob button is
(1) pushed when the gearshift lever is in “P”
position the ignition mode cannot be
82K254 returned to LOCK (OFF).
• When selecting the ignition modes, the
information display in the instrument
82K253 cluster shows certain messages. Refer
to “Information display” in “BEFORE
NOTE: DRIVING” section for details.
To save the lead-acid battery, the illumina-
tion will be automatically turned off when
both of the following conditions are simul-
taneously met:
• The headlights and position lights are
turned off.
• 15 minutes has elapsed since opening
the driver’s door.

3-7

57RK0-14E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

If the master warning indicator light 2) The master warning indicator light in • If the battery of the remote controller is
blinks and the ignition modes cannot the instrument cluster blinks and the becoming discharged, the correspond-
be selected message “PLACE KEY FOB ON ing message will appear in the informa-
Your keyless push start system remote con- START SWITCH” appears in the infor- tion display when you press the engine
troller may not be sensed as being within the mation display within about 10 sec- switch to change the ignition mode to
interior workable area (refer to the related onds. Touch the engine switch with ON. Refer to “Information display” in
explanation in this section). Try again after LOCK button side of remote controller “BEFORE DRIVING” section for details.
checking that you have the remote controller (2) for about 2 seconds. For details on replacing the battery, refer
with you. If the ignition modes still cannot be to “Keyless push start system remote
selected, the battery of the remote controller NOTE: controller / keyless entry system trans-
may be discharged. To select an ignition • If you still cannot select the ignition mitter (if equipped)” in “BEFORE DRIV-
mode, you must then use the following modes, there may be some problem with ING” section.
method: the keyless push start system. Contact
an authorized SUZUKI dealer for an
inspection of the system. REMOTE CONTROLLER OUTSIDE
EXAMPLE warning
• The immobilizer/keyless push start sys-
(1) tem warning light will come on for about When either of the conditions described
5 seconds while the master warning indi- below is met, the system causes a
cator light is blinking. In addition, the REMOTE CONTROLLER OUTSIDE warn-
information display in the instrument ing by sounding the interior and exterior
cluster will show a message during this buzzers. At the same time, the immobi-
time. Refer to “Information display” in lizer/keyless push start system warning
“BEFORE DRIVING” section for details. light comes on and the master warning
• You may customize the system to cause indicator light blinks.
(2)
the interior buzzer to sound once for
warning that remote controller is out of • Any door is opened and then closed while
sensing range. To incorporate this cus- the remote controller is not inside the vehi-
52RM30020 tomization, please contact an authorized cle and the engine is running or the igni-
SUZUKI dealer. tion mode has been changed to ACC or
1) Without depressing the brake pedal, ON by pressing the engine switch.
push the engine switch (1). • The remote controller is not inside the
vehicle when you attempt to start the
engine after changing the ignition mode
to ACC or ON by pressing the engine
switch.

3-8

57RK0-14E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

by pressing the engine switch and then NOTE:

EXAMPLE perform the engine starting operation. • Even when the remote controller is in the
(2) Refer to “Starting engine (vehicle with key- interior workable area, if it is in any of the
less push start system) (if equipped)” in following conditions, you may not be
this section. able to start the engine or select the igni-
• Always keep the remote controller with tion modes, and the REMOTE CON-
you as the driver. TROLLER OUTSIDE warning may be
given.
– The remote controller’s battery is low.
(1) Interior workable area for keyless – The remote controller is affected by
push start system strong radio wave or noise.
– The remote controller is in contact with
or covered by a metallic object.
– The remote controller is in the
52RM30230 secluded stowages such as the glove
(1) Immobilizer/keyless push start sys- box or a door pocket.
tem warning light (blinks) – The remote controller is in the sun
(2) Master warning indicator light (blinks) visor pocket or on the floor.
• Even when the remote controller is out-
NOTE: side the interior workable area, if it is in
• If the warning is given, relocate the any of the following conditions, you may
(1) be able to start the engine or select the
remote controller as soon as possible.
• Any attempt to start the engine will fail 54P000373 ignition mode. The REMOTE CON-
while the warning is active. The mes- TROLLER OUTSIDE warning may not
(1) Interior workable area
sage appearing in the information dis- be given at that time.
play in the instrument cluster will also – The remote controller is outside the
The interior workable area is defined as all
indicate this condition. Refer to “Informa- vehicle but very close to a door.
the interior spaces except for the space
tion display” in “BEFORE DRIVING” sec- – The remote controller is in certain area
above the instrument panel or in the lug-
tion for details. on the instrument panel or in the lug-
gage compartment.
• Normally, the immobilizer/keyless push gage compartment.
start system warning light should go out
and the master warning indicator light
should stop blinking shortly after the
remote controller is brought back inside
the vehicle. If they remain lit and blinking,
change the ignition mode to LOCK (OFF)

3-9

57RK0-14E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

For CVT vehicles, always set the parking

Parking brake lever brake before moving the gearshift lever to WARNING
“P” (PARK) position. If you park on an
incline and shift into “P” before setting the Always set the parking brake fully
parking brake, the weight of the vehicle before leaving your vehicle or it may
EXAMPLE move, causing injury or damage.
may make it difficult to shift out of “P” when
you are ready to drive the vehicle. When parking, make sure the gear-
(1) shift lever for manual transaxle vehi-
When preparing to drive the vehicle, move cles is in 1st gear or “R” (Reverse)
(2) the gearshift lever out of “P” position and the gearshift lever for CVT vehi-
before releasing the parking brake. cles is in “P” (Park). Remember, even
though the transaxle is in gear or in
WARNING Park, you must set the parking brake
(3) fully.
• Never drive your vehicle with the
parking brake on: rear brake effec-
tiveness can be reduced from over- WARNING
heating, brake life may be
54G039 shortened, or permanent brake When parking the vehicle in
(1) To set damage may result. extremely cold weather, the following
(2) To release • If the parking brake does not hold procedure should be used:
(3) To release the vehicle securely or does not 1) Set the parking brake.
fully release, have your vehicle 2) Manual transaxle – turn off the
The parking brake lever is located between inspected immediately by an autho- engine, then shift into reverse or
the front seats. To set the parking brake, rized SUZUKI dealer. first gear.
depress the brake pedal and pull the park- CVT – shift into “P” (Park) and
ing brake lever all the way up. To release turn off the engine.
the parking brake, depress the brake pedal 3) Get out of the vehicle and put
and pull up slightly on the parking brake chocks under the wheels.
lever, push the button on the end of the 4) Release the parking brake.
lever with your thumb, and lower the lever When you return to your vehicle,
to its original position. first set the parking brake, and
then remove the wheel chocks.

3-10

57RK0-14E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Pedal Clutch pedal (1) WARNING

A clutch pedal is used to disengage the Do not apply brakes continuously or
Manual transaxle driving force to the wheels when starting rest your foot on the brake pedal.
EXAMPLE the engine, stopping, or shifting the gear- This will result in overheating of the
shift lever. Depressing the pedal disen- brakes which could cause unpredict-
gages the clutch. able braking action, longer stopping
(1) (2) distances, or permanent brake dam-
WARNING age.
Do not drive with your foot resting on
the clutch pedal. It could result in
excessive clutch wear, clutch dam- Accelerator pedal (3)
age, or unexpected loss of engine An accelerator pedal controls the speed of
(3) braking. the engine. Depressing the accelerator
pedal increases power output and speed.
Brake pedal (2)
80J2121
Your vehicle is equipped with either front
CVT and rear disc brakes or front disc brakes
EXAMPLE and rear drum brakes. Depressing a brake
pedal applies both sets of brakes.
You may hear occasional brake squeal
(2) when you apply the brakes. This is a nor-
mal condition caused by environmental
factors such as temperature, humidity or
dust, etc.

WARNING
(3)
If brake squeal is excessive and
occurs each time the brakes are
applied, you should have the brakes
80J2122 checked by an authorized SUZUKI
dealer.

3-11

57RK0-14E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
Starting engine CVT vehicles have a starter interlock Starting a cold and warm engine
(vehicle without keyless push device which is designed to keep the With your foot taken off the accelerator
starter from operating if the transaxle is in pedal, crank the engine by turning the igni-
start system) any of the drive positions. tion key to “START”. Release the key when
the engine starts.
WARNING
Before starting engine NOTICE
Check that the parking brake is set
fully and the transaxle is in Neutral • Stop turning the starter immedi-
MT (or Park for vehicles with a CVT) ately after the engine has started or
before attempting to start the engine. the starter system can be damaged.
• Do not crank the engine for more
than 12 seconds at a time. If the
engine does not start on the first
try, wait about 15 seconds before
trying again.
CVT
If the engine does not start after 12 sec-
onds of cranking, wait about 15 seconds,
and then press down the accelerator pedal
to 1/3 of its stroke and try cranking the
engine again. Release the key and accel-
57RK042
erator pedal when the engine starts.
1) Check that the parking brake is set fully.
If the engine still does not start, depress
2) Manual transaxle – Shift into “N” (Neu-
the accelerator pedal all the way to the
tral). Hold the clutch pedal and brake
floor while cranking.
pedal fully depressed.
CVT – If the gearshift lever is not in “P”
(Park) position, shift into “P” (Park). (If
you need to re-start the engine while
the vehicle is moving, shift into “N”.)

3-12

57RK0-14E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
Starting engine • You do not need to keep the engine
(vehicle with keyless push switch pressed to start the engine.
• CVT vehicles have a starter interlock
start system) device which is designed to keep the
starter from operating if the transaxle is
in any of the drive positions.
Before starting engine • During the engine starting procedure,
messages on the information display will
(1) help you. Refer to “Information display”
in “BEFORE DRIVING” section for
CVT 82K254 details.
3) The “PUSH START SWITCH” message • You should turn off such loads as the
will appear in the information display in headlights and air conditioning system to
the instrument cluster. Push the engine facilitate starting of the engine.
switch (1). When the engine is started, • Even if you fail to start the engine, the
the starter motor will automatically stop. starter motor will stop turning automati-
cally after a short time. After the starter
WARNING motor has stopped or if there is some
problem with the system, the starter
Check that the parking brake is set motor will rotate only while the engine
fully and the transaxle is in Park switch is being pressed.
57RK043 before attempting to start the engine.
1) Check that the parking brake is set fully.
2) If the gearshift lever is not in “P” (Park) NOTICE
position, shift it to “P”. Hold the brake
pedal fully depressed. • Do not depress the accelerator during
the engine starting procedure.
• If the engine does not respond when
you try to start it with the engine
switch or if the engine switch repeats
cycling through LOCK (OFF) - ACC -
ON mode, the lead-acid battery may
be discharged. Check the voltage of
the lead-acid battery before trying
again.

3-13

57RK0-14E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

If the master warning indicator light

Stopping engine Starting a cold and warm engine blinks and the engine cannot be started
• Depress the engine switch to stop the With your foot taken off the accelerator Your keyless push start system remote
engine after the vehicle stopped com- pedal, crank the engine by pressing the controller may not be sensed as being
pletely. engine switch to change the ignition mode within the interior workable area. Try again
• In case of emergency, you can stop the to START. after checking that you have the remote
engine by quickly pushing the engine controller with you. If the engine still can-
switch more than 3 times, or pushing NOTICE not be started, the battery of the remote
and holding the engine switch for more controller may be discharged. To start the
than 2 seconds while the vehicle is in Do not crank the engine for more engine, use the following method:
motion. than 12 seconds at a time.
If the engine does not start on the
first try, wait about 15 seconds before
EXAMPLE (1)
NOTE:
Except in cases of emergency, do not stop trying again.
the engine while the vehicle is in motion.
The steering and braking operation will After pressing the engine switch to change
require more effort when the engine is the ignition mode to START, the starter
stopped. cranks the engine for about 12 seconds
Refer to “Braking” in this section. before it can start the engine. If the engine
fails to start at the first attempt, wait about (2)
NOTICE 15 seconds, and then try again while keep-
ing the engine switch pressed while press- 52RM30020
If you stop the engine while the vehi- ing down the accelerator pedal 1/3 of its
cle is in motion, the CVT may be dam- 1) Check that the parking brake is set fully.
stroke. Release the accelerator pedal
aged. 2) If the gearshift lever is not in “P” (Park)
when the engine starts.
Avoid stopping the engine while driv- position, shift it to “P”. Hold the brake
ing. If the engine still does not start, try holding pedal fully depressed.
the accelerator pedal all the way to the 3) “PUSH START SWITCH.” message will
floor while cranking. appear in the information display in the
• If the engine remains stopped for while
If you are unable to start the engine using instrument cluster. Press the engine
after it was stopped unexpectedly or was
this procedure, consult an authorized switch (1).
raced before stopping, a clicking sound
SUZUKI dealer. 4) The master warning indicator light in
may be heard from around the engine
the instrument cluster blinks within
when it is restarted. This is not a mal-
about 10 seconds. Touch the engine
function. Always let the engine idle
switch with LOCK button side of remote
before stopping it.
controller (2) for about 2 seconds.

3-14

57RK0-14E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: LOCK (OFF) mode reminder buzzer

• If you still cannot start the engine after Returning ignition mode to LOCK If the driver’s door is opened without
several attempts using the above (OFF) returning the ignition mode to LOCK (OFF)
method, there may be a problem else- To ensure safety, the ignition mode can be by pressing the engine switch, a buzzer
where, such as a low lead-acid battery. returned to LOCK (OFF) by pressing the sounds to warn you of this condition.
consult an authorized SUZUKI dealer for engine switch only when the gearshift lever • If you open the driver’s door after press-
inspection. is placed in “P” position without pressing ing the engine switch to change the igni-
• The immobilizer/keyless push start sys- the knob button. tion mode to ACC, the interior buzzer
tem warning light will come on for about
beeps intermittently.
5 seconds while the master warning indi- NOTE: • The buzzer will stop sounding if you then
cator light is blinking. In addition, the The ignition mode cannot be returned to push the engine switch twice, thus bring-
information display will show a certain LOCK (OFF) position if the gearshift lever ing it back the ignition mode to LOCK
message during this time. Refer to is in any other position than “P”. (OFF).
“Information display” in “BEFORE DRIV- Certain problems such as a fault in engine
ING” section for details. system may prevent the engine switch NOTE:
• You may customize the system to cause from going back to LOCK (OFF) mode. If Whenever you leave the vehicle, check
the interior buzzer to sound once for this happens, have the vehicle inspected that you have returned the ignition mode to
warning that remote controller is out of by an authorized SUZUKI dealer after LOCK (OFF) using the engine switch and
sensing range. Please contact an autho- doing the following: then lock the doors. Without returning the
rized SUZUKI dealer for the customiza- • Lock the doors using the key to prevent ignition mode to LOCK (OFF), you cannot
tion. theft. (The request switches and the key- use a request switch or keyless push start
• If the battery of the remote controller is less push start system remote controller system remote controller to lock the doors.
about to become completely discharged, cannot be used to lock them.)
the corresponding message will appear • Disconnect the negative cable from the Steering lock warning buzzer
in the information display when you lead-acid battery to prevent discharge. If the steering lock fails to engage due to a
press the engine switch to change the
fault in the system when the ignition mode
ignition mode to ON. For details on
is turned to LOCK (OFF) by pressing the
replacing the battery, refer to “Keyless
engine switch and any door (including the
push start system remote controller /
tailgate) is opened or closed, the interior
keyless entry system transmitter (if
buzzer will warn you of this condition with
equipped)” in “BEFORE DRIVING” sec-
repeated short beeps. If this happens,
tion.
have the vehicle inspected by an autho-
rized SUZUKI dealer.

3-15

57RK0-14E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Starting off
Using transaxle To start off, depress the clutch pedal all the NOTICE
way to the floor and shift into 1st gear.
After releasing the parking brake, gradually Do not downshift to a lower gear at
WARNING release the clutch. When you hear a the speed faster than the maximum
change in the engine’s sound, slowly press allowable speeds for the next lower
Do not hang any items on the gear- the accelerator while continuing to gradu- speed, or severe damage to engine
shift lever and do not use the gear- ally release the clutch. and transaxle can result.
shift lever as a handrest. Otherwise,
it could prevent proper operation of Shifting
the gearshift lever and cause its mal- WARNING
All forward gears are synchronized and
function, resulting in an unexpected provide quiet and easy shifting. Always • Reduce your speed and downshift
accident. depress the clutch pedal all the way to the to a lower gear before going down
floor before shifting gears. Keep the a long or steep hill. A lower gear
Manual transaxle engine speed from rising into the red zone will allow the engine to provide
of the tachometer. braking. Avoid riding the brakes or
they may overheat, resulting in
Downshifting maximum allowable brake failure.
speeds • When driving on slippery roads,
slow down before downshifting.
Downshifting km/h (mph) Excessive and/or sudden changes
2nd to 1st 20 (12) in engine speed may cause loss of
traction, which could cause you to
3rd to 2nd 80 (50) lose control.
4th to 3rd 130 (81)
5th to 4th 175 (109)* NOTICE
Check that the vehicle is completely
EXAMPLE *NOTE: stationary before you shift into
You may not accelerate to the maximum reverse.
79MH0303
allowable speed because of the driving sit-
uation and/or the vehicle condition.

3-16

57RK0-14E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

S (sport) mode switch

NOTICE Continuously Variable Transaxle The sport mode switch (1) is used to turn
(CVT) on and off the sport mode.
• To help avoid clutch damage, do To turn on the sport mode, push in the
not use the clutch pedal as a foot- switch and sport mode indicator (2) in the
rest while driving or use the clutch EXAMPLE
instrument cluster will come on. To turn off
to keep the vehicle stationary on a the sport mode, push in the switch again
slope. Depress the clutch fully and sport mode indicator will go off.
when shifting. (1)
• When shifting or starting off, do not When the engine restarts, the sport mode
race the engine. Racing the engine is turned to the off automatically.
can shorten engine life and cause The sport mode is suitable for the following
negative effect to smooth shifting. driving conditions:
• Driving on hilly, winding roads
– You can drive more smoothly with less
frequent gear changing
• Going down a steep hill
57RK044 – Some engine braking is provided
(1) S (sport) mode switch

(2)

68PM00308

(2) Sport mode indicator

3-17

57RK0-14E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Gearshift lever R (Reverse)

Shift with the knob button (1) Use this position to reverse the vehicle
EXAMPLE pushed in and the brake pedal from stop. Make sure that vehicle is com-
depressed. pletely stationary before shifting into
(1)
Reverse.
Shift with the knob button (1)
pushed in. NOTICE
Do not shift the gearshift lever into
Shift without the knob button (1) “R” while moving forward, or the
pushed in. transaxle may be damaged. If you
shift into “R” when the vehicle speed
is over 10 km/h (6 mph), the transaxle
NOTE: will not shift into reverse.
• Always shift the gearshift lever without
57RK045 pushing in the knob button (1) except N (Neutral)
when you shift from “P” to “R”, from “D” Use this position for starting the engine if
(1) Knob button
to “L”, from “N” to “R” or from “R” to “P”. If the engine stalls and you need to restart it
The gearshift lever is designed so that it you always push in the knob button (1) while the vehicle is moving. You may also
cannot be shifted out of “P” position unless when shifting the gearshift lever, you shift into Neutral and depress the brake
the ignition switch is in “ON” position or the could shift into “P”, “R” or “L” by mistake. pedal to hold the vehicle stationary during
ignition mode is ON and the brake pedal is • If driver’s or passenger’s knee hits the idling.
depressed. gearshift lever while driving, the lever
could move and the gear could be D (Drive)
WARNING changed unexpectedly. Use this position for all normal driving.
Always depress the brake pedal With the gearshift lever in “D” range you
Use the gearshift lever positions as can get an automatic downshift by pressing
before shifting from “P” (Park) (or described below:
“N” (Neutral) if the vehicle is station- the accelerator pedal. The higher the vehi-
ary) to a forward or reverse gear, to cle speed is, the more you need to press
P (Park) the accelerator pedal to get a downshift.
help prevent the vehicle from moving Use this position to lock the transaxle
unexpectedly when you shift. when the vehicle is parked or when start- L (Low)
ing the engine. Shift into Park only when Use this position to provide maximum
The gearshift lever has a lock mechanism the vehicle is completely stationary. power when climbing steep hills or driving
to help prevent accidental shifting. To shift through deep snow or mud, or to provide
the gearshift lever: maximum engine braking when going
down steep hills.

3-18

57RK0-14E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: 1) Be sure the parking brake is firmly

If you move the gearshift lever to a lower If you cannot shift CVT gearshift applied.
gear while driving faster than the maximum lever out of “P” (PARK) 2) If the engine is running, stop the
allowable speed for the lower gear, the engine.
transaxle will not actually downshift until 3) Make sure the key is in “ON” or “ACC”
your speed drops below the maximum position, or the ignition mode is ON or
speed for the lower gear. ACC.
4) With the release button (1) pushed,
NOTICE (2) push the knob button (2) and shift the
gearshift lever to the desired position.
Be sure to take the following precau-
tions to help avoid damage to the (1) This procedure is for emergency use only.
CVT: If repeated use of this procedure is neces-
• Make sure that the vehicle is com- sary, or the procedure does not work as
pletely stationary before shifting described, take your vehicle to an autho-
into “P” or “R”. rized SUZUKI dealer for repair.
• Do not shift from “P” or “N” to “R”, EXAMPLE
“D”, or “L” when the engine is run-
57RK046
ning above idle speed.
• Do not rev the engine with the tran- Vehicles with a CVT have an electrically
saxle in a drive position (“R”, “D”, operated park-lock feature. If the vehicle’s
or “L”) and the front wheels not lead-acid battery is discharged, or there is
moving. some other electrical failure, the CVT can-
• Do not use the accelerator to hold not be shifted out of Park in the normal
the vehicle on a hill. Use the vehi- way. Jump starting may correct the condi-
cle’s brakes. tion. If not, follow the procedure described
below. This procedure will permit shifting
the transaxle out of Park.

3-19

57RK0-14E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

ENG A-STOP system WARNING

(engine auto stop start system) (Continued)
• When the engine does not restart
The ENG A-STOP system (engine auto automatically even if you operate
stop start system) automatically stops and properly, start the engine using the
restarts the engine without operating the ignition switch or engine switch.
ignition switch or the engine switch when – Keep stopping on the road may
the vehicle is stopped, such as at a traffic result in rear collision.
signal or in a traffic jam, to reduce exhaust – In case the vehicle moves, the
gases and fuel consumption. steering and braking operation
will require more efforts.
• When the vehicle will be stopped for a
long time or when you will leave the
vehicle unattended, turn the ignition 72M2042 NOTICE
switch to the “LOCK” position or press Only use the vehicle battery types
the engine switch to stop the engine. WARNING that have been approved by SUZUKI
vehicle manufacture, otherwise you
NOTE: • Do not go out the vehicle when the could damage your vehicle, and the
If your vehicle is equipped with the auto air engine is stopping by the ENG A- ENG A-STOP system could not be
conditioning system, you can change the STOP system. This may result in an available. If a vehicle battery has to
auto engine stop condition via the informa- accident. be replaced, consult your authorized
tion display. Refer to “Information display” – For manual transaxle vehicle, if SUZUKI dealer.
in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section. the driver’s seat belt is unfas-
tened and the driver’s door is
opened, the engine will stall. The ENG A-STOP system is automatically
– For CVT vehicle, if the driver’s activated when the ignition switch is turned
seat belt is unfastened even if the to the “ON” position or the engine switch is
brake pedal is pressed down, or pressed to change the ignition mode to
the driver’s door is opened, the ON.
engine will be restarted to warn
you that the engine was stopped The system activation also requires the fol-
automatically by the ENG A- lowing conditions:
STOP system. • Driver’s seat belt is fastened.
(Continued) • Driver’s door is closed.
• Engine hood is closed.

3-20

57RK0-14E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

For more details, refer to the explanation • Engine coolant temperature is either low
below. EXAMPLE or high.
• Vehicle battery performance is low.
• The temperature of the vehicle battery is
Automatically stopping the engine either low or high.
• Brake booster vacuum pressure is low.
Manual transaxle models • Depressing the accelerator pedal.
1) With the clutch pedal fully depressed, • During or after the ABS or ESP® system
stop the vehicle. is activated, and the vehicle is stopped.
• During the first period use, to initialize
EXAMPLE (1) the system.
• After the engine restarted automatically,
and the vehicle speed had not exceeded
approximately 6 km/h.
57RK104 • When the engine is started with the hood
3) Release the clutch pedal. open.
The ENG A-STOP indicator light (green) • When the vehicle is stopped after back-
(1) in the instrument cluster will illuminate ing up.
and the engine will stop automatically. • The signal to prevent stopping the
engine is received from any electronic
NOTICE control systems other than the ENG A-
STOP system.
The brake booster becomes inoperative
61MM701 and the pedal effort will increase when
2) While depressing the brake and clutch the engine is stopped automatically.
pedal, place the gearshift lever in the If the vehicle is moving, press down
“N” (Neutral) position. the brake pedal harder than usual.

NOTE:
The ENG A-STOP system will not operate
and engine does not stop automatically
under the following conditions:
• The ENG A-STOP OFF switch is
pressed to deactivate the ENG A-STOP
system.
• The ENG A-STOP OFF light blinks.

3-21

57RK0-14E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

CVT models • After the engine restarted automatically,

1) With the gearshift lever in “D” or “N”, NOTICE and the vehicle speed had not exceeded
depress brake pedal and stop the vehi- approximately 5 km/h.
cle. The brake booster becomes inoperative • When the engine is started with the hood
and the pedal effort will increase when open.
the engine is stopped automatically. • The vehicle has stopped on a steep hill.
EXAMPLE If the vehicle is moving, press down • The gearshift lever is in a position other
the brake pedal harder than usual. than “D” or “N”.
• When the vehicle has stopped without
NOTE: depressing the brake pedal.
The ENG A-STOP system will not operate • The signal to prevent stopping the
and engine does not stop automatically engine is received from any electronic
under the following conditions: control systems other than the ENG A-
• The ENG A-STOP OFF switch is STOP system.
61MM453 pressed to deactivate the ENG A-STOP
system.
EXAMPLE • The ENG A-STOP OFF light blinks.
• Engine coolant temperature is either low
or high.
• Vehicle battery performance is low.
• The temperature of the vehicle battery is
either low or high.
• Brake booster vacuum pressure is low.
• Depressing the accelerator pedal.
• Blower speed selector is set to the ON
mode and the inside of the vehicle has
not sufficiently cooled and warmed (for
the vehicle with automatic air condition-
(1) ing).
57RK105 • The defrost switch is set to the ON mode
2) The ENG A-STOP indicator light (green) (for the vehicle with automatic air condi-
(1) in the instrument cluster will illuminate tioning).
and the engine will stop automatically. • During or after the ABS or ESP® system
is activated, and the vehicle is stopped.
• During the first period use, to initialize
the system.

3-22

57RK0-14E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

• Electric power consumption is high, such

Automatically restarting the engine NOTICE as when the electrical components
(audio, air conditioning etc.) are operat-
Manual transaxle models The ENG A-STOP system will not ing.
operate and engine does not restart • The ENG A-STOP OFF switch is
EXAMPLE automatically or the engine stalls
pressed to deactivate the ENG A-STOP
with warning buzzer under the follow-
ing conditions: system.
• Driver’s seat belt is not fastened NOTE:
and driver’s door is open. When the engine restarts, the sound of the
• Engine hood is open.
audio may be interrupted.
• If the gearshift lever is moved to a
position other than the “N” (Neu- This is normal and not the malfunction of
tral) position without depressing the audio system.
(1) the clutch pedal.
When the engine stalls, restart the
engine by usual operation.
Refer to “Starting the Engine” in this
section for details.
57RK106

Depress the clutch pedal while the gear- NOTE:

shift lever is in the “N” (Neutral) position. If the engine stalled by a rapid clutch oper-
The ENG A-STOP indicator light (green) ation, the engine will restart with the gear
(1) in the instrument cluster will be turned positioned “N” (neutral) and the clutch
off and the engine will restart automatically. pedal depressed.

NOTE:
Under the following conditions, the engine
will restart automatically even if the engine
was stopped by the ENG A-STOP system:
• When the vehicle coasts down a slope.
• An engine stopped, and a few minutes
passed.
• Brake booster vacuum pressure is low.
• Vehicle battery performance is low.

3-23

57RK0-14E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

CVT models NOTE: NOTE:

Under the following conditions, the engine When the engine restarts, the sound of the
EXAMPLE will restart automatically even if the engine audio may be interrupted.
was stopped by the ENG A-STOP system: This is normal and not the malfunction of
• When the vehicle coasts down a slope. the audio system.
• An engine stopped, and a few minutes
passed.
• Brake booster vacuum pressure is low.
• Vehicle battery performance is low.
• Blower speed selector is set to the ON
mode and the inside of the vehicle has
(1) not sufficiently cooled and warmed (for
the vehicle with automatic air condition-
ing).
• The defrost switch is set to the ON mode
57RK107 (for the vehicle with automatic air condi-
Release the brake pedal. tioning).
The ENG A-STOP indicator light (green) • Electric power consumption is high, such
(1) in the instrument cluster will be turned as when the heated rear window switch
off and the engine will restart automatically. (if equipped) is ON or other electrical
components (audio, air conditioning etc.)
NOTICE are operating.
• The ENG A-STOP OFF switch is
The ENG A-STOP system will not pressed to deactivate the ENG A-STOP
operate and engine does not restart system.
automatically or the engine stalls • The accelerator pedal is depressed.
with warning buzzer under the follow- • The gearshift lever is shifted into “P”, “R”
ing condition: or “L”.
• Engine hood is open. • After the gearshift lever is shifted to “N”,
When the engine stalls, restart the it is returned to “D”.
engine by usual operation. • When the driver’s seat belt is unfas-
Refer to “Starting the Engine” in this tened.
section for details.
• When the driver’s door is opened.

3-24

57RK0-14E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

To deactivate the ENG A-STOP sys- Cruise control (if equipped) Setting cruising speed
tem Cruise control switch
The cruise control system allows you to
maintain a steady speed without keeping EXAMPLE
your foot on the accelerator pedal. The (3)
controls for operating the cruise control
system are on the steering wheel. (2)
(1)
You can use the cruise control system
under the following conditions:
• The gearshift lever is in “D” position.
• The vehicle speed is about 40 km/h (25
52RM229 mph) or higher.
Push the ENG A-STOP OFF switch. The
ENG A-STOP OFF light will come on. WARNING
To help avoid loss of vehicle control, 57RK047
do not use the cruise control system
ENG A-STOP OFF light when driving in heavy traffic, on slip- (1) Cruise switch
If the ENG A-STOP OFF light blinks when pery or winding roads, or on steep (2) “CANCEL” switch
driving, there may be something wrong downhills. (3) “RES +/SET –” switch
with the ENG A-STOP system. You should
have the system inspected by an autho- Instrument cluster
rized SUZUKI dealer. For details, refer to EXAMPLE
“Warning and indicator lights” in the
“BEFORE DRIVING” section.

(4) (5)

57RK048

(4) Cruise indicator

(5) “SET” indicator

3-25

57RK0-14E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

1) Turn on the cruise control system by NOTE:

pushing cruise switch (1). When the Changing speed temporarily When the brake pedal is depressed, “SET”
cruise indicator light (4) comes on, you When the cruising speed is maintained, you indicator light (5) will go off until you reset
can set cruising speed. can temporarily accelerate or decelerate. the cruising speed.
2) Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed. To accelerate, depress the accelerator Using “RES +/SET –” switch
3) Push down the “RES +/SET –” switch pedal. When you take your foot off the pedal, To reset at a faster cruising speed, press
(3), “SET” indicator light (5) comes on. your vehicle will return to the set speed. repeatedly or hold push up the “RES +/
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal To decelerate, depress the brake pedal. SET –” switch (3). Vehicle speed will
and the set speed will be maintained. The set speed will be canceled and “SET” steadily increase. When you release the
indicator light (5) will go off. switch, the new speed will be maintained.
WARNING To resume the previously set speed, push To reset at a slower cruising speed, press
If the cruising speed is set by acci- up the “RES +/SET –” switch (3) and turn repeatedly or hold push down the “RES +/
dent, you cannot decelerate or could on “SET” indicator light (5) again when SET –” switch (3) until the vehicle has
loose control of the vehicle. This vehicle speed is above 40 km/h (25 mph). slowed to the desired speed, and then
could lead to an accident, resulting in The vehicle will accelerate to the previ- release the switch. The new speed will be
severe injury or death. ously set speed and maintain its speed. maintained.
Turn off the cruise control system NOTE:
and check that cruise indicator light Changing cruising speed You can adjust the set speed by approxi-
(4) is off when the system is not in mately 1 km/h (1 mph) by pushing “RES +/
use. Using the accelerator pedal SET –” switch quickly.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, acceler-
ate to the desired speed using the accelera-
tor pedal and push down the “RES +/SET –”
switch (3). The new speed will be main-
tained.

Using the brake pedal

To reset at a slower cruising speed, decel-
erate to the desired speed using the brake
pedal and push down the “RES +/SET –”
switch (3). The new speed will be main-
tained.

3-26

57RK0-14E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Cancelling cruise control Braking WARNING

“SET” indicator light (5) will go off and the If water gets into the brake devices,
cruise control will be canceled temporarily brake performance may become poor
with the following conditions: and unpredictable. After driving
• Push “CANCEL” switch (2). through water or washing the under-
• Depress the brake pedal. side of the vehicle, test the brakes
• The gear position is changed to “L” while driving at a slow speed to see if
• The vehicle speed falls more than about they have maintained their normal
20 percent from the set speed. effectiveness. If the brakes are less
• Any time the vehicle speed falls below effective than normal, dry them by
40 km/h (25 mph). repeatedly applying the brakes while
• When the vehicle skids and ESP® is driving slowly until the brakes have
activated. regained their normal effectiveness.
To resume the previously set speed, push
up the “RES +/SET –” switch (3) and turn Power-assisted brakes
on “SET” indicator light (5). The vehicle 60G165S
speed must be above 40 km/h (25 mph) The distance needed to bring any vehicle Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes. If
when the vehicle is not under the above to a halt increases with the speed of the power assistance is lost due to a stalled
conditions. vehicle. The braking distance needed, for engine or other failures, the system is still
example, at 60 km/h (37 mph) will be fully operational on reserve power and you
To turn off the cruise control system, push approximately 4 times greater than the can bring the vehicle to a complete stop by
cruise switch (1) and check that the cruise braking distance needed at 30 km/h (19 pressing the brake pedal once and holding
indicator light (4) is off. mph). Start to depress the brake pedal it down. The reserve power is partly used
when there is plenty of distance between up when you depress the brake pedal and
Also, if the malfunction indicator light in the your vehicle and the stopping point, and reduces each time the pedal is pressed.
instrument cluster comes on or blinks, the slow down gradually. Apply smooth and even pressure to the
cruise control system will be turned off. pedal. Do not pump the pedal.

NOTE:
If you turn off the cruise control system, the
previously set speed in the memory is
cleared. Reset your cruising speed again.

3-27

57RK0-14E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

it senses that the wheels are locking up.

WARNING You may feel the brake pedal move a little WARNING
while the ABS is operating.
Even without reserve power in the (Continued)
brake system, you can still stop the NOTE: • On regular paved roads, some driv-
vehicle by pressing the brake pedal • The ABS will not work if vehicle speed is ers may be able to obtain slightly
harder than normally required. How- under about 9 km/h (6 mph). shorter stopping distances with
ever, the stopping distance may be • If the ABS system is activated, you may conventional brake systems than
longer. hear a clunking noise and/or feel pulsat- with ABS.
ing in the brake pedal. This is normal • In both of the above conditions,
and indicates that the brake fluid pres- ABS will still offer the advantage of
Brake assist system sure is being controlled properly. helping you maintain directional
When you slam the brakes on, the brake • You may hear an operation sound when control. However, remember that
assist system determines it to be an emer- you start the engine or after the vehicle ABS will not compensate for bad
gency stop and provides more powerful begins to move. This means that the road or weather conditions or poor
braking for a driver who cannot hold down above systems are in the self-check driver judgment. Use good judg-
the brake pedal firmly. mode. This sound does not indicate a ment and do not drive too fast.
malfunction.
NOTE:
If you quickly and forcefully depress the WARNING
brakes, you may hear a clicking sound in • On some types of loose surfaces
the brake pedal. This is normal and indi- (such as gravel, snow-covered
cates that the brake assist system is acti- roads, etc.), the stopping distance
vated properly. required for a vehicle with ABS
may be slightly greater than the
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) one required for a comparable vehi-
cle with a conventional brake sys- (1) (2)
ABS will help you avoid skidding by elec- tem. With a conventional brake
tronically controlling braking pressure. It system, skidding tires are able to
will also help you maintain steering control plow the gravel or snow layer,
when braking on slippery surfaces or when shortening the stopping distance.
braking hard. ABS minimizes this resistance 54MN069
The ABS works automatically, so you do effect. Allow for extra stopping dis-
not need any special braking technique. (1) ABS warning light
tance when driving on loose sur-
Just push the brake pedal down without (2) Brake system warning light
faces.
pumping. The ABS will operate whenever (Continued)

3-28

57RK0-14E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING How ABS works Electronic stability program

• If the ABS warning light (1) on the A computer continuously monitors wheel (ESP®)
instrument cluster comes on and speed. The computer compares the
stays on while driving, there may changes in wheel speed when braking. If ESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler
be a problem with the ABS system. the wheels slow suddenly, indicating a AG.
Ask an authorized SUZUKI dealer skidding situation, the computer will
to inspect the ABS system immedi- change braking pressure several times
ately. If the ABS system becomes each second to prevent the wheels from The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®)
inoperative, the brake system will locking. When you start your vehicle or helps to control the vehicle during corner-
function as an ordinary brake sys- when you accelerate after a hard stop, you ing if front wheels or rear wheels skid. It
tem that has no ABS. may hear a momentary motor or clicking also assists you in maintaining traction
• If the ABS warning light (1) and the noise as the system resets or checks itself. while accelerating on loose or slippery
brake system warning light (2) on road surfaces. It does this by regulating
the instrument cluster simultane- WARNING the engine’s output, and by selectively
ously stay on or come on while The ABS may not work properly if applying the brakes. In addition, ESP®
driving, both anti-lock function and tires or wheels other than those helps to avoid skidding by controlling brak-
rear brake force control function specified in the owner’s manual are ing pressure.
(proportioning valve function) of used. This is because the ABS works
the ABS system may have failed. If by comparing changes in wheel WARNING
so, the rear wheels may easily skid speed. When replacing tires or The ESP® cannot enhance the vehi-
or the vehicle can even spin in the wheels, use only the size and type cle’s driving stability in all situations
worst case when braking on a slip- specified in this owner’s manual. and does not control your vehicle’s
pery road or when hard braking entire braking system. The ESP® can-
even on a dry paved road. Ask an not prevent accidents, including
authorized SUZUKI dealer to those resulting from excessive speed
inspect the ABS system immedi- in turns, or hydroplaning. Only safe
ately. Drive carefully, avoiding hard and attentive drive can prevent acci-
braking as much as possible. dents. The capabilities of an ESP®-
equipped vehicle must never be used
as a substitute for careful driving.

3-29

57RK0-14E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

The ESP® has the following three sys-

tems: Anti-lock brake system (ABS) WARNING
ABS will help you avoid skidding by elec- (Continued)
tronically controlling braking pressure. It • The ESP® may not work properly if
Stability control system will also help you maintain steering control the tires are excessively worn.
The vehicle stability control system helps when braking on slippery surfaces or when Replace tires when the tread wear
provide integrated control of systems such braking hard. The ABS works automati- indicators in the grooves appear on
as anti-lock brakes, traction control, engine cally, so you do not have to use any spe- the tread surface.
control, etc. This system automatically cial braking technique. Just push the brake • The ESP® is not a substitute for
controls the brakes and engine to help pre- pedal down without pumping. The ABS will winter tires or tire chains on a
vent the vehicle from skidding when cor- operate whenever it senses that wheels snow-covered road.
nering on a slippery road surface or when are locking up. You may feel the brake
turning the steering wheel abruptly. pedal pulsate while the ABS is operating.
(For more information on ABS, see “Brak- WARNING
ing” in this section.)
Traction control system • The ESP® may not work properly if
The traction control system automatically NOTE: engine related parts such as the
helps prevent the spinning of wheels when The ABS will not work if vehicle speed is muffler are not equivalent to stan-
the vehicle is started or accelerated on under about 9 km/h (6 mph). dard equipment or are extremely
slippery road surfaces. The system oper- deteriorated.
ates only if it senses that some of the WARNING • Do not modify the vehicle’s sus-
wheels are spinning or beginning to lose pension since the ESP® may not
• The ESP® may not work properly if work properly.
traction. When this happens, the system tires or wheels other than those
operates the front or rear brakes and specified in the owner’s manual are
reduces engine power to limit wheel spin. NOTE:
used. When replacing tires or • If the ESP® system is activated, you may
wheels, use only the size and type hear a clunking noise and/or feel pulsat-
NOTE: specified in this owner’s manual.
You may hear an operation sound when ing in the brake pedal. This is normal
• The ESP® may not work properly if and indicates that the brake fluid pres-
you start the engine or after the vehicle tires are not inflated to the recom-
begins to move. This means that the sure is being controlled properly.
mended tire inflation pressure. • You may hear an operation sound when
above systems are in the self-check mode. • The ESP® may not work properly if
This sound does not indicate a malfunc- you start the engine or after the vehicle
tires are fitted with tire chains. begins to move. This means that the
tion. (Continued) above systems are in the self-check
mode. This sound does not indicate a
malfunction.

3-30

57RK0-14E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

The ESP® indicator lights are described NOTE:

below: When the ESP® warning light comes on ESP® OFF switch
and stays on while driving, indicating a
malfunction of the ESP® systems (other
ESP® warning light than ABS), the brake system will function
as an ordinary ABS with no additional
ESP® functions.

ESP® OFF indicator light

52KM133

This light blinks 5 times per second when (1)

one of the following systems is activated.
• Stability control system 75RM055
• Traction control system
If this light blinks, drive carefully. 57L30045 (1) ESP® OFF switch
You should turn the ESP® on during your When the ESP® OFF switch located at the
When the ignition switch is turned to “ON” ordinary driving, so that you have the ben- instrument panel is pushed and held to
position, or the engine switch is pressed to efits of all of the ESP® systems. turn off the ESP® systems (other than
change the ignition mode to ON, this light ABS), the ESP® OFF indicator light in the
comes on briefly so you can check that the It may be required to turn the ESP® sys-
tems (other than ABS) off if your vehicle is instrument cluster comes on.
light is working. When you have turned the ESP® systems
stuck in sand, mud, or snow, where wheel
spin is necessary. (other than ABS) off, turn them back on
NOTICE before resuming ordinary driving.
If the ESP® warning light comes on When you push the ESP® OFF switch
and stays on while driving, there may again, the ESP® OFF indicator light will go
be a malfunction of the ESP® sys- out and all of the ESP® systems will be
tems (other than ABS). You should activated.
have the systems inspected by an
authorized SUZUKI dealer.

3-31

57RK0-14E
 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

ABS warning light / brake system WARNING

warning light
(Continued)
See “Braking” in this section. • After you release your foot from the
brake pedal, accelerate the vehicle
Hill hold control system to move up immediately. If you
(if equipped) release your foot from the brake
pedal over 2 seconds, the hill hold
The hill hold control system is designed to control system will be canceled. If
assist you in starting to move up hills. so, the vehicle may roll downward,
When you start to move up a hill, the sys- which can result in an accident
52RS30040 tem helps to prevent the vehicle from roll- depending on the degree of slope.
If the message shown in the above illustra- ing downward (for approximately 2 And, the engine may stall and the
tion appears on the information display, seconds) while you move your foot from power assist for the steering and
there may be a problem with the ESP® the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. brakes will not work so steering
system. Have your vehicle inspected by an and braking will be much harder
authorized SUZUKI dealer. WARNING than usual which can result in an
• Do not rely excessively on the hill accident or vehicle damage.
NOTE: hold control system. The hill hold
The ESP® system will not activate while control system may not prevent the The hill hold control system activates for a
this message is displayed. vehicle from rolling downward on a maximum of about 2 seconds if your foot is
hill under all load or road condi- moved from the brake pedal when the fol-
tions. Always be prepared to lowing conditions are all met.
depress the brake pedal to prevent 1) The gearshift lever is in a forward gear
the vehicle from rolling downward. or reverse gear.
Failure to pay attention and 2) The parking brake is released.
depress the brake pedal to hold the 3) The vehicle is on an upward incline.
vehicle on a hill when necessary,
may result in loss of control or an On models equipped with the ENG A-
accident. STOP system, the hill hold control system
• The hill hold control system is not is activated when the engine is restarted
designed to stop the vehicle on a after being stopped automatically, even if
hill. the previous conditions are not met.
(Continued)

3-32

57RK0-14E
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
When the hill hold control system is acti-
vated, the following conditions may be
found, but this is not a malfunction.
• You may hear a sound from the engine
room.
• As brake pedal becomes heavy, it may
be difficult for you to depress it.

52RS30050

If the message shown in the above illustra-

tion appears on the information display,
there may be a problem with the hill hold
control system. Have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI
dealer.

NOTE:
The hill hold control system will not acti-
vate while this message is displayed.

3-33

57RK0-14E
 DRIVING TIPS

DRIVING TIPS
Running-in ........................................................................... 4-1
Catalytic converter .............................................................. 4-1
Improving fuel economy ..................................................... 4-2
Highway driving .................................................................. 4-3
Driving on hills .................................................................... 4-3
Driving on slippery roads ................................................... 4-4 4
Off-road driving ................................................................... 4-6

60G409

57RK0-14E
DRIVING TIPS

Running-in Catalytic converter

NOTICE
The future performance and reliabil-
ity of the engine depends on the care
52D078 and restraint exercised during its
early life. It is especially important to
WARNING observe the following precautions
during the first 960 km (600 miles) of
• Fasten your seat belts at all times. vehicle operation.
Even though air bags are equipped • After starting, do not race the
at the front seating positions, the engine. Warm it up gradually.
driver and all passengers should • Avoid prolonged vehicle operation
be properly restrained at all times, at a constant speed. Moving parts
using the seat belts provided. Refer will break in better if you vary your
to “Seat belts and child restraint speed.
80G106

systems” section for instructions • Start off from a stop slowly. Avoid The purpose of the catalytic converter is to
on proper use of the seat belts. full throttle starts. minimize the amount of harmful pollutants
• Never drive under the influence of • Avoid hard braking, especially in your vehicle’s exhaust. Use of leaded
alcohol or other drugs. Alcohol and during the first 320 km (200 miles) fuel in vehicles equipped with catalytic
drugs can seriously impair your of driving. converters is prohibited, because lead
ability to drive safely, greatly • Do not drive slowly with the trans- deactivates the pollutant-reducing compo-
increasing the risk of injury to axle in a high gear. nents of the catalyst system.
yourself and others. You should • Drive the vehicle at moderate
also avoid driving when you are The converter is designed to last the life of
engine speeds. the vehicle under normal usage and when
tired, sick, irritated or under stress. • Do not tow a trailer during the first unleaded fuel is used. No special mainte-
960 km (600 miles) of vehicle oper- nance is required on the converter. How-
ation. ever, it is very important to keep the engine
properly tuned. Engine misfiring, which can
result from an improperly tuned engine,
may cause overheating of the catalytic
converter. This may result in permanent

4-1

57RK0-14E
 DRIVING TIPS

heat damage to the catalytic converter and

other vehicle components. Improving fuel economy
NOTICE The following instructions will help you
improve fuel economy.
To minimize the possibility of cata-
lytic converter or other vehicle dam- Avoid excessive idling
age: If you park your vehicle for more than one
• Maintain the engine in the proper minute, stop the engine and start it again
operating condition. later. When warming up a cold engine, do
• In the event of an engine malfunc- not allow the engine to idle or apply full
tion, particularly one involving throttle until the engine has reached oper-
engine misfire or other apparent ating temperature. Allow the engine to
loss of performance, have the vehi- warm up by driving.
cle serviced promptly. 54G584S Avoid fast starts
• Do not turn off the engine or inter- Fast starts away from lights or stop signs
rupt the ignition when the transaxle will consume fuel unnecessarily and
is in gear and the vehicle is in WARNING
shorten engine life. Start off slowly.
motion. Be careful where you park and drive;
• Do not try to start the engine by the catalytic converter and other Avoid unnecessary stops
pushing or towing the vehicle, or exhaust components can get very Avoid unnecessary deceleration and stop-
coasting down a hill. hot. As with any vehicle, do not park ping. Try to maintain a moderate, steady
• Do not idle the engine with any or operate this vehicle in areas where speed whenever possible. Slowing down
spark plug wires disconnected or combustible materials such as dry and then accelerating again uses more
removed, such as during diagnos- grass or leaves can come in contact fuel.
tic testing. with a hot exhaust system. Keep a steady cruising speed
• Do not idle the vehicle for pro-
Drive at a constant speed that road and
longed periods if idling seems
traffic conditions will permit.
rough or there are other malfunc-
tions.
• Do not allow the fuel tank to get
near the empty level.

4-2

57RK0-14E
DRIVING TIPS

Keep the air cleaner clean

Highway driving Driving on hills
EXAMPLE
When driving at highway speeds, pay Manual transaxle
attention to the following:
• Stopping distance progressively
increases with vehicle speed. Apply the
brakes far enough ahead of the stopping
point to allow for the extra stopping dis-
tance.
• On rainy days, hydroplaning can occur.
Hydroplaning is the loss of direct contact 68PM00401
between the road surface and the vehi-
cle’s tires due to a water film forming CVT
60A183
between them. Steering or braking the
vehicle during hydroplaning can be very
If the air cleaner is clogged with dust, there difficult, and loss of control can occur.
will be greater intake resistance, resulting Keep speed down when the road sur-
in decreased power output and increased face is wet.
fuel consumption. • At high speeds, the vehicle may be
Keep weight to a minimum affected by side winds. Therefore,
The heavier the load is, the more fuel the reduce speed and be prepared for unex- 57RK049
vehicle consumes. Unload any unneces- pected buffeting, which can occur at the
exits of tunnels, when passing by a cut • When driving on steep hills, the vehicle
sary luggage or cargo. may begin to slow down and show a lack
of a hill, or when being overtaken by
Keep tire pressures correct large vehicles, etc. of power. If this happens, you should
Under-inflation of the tires can waste fuel shift to a lower gear so that the engine
due to increased rolling resistance of the will again be operating in its higher
tires. Keep your tires inflated to the correct power range. Shift rapidly to prevent the
pressure shown in the label on driver’s vehicle from losing momentum.
door lock pillar. • When driving down a hill, the engine
should be used for braking by shifting to
the next lower gear.

4-3

57RK0-14E
 DRIVING TIPS

WARNING Driving on slippery roads Tire chains

Do not hold the brake pedal down too Tire chains should only be used if they are
long or too often while going down a needed to increase traction or are required
steep or long hill. This could cause by law. Check that the chains you use are
the brakes to overheat, resulting in the correct size for your vehicle’s tires.
reduced braking efficiency. Failure to Also check that there is enough clearance
take this precaution could result in between the fenders and the chains as
loss of vehicle control. installed on the tires.
Install the chains on the front tires tightly,
according to the chain manufacturer’s
NOTICE instructions. Retighten the chains after
When descending a downhill, Never driving about 1.0 km (1/2 mile) if neces-
turn the ignition key to “LOCK” posi- sary. With the chains installed, drive slowly.
tion or press the engine switch to
change the ignition mode to LOCK NOTICE
(OFF). Emission control system and 60G089S • If you hear the chains hitting
CVT (if equipped) damage may result. On wet roads, you should drive at a lower against the vehicle body while driv-
speed than you do on dry roads due to ing, stop and tighten them.
possible slippage of tires during braking. • If your vehicle is equipped with full
When driving on icy, snow-covered or wheel caps, remove the wheel caps
muddy roads, reduce your speed and before installing the chains or the
avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt braking, wheel caps can be damaged by the
or sharp steering movements. chain bands.

4-4

57RK0-14E
DRIVING TIPS

2) If your vehicle remains stuck after a few

Stuck vehicle minutes of rocking, we recommend you
If your vehicle gets stuck in snow, mud or to consult an authorized SUZUKI dealer
sand, follow the directions below: or a roadside assistance service. If a
towing service is not available in an
1) Shift the transaxle back and forth emergency, your vehicle may be tem-
between a “D” (drive) (or first gear for porarily towed by other vehicle with a
manual transaxle) and reverse. This will towing cable or chain secured to the
create a rocking motion which may give towing hook either on the front of the
you enough momentum to free the vehicle or on the rear of the vehicle.
vehicle. Press gently on the accelerator Refer to “Frame hooks” in “OTHER
to keep wheel spinning to a minimum CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT” sec-
wheel rpm. Remove your foot from the tion.
accelerator while shifting.
Do not excessively rev up the engine. WARNING 54G638
Excessive wheel spin will cause the
tires to dig deeper, making it more diffi- Do not allow anyone to stand near
cult to free the vehicle. the vehicle when you are rocking it, WARNING
and do not spin the wheels faster In addition to following the driving
NOTE: than an indicated 40 km/h (25 mph) tips in this section, it is important to
You may have to turn the ESP® system off on the speedometer. Personal injury observe the following precautions.
in order to allow spinning the wheels. and/or vehicle damage may result • Check that your tires are in good
from spinning the wheels too fast. condition and always maintain the
specified tire pressure. Refer to
NOTICE “Tires” in “INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE” section for
Do not continue rocking the vehicle details.
for more than a few minutes. Pro- (Continued)
longed rocking can cause engine
overheating or transaxle damage.

4-5

57RK0-14E
 DRIVING TIPS

WARNING Off-road driving

(Continued)
• Do not use tires other than those Do not drive in the field covered
specified by SUZUKI. Never use dif- with grown grass
ferent sizes or types of tires on the
front and rear wheels. For informa- If you drive in the field covered with grass,
tion regarding the specified tires, it may cause unexpected accident or vehi-
refer to the tire information label cle damage by getting caught in grown
located on the driver’s door lock grass.
pillar.
• Never use oversized tires or spe-
cial shock absorbers and springs
to raise (jack up) your vehicle. This
will change the handling character-
istics. Oversized tires may also rub
against the fender over bumps,
causing vehicle damage or tire fail-
ure.
• After driving through water, test the
brakes while driving at a slow
speed to see if they have main-
tained their normal effectiveness. If
the brakes are less effective than
normal, dry them by repeatedly
applying the brakes while driving
slowly until the brakes have
regained their normal effective-
ness.

4-6

57RK0-14E
DRIVING TIPS

MEMO

4-7

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Fuel filler cap ....................................................................... 5-1
Engine hood ........................................................................ 5-2
Sun visor .............................................................................. 5-4
Interior light ......................................................................... 5-5
Accessory socket ................................................................ 5-6
AUX/USB socket (if equipped) ........................................... 5-7
Assist grips (if equipped) ................................................... 5-7
Glove box ............................................................................. 5-7 5
Cup holder and storage area ............................................. 5-8
Footrest ................................................................................ 5-9
Floor mats (if equipped) ..................................................... 5-10
Luggage compartment hook .............................................. 5-10
Luggage compartment cover (if equipped) ...................... 5-11
Luggage compartment carpet ............................................ 5-11
Frame hooks ........................................................................ 5-11
Heating and air conditioning system ................................ 5-14
60G407
Manual heating and air conditioning system ................... 5-15
Automatic heating and air conditioning system
(climate control) .................................................................. 5-20
Radio antenna ..................................................................... 5-26
Audio system (Type A / Type B) (if equipped) .................. 5-27

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

A fuel filler cap is located on the left rear

Fuel filler cap side of the vehicle. The fuel filler door can (3) EXAMPLE
be unlocked by pulling up the opener lever
located on the outboard lower side of the
EXAMPLE driver’s seat and locked by simply closing (1) (1)
the door.
(2)

Open Close

57RK108

NOTE:
The cap holder (1) holds the fuel filler cap
57RK088
(2) by hooking the groove (3) when refuel-
EXAMPLE ing.
EXAMPLE 57L51093
To reinstall the fuel filler cap:
To remove the fuel filler cap: 1) Turn the cap clockwise until you hear
1) Stop the engine and close all the doors several clicks.
and windows while refueling. 2) Close the fuel filler door.
2) Open the fuel filler door.
3) Remove the cap by turning it counter- WARNING
clockwise.
Fuel is extremely flammable. Do not
smoke when refueling, and check
CAUTION that there are no open flames or
Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The sparks in the area.
fuel may be under pressure and may
spray out, causing injury.

57RK050

5-1

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

WARNING Engine hood EXAMPLE

If you need to replace the fuel cap,
use a genuine SUZUKI cap. Use of an
improper cap can result in a malfunc- EXAMPLE
tion of the fuel system or emission
control system. It may also result in
fuel leakage while driving and in the
event of an accident.

57RK052

2) Push the under-hood release lever

sideways with your finger, as shown in
57RK051
the illustration. While pushing the lever,
To open the engine hood: lift up the engine hood.
1) Pull the hood release handle located
under the driver’s side instrument panel CAUTION
in the outboard position. This will disen-
gage the engine hood lock halfway. The release lever and its peripheral,
or engine food can be hot enough to
burn your finger right after driving.
Touch after those becomes cool
enough.

NOTICE
Check that the wiper arms are not
raised before you lift up the engine
hood to avoid damaging the wiper
arms and the engine hood.

5-2

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

To close the engine hood:

EXAMPLE 1) Lift the hood up slightly and remove the CAUTION
prop rod from the hole. Put the prop rod
back into the holding clip. To avoid injury, check that no part of
the occupant’s body such as hands
or head is in the path of the hood
EXAMPLE when closing it.

NOTICE
Pushing on the hood from the top
may damage it.

57RK053

3) While holding the hood, pull the prop

rod out from the holding clip, and then
insert the end of the rod into the desig- 57RK054
nated hole. 2) Lower the hood to about 20 cm above
the hood latch, and then let it drop
CAUTION down. Check that the hood is securely
latched after closing.
• The prop rod can be hot enough to
burn your finger right after driving.
Touch the rod after it becomes cool WARNING
enough. Check that the hood is fully closed
• Insert the end of the rod into the and latched before driving. If it is not,
hole securely. If the rod slips out, it can fly up unexpectedly during
you may get caught in the closing driving, obstructing your view and
hood. resulting in an accident.
• The rod may slip out when the
hood is blown by wind. Be careful
on windy days.

5-3

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Card holder (if equipped) Vanity mirror (if equipped)

Sun visor
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
(1)

(2) (3)

57RK055 57RK056

(1) Mirror cover (3) Vanity mirror

79J161 (2) Card holder
To use the vanity mirror (3) on the back of
The sun visors can be pulled down to block
You can put a card in the card holder (2) on the sun visor, pull up the mirror cover (1).
glare coming through the windshield, or
the back of the sun visor.
they can be unhooked and turned to the
side to block glare coming through the side WARNING
window. NOTICE • Do not use the mirror while driving
When you park your vehicle outdoors your vehicle or you lose control of
NOTICE in direct sunlight or in hot weather, the vehicle.
do not leave plastic cards in the • When using the vanity mirror, do
When unhooking and hooking a sun
holder. The heat may distort them. not move too close to a front air
visor, handle it by the hard plastic
bag location or lean against it. If
parts or the sun visor can be dam-
the front air bag is accidentally
aged.
inflated, it could hit you hard.

5-4

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

• The hazard warning lights, the position

Interior light lights and the headlights are off. Luggage compartment
• After 15 minutes from the light on. (if equipped)
DOOR (2)
Front The light comes on when the door is EXAMPLE
opened. After closing all doors, the light
will remain on for about 15 seconds and (1) (2)
EXAMPLE
then fade out. If you insert the key, or press
the engine switch to change the ignition
mode to ACC or ON during this time, the
light will start to fade out immediately. After
removing the key from the ignition switch
or press the engine switch to change the
ignition mode to LOCK (OFF), the light will
turn on for about 15 seconds and then fade
(3) (2) (1) out.
68PM00510
NOTE:
The light will automatically be turned off to When you open the tailgate with the lug-
52RM50070 prevent the lead-acid battery from dis- gage compartment light switch in ON posi-
This light switch has three positions which charging when the following conditions are tion (1), the light comes on for about 15
function as described below: simultaneously met: minutes.
• The ignition switch is in “LOCK” position, When the luggage compartment light
ON (1) or the ignition mode is LOCK (OFF). switch is in OFF position (2), the light
The light comes on and stays on regard- • After about 15 minutes of the light on. remains off regardless of whether the tail-
less of whether the door is open or closed. gate is open or close.
OFF (3)
NOTE: The light remains off even when the door is
The light will automatically be turned off to opened. NOTICE
prevent the lead-acid battery from dis- Do not leave the tailgate open with
charging when the following conditions are the luggage compartment light
simultaneously met: switch in ON position for a long time,
• The ignition switch is in “LOCK” position, or the lead-acid battery will dis-
or the ignition mode is LOCK (OFF). charge.

5-5

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

NOTE:
The light will automatically be turned off to Accessory socket NOTICE
prevent the lead-acid battery from dis-
charging when after 15 minutes of the tail- Center console • Use of inappropriate electrical
gate open. accessories can cause damage to
EXAMPLE your vehicle’s electrical system.
Check that any electrical accesso-
EXAMPLE ries you use are designed to plug
into this type of socket.
• When the ignition switch is in
“LOCK” position or the ignition
mode is LOCK (OFF) during using
the accessory socket, the following
accidents may occur;
– the audio or navigation system
does not turn off.
– the keyless entry system does
not work, etc.
57RK057 If they occur, disconnect the item
The accessory socket will work when the from the accessory socket and
52RM50080 ignition switch is in “ACC” or “ON” position, check whether the electrical equip-
NOTE: or the ignition mode is ACC or ON. ments work properly.
The number of doors involved in the light- This socket can be used to provide 12 volt/ If the problem persists, ask an
ing operation of the interior light depends 120 watt/10 ampere power for electrical authorized SUZUKI dealer to have
on the vehicle specification. If there is a accessories. Check that the rubber cap the system inspected.
switch (rubber protrusion) at the door remains on the socket when the socket is
opening as shown, the door is involved in not in use.
the lighting operation. The tailgate is also
involved in this operation even without the
rubber protrusion.

5-6

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

AUX/USB socket (if equipped) Assist grips (if equipped) Glove box

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE

57RK058 54G249 57RK059

Connect your portable digital music player, Assist grips are provided for convenience. To open the glove box, pull the latch lever.
etc. to this socket to enjoy music through To close it, push the lid until it latches
the vehicle’s audio system. Refer to “Audio NOTICE securely.
system (if equipped)” in this section.
To avoid damaging the assist grip
and the molded headlining, do not
WARNING
NOTICE hang down the assist grip. Never drive with the glove box lid
Always close the rubber cap when open. It could cause injury if an acci-
not in use, since entry of foreign dent occurs.
material, dust, water, conductive liq-
uids may damage the audio system
or USB device.

5-7

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Cup holder and storage area Center console tray (1)

WARNING
EXAMPLE
Do not place any objects which may
(4) fall out from the tray when the vehicle
is moving.
Failure to take the precaution may
result in an object interfering with the
(1) (2) (3) (4) (6) pedals and causing a loss of vehicle
control or an accident.

(3) (5) (6)

(4)

57RK060

(1) Center console tray (2) Front cup holders

(3) Front bottle holder (4) Rear cup holder
(5) Front seat back pocket (if equipped) (6) Rear bottle holder

5-8

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Front cup holders (2) / Front bottle holder (3) / Footrest

Rear cup holder (4) Rear bottle holder (6)
Use the rear cup holder to put a cup with a You should only place a bottle with a cap in
lid or a bottle with a cap. Also, you can put the holder. EXAMPLE
small articles in the rear cup holder.

WARNING Front seat back pocket

(if equipped) (5)
Failure to take the precautions listed
below could cause personal injury or
vehicle damage.
• Be careful when you are using the
cup holders to hold a cup contain-
ing hot liquid. Spilling out hot liq-
uid can cause burn injury. (1)
• Do not use the cup holders to hold
sharp-edged, hard or breakable 57RK062
objects. Objects in the cup holders
may be thrown about during a sud- Use the footrest (1) as a support for your
den stop or impact, and could left foot and body.
cause personal injury.
• Be careful not to spill liquid or EXAMPLE
insert any foreign materials into the
57RK061
moving part of the gearshift lever,
or any electrical components. Liq- This pocket is provided for holding light
uid or foreign materials may dam- and soft things such as gloves, newspa-
age these parts. pers or magazines.

CAUTION
Do not put hard or breakable objects
in the pocket. If an accident occurs,
objects such as bottles, cans, etc.
can injure the occupants in the rear
seat.

5-9

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Floor mats (if equipped) WARNING Luggage compartment hook

Failure to take the following precau-
tions may result in the driver’s side
EXAMPLE floor mat interfering with the pedals EXAMPLE
and causing a loss of vehicle control
or an accident.
• Check that the floor mat grommets
are hooked to the fasteners.
• Never place additional floor mats
on top of the existing floor mat.

57RK063

To prevent the driver’s side floor mat from

sliding forward and possibly interfering with
the operation of the pedals, genuine
SUZUKI floor mats are recommended. 52RM50140
Whenever you put the driver’s side floor
You can hang the shopping bag or other
mat back in the vehicle after it has been
suitable objects on the hook.
removed, hook the floor mat grommets to
This hook is not designed for large or
the fasteners and position the floor mat
heavy items.
properly in the footwell.
When you replace the floor mats in your NOTICE
vehicle with a different type such as all-
weather floor mats, we highly recommend To avoid breaking the hook, do not
to use genuine SUZUKI floor mats for hang items heavier than the following
proper fitting. weight.
Shopping hook: 2 kg (4.4 lbs)

5-10

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Luggage compartment cover Luggage compartment carpet Frame hooks

(if equipped) It is not recommended that you use the
(2) frame hooks for towing another vehicle.
They were originally designed to tow your
EXAMPLE vehicle in emergency situation.
If your vehicle needs to be towed in an
emergency, refer to “Towing” in “EMER-
GENCY SERVICE” section.

WARNING
Observe the following instructions
(1) when using frame hooks. The towing
hook or vehicle body may break and
EXAMPLE cause serious injury or damage:
52RM50450
• Do not use the frame hooks for
towing another vehicle.
52RM50150 There is a tool box under the luggage com- • Avoid pulling the vehicle to get out
partment carpet. When installing the lug- of severe snowy, muddy or sandy
Luggage or other cargo placed in the lug-
gage compartment carpet, please hook the conditions, sudden starts or erratic
gage compartment is hidden from view by
grommets (1) of the carpet on the hook (2) driving maneuvers which could
a luggage compartment cover.
of the vehicle. cause excessive stress on the tow-
WARNING ing hook.
In such case, we recommend that
Do not carry items on top of the lug- you contact a professional service.
gage compartment cover, even if they
are small and light. Objects on top of
the cover could be thrown about in
an accident, causing injury, or could
obstruct the driver’s rear view.

5-11

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

To install the hook (1), follow the procedure 2) Remove the cover (C) by using a jack
Front below. handle (A) covered with a soft cloth as
shown in the illustration.
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE （1）
NOTE:
Do not use excessive force as it may dam-
age the cover strap.
（A）
EXAMPLE

（B）
(1)
(1)
52RM50160 52RM50170

The towing hook (1) is provided on the 1) Pick up the towing hook (1), jack handle
front of the vehicle for use in emergency (A) and wheel wrench (B) in the lug-
situations and sea shipping purpose only. gage compartment.
52RM50190
NOTICE EXAMPLE
3) Install the towing hook (1) by hand.
To prevent damage to the vehicle,
never use the towing hook (1) for (C) NOTE:
trailer / train shipping. It is recommended to secure the cover with
tape to prevent damage during towing.

(A)

52RM50180

5-12

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Rear Other holes

EXAMPLE
（B）
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
（1）

(2)

52RM50200
(3) (3)
4) To tighten the towing hook (1), turn it
clockwise by using a wheel wrench (B) 57RK089 52RS50170
until the hook (1) is securely installed. The frame hook (2) is provided on the rear The frame holes (3) are provided only for
To remove the towing hook (1), reverse the of the vehicle for use in emergency situa- transporting by a car carrier trailer.
installation procedure. tions and sea shipping purposes only.
WARNING
NOTICE Do not use the frame holes (3) for
To prevent damage to the vehicle, towing purpose. These holes may
never use the frame hook (2) for break and cause serious injury or
trailer / train shipping. damage.

5-13

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Heating and air conditioning Air outlet

system
There are two types of heating and air con- (1)
ditioning systems as follows: (2)
• Manual heating and air conditioning sys-
tem
• Automatic heating and air conditioning (3)
system (climate control)
(4)
(2)
(3)
(5)

(5)

EXAMPLE
57RK064

(1) Windshield defroster outlet

(2) Side defroster outlet
(3) Side outlet
(4) Center outlet
(5) Floor outlet

5-14

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Center outlet Side outlet

Manual heating and air
(2) conditioning system
(4) (3)
Description of controls

(4) (2) (5) (1)

(1)

52RS007

When open, air comes out regardless of

the air flow selector position. Move the
knob (3) vertically or horizontally, to adjust
the direction of airflow as desired. The side
(3)
outlet opens when you turn the dial (4)
52RS006
upward and closes when you turn it down- 57RK117
To open the louver (1), push the arrow part ward.
(2) as shown in the illustration. To adjust Temperature selector (1)
the direction of the air flow, move up or CAUTION This is used to adjust the temperature.
down or turn the opened louver (1).
Prolonged exposure to hot air from Blower speed selector (2)
the heater or air conditioner could This is used to turn on the blower and to
result in low temperature burns. All select blower speed.
vehicle occupants, particularly chil-
dren, the elderly, those with special
needs, individuals with delicate skin,
and sleeping individuals, should
maintain sufficient distance from the
air outlets to prevent prolonged
exposure to hot airflow.

5-15

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Air intake selector (3) Air flow selector (4)

(b) (a) (e)

（6） (d) (f)

57RK118

This selector is used to select the following

modes. (c) (g)
FRESH AIR (a) （4）
When this mode is selected by moving the 52RS50181
52RM50250
lever to right, outside air comes in.
NOTE: This is used to select one of the following
RECIRCULATED AIR (b) The mark of “ ” (6) functions.
When this mode is selected by moving the To clear fog on the windshield and/or the
lever to left, outside air is shut out and side windows quickly, set the air flow VENTILATION (c)
inside air is recirculated. This mode is suit- selector (4) to HEAT & DEFROST or
able when driving through dusty or polluted DEFROST and air intake selector (3) to
air such as in a tunnel, or when attempting FRESH AIR. These positioning will clear
to quickly cool down or warm up the inte- the fogged windshield and/or the side win-
rior. dows faster than the RECIRCULATED
AIR.
NOTE:
If you select RECIRCULATED AIR for an
extended period of time, the air in the vehi-
cle can become contaminated and the win-
dows tend to get misted. Therefore, you
should select FRESH AIR whenever possi-
ble.
57RK066

Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the center and side air outlets.

5-16

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

BI-LEVEL (d) HEAT (e) HEAT & DEFROST (f)

57RK067 57RK068 57RK069

Temperature-controlled air comes out of Temperature-controlled air comes out of Temperature-controlled air comes out of
the floor outlets and cooler air comes out the floor outlets and the side outlets, also the floor outlets, the windshield defroster
of the center and side outlets. When the comes out of the windshield defroster out- outlets, the side defroster outlets and the
temperature selector (1) is in the fully cold lets and also comes slightly out of the side side outlets.
position or fully hot position, however, the defroster outlets.
air from the floor outlets and the air from
the center and side outlets will be the
same temperature.

5-17

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

DEFROST (g) Air conditioning switch (5)

To turn on the air conditioning system, set System operating instructions
the blower speed selector to a position
other than off and push in “A/C” switch. Natural ventilation
With this “A/C” switch operation, a indica- Select VENTILATION and FRESH AIR, the
tor light will come on when the air condi- temperature selector to the desired tem-
tioning system is working. To turn off the perature position, and the blower speed
air conditioning system, push “A/C” switch selector to off. Fresh air will flow through
again. the vehicle during driving.
During operation of the air conditioner, you Forced ventilation
may notice slight changes in engine The base settings are the same as for nat-
speed. These changes are normal, the ural ventilation except you set the blower
system is designed so that the compressor speed selector to a position other than off.
turns on or off to maintain the desired tem- Normal heating (using outside air)
57RK070 perature. Select HEAT and FRESH AIR, the tem-
Temperature-controlled air comes out of Less operation of the compressor results perature selector to the desired tempera-
the windshield defroster outlets, the side in better fuel economy. ture position and the blower speed selector
defroster outlets and the side outlets. to the desired blower speed position. Set-
ting the blower speed selector to a higher
blower speed position increases heating
efficiency.
Quick heating (using recirculated air)
The base settings are the same as for nor-
mal heating except you select RECIRCU-
LATED AIR. If you use this heating method
for an extended period of time, the air in
the vehicle can become contaminated and
the windows can become misty. Therefore,
use this method only for quick heating and
change to the normal heating method as
soon as possible.

5-18

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Head cooled/Feet warmed heating • If your vehicle has been left in the sun NOTE:
Select BI-LEVEL and FRESH AIR, the with the windows closed, it will cool If you need maximum defrosting:
temperature selector to the desired tem- faster if you open the windows briefly • select DEFROST and FRESH AIR,
perature position, and the blower speed while you operate the air conditioner with • set the blower speed selector to high,
selector to the desired blower speed posi- the air intake selector at FRESH AIR and • adjust the temperature selector to the
tion. Unless the temperature selector is in the blower at high speed. hot end,
the fully cold position or fully hot position, • turn on “A/C” switch, and
the air that comes out of the center and Dehumidifying • adjust the side outlets so the air blows
side outlets will be cooler than the air that Set the air flow selector to a desired air on the side windows.
comes out of the floor outlets. flow selector position, the temperature
selector to the desired temperature posi- Models with ENG A-STOP system
Normal cooling tion and the blower speed selector to the • If the heating performance can no longer
Set the air flow selector to VENTILATION, desired blower speed position. Also select perform at a sufficient level due to auto-
the temperature selector to the desired tem- FRESH AIR and turn on “A/C” switch. matically stopping the engine, press the
perature position and the blower speed ENG A-STOP OFF switch to deactivate
selector to the desired blower speed posi- NOTE: the ENG A-STOP system. (The engine
tion, and turn on “A/C” switch. Setting the Because the air conditioner dehumidifies will automatically restart and the air con-
blower speed selector to a higher blower the air, turning it on will help keep the win- ditioning performance will be restored.)
speed position increases cooling efficiency. dows clear, even when blowing heated air • If the windshield and/or the driver’s side/
You can switch the air intake selector to using DEFROST or HEAT & DEFROST passenger side door windows are
either FRESH AIR or RECIRCULATED functions. fogged during automatically stopping the
AIR as you desire. Choosing RECIRCU- engine, stop the ENG A-STOP system
LATED AIR increases cooling efficiency. EXAMPLE and restart the engine. Then, turn the air
flow selector (4) to change the air flow to
Quick cooling (using recirculated air) the HEAT & DEFROST or DEFROST
The base settings are the same as for nor- position to defog the windows.
mal cooling except you select RECIRCU-
LATED AIR and the highest blower speed.

NOTE:
• If you select RECIRCULATED AIR for an
extended period of time, the air in the
vehicle can become contaminated and
the windows tend to get misted. There-
fore, you should select FRESH AIR
whenever possible. 57RK071

5-19

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Maintenance Automatic heating and air conditioning system (climate control)

If you do not use the air conditioner for a
long period, such as during winter, it may Description of controls
not give the best performance when you
start using it again. To help maintain opti-
mum performance and durability of your air (5) (4) (9) (7) (8)
conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.
Operate the air conditioner at least once a
month for one minute with the engine
idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil
and helps protect the internal components.
If your air conditioner is equipped with air
filters, clean or replace them as specified
in “Maintenance schedule” in “INSPEC-
TION AND MAINTENANCE” section.

NOTE:
Your vehicle uses the air conditioning
refrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called
R-134a. R-134a replaced R-12 around
1993 for automotive applications. Other
refrigerants are available, including recy-
cled R-12, but only R-134a should be used
in your vehicle. (2) (3) (6) (1)
52RM50340
NOTICE
(1) Temperature selector
Using the wrong refrigerant may (2) Blower speed selector
damage your air conditioning sys- (3) Air intake selector
tem. Use R-134a only. Do not mix or (4) Air flow selector
replace the R-134a with other refrig- (5) Defrost switch
erants. (6) Air conditioning switch
(7) “OFF” switch
(8) “AUTO” switch
(9) Display

5-20

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Temperature selector (1) Blower speed selector (2) Air intake selector (3)

(1) (2)

(a)
(3)

(b)

52RM50350 52RM50360 52RM50370

Turn the temperature selector (1) to adjust The blower speed selector (2) is used to Push the air intake selector (3) to change
the temperature. turn on the blower and to select blower between the recirculated air and fresh air
speed. mode.
NOTE:
If you turn the temperature selector (1) If “AUTO” switch (8) is pushed, the blower If “AUTO” switch (8) is pushed, the air
until “HI” or “LO” appears on the display, speed will vary automatically as the cli- intake will vary automatically as the climate
the climate control system will operate at mate control system maintains the control system maintains the selected tem-
maximum heating or cooling. The tempera- selected temperature. perature.
ture of the air from the outlets may change
suddenly while “LO” or “HI” is displayed, NOTE:
but this is normal. When the recirculated air mode is
selected, the automatic operation system
NOTE: is deactivated even if you push “AUTO”
When you change the unit of temperature switch (8).
in the information display, the unit of tem-
perature in the air conditioning system will
be changed. Refer to “Information display”
in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section for
details.

5-21

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

RECIRCULATED AIR (a) Air flow selector (4) VENTILATION (c)

When this mode is selected, outside air is
shut off and inside air is recirculated. This (c)
(4)
mode is suitable when driving through
dusty or polluted air such as a tunnel, or
when attempting to quickly cool down or
warm up the interior. (d)

FRESH AIR (b)

When this mode is selected, outside air is (e)
introduced.
FRESH AIR and RECIRCULATED AIR are
selected alternately each time the air
intake selector is pushed. (f)
52RM50380 57RK066
NOTE:
If you select RECIRCULATED AIR for an Push the air flow selector (4) to change Temperature-controlled air comes out of
extended period of time, the air in the vehi- among the following functions. The indica- the center and side outlets.
cle can become contaminated and the win- tion of the selected mode appears in the
dows tend to get misted. Therefore, you display. BI-LEVEL (d)
should select FRESH AIR whenever possi- If “AUTO” switch (8) is pushed, the air flow
ble. will vary automatically as the climate con-
trol system maintains the selected tem-
perature.

57RK067

5-22

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Temperature-controlled air comes out of HEAT & DEFROST (f) Defrost switch (5)
the floor outlets and cooler air comes out
of the center and side outlets. When the (5)
temperature selector (1) is in the fully cold
position or fully hot position, however, the
air from the floor outlets and the air from
the center and side outlets will be the
same temperature.

HEAT (e)

57RK069 52RM50390

Temperature-controlled air comes out of Push the defrost switch (5) to turn on the
the floor outlets, the windshield defroster defroster.
outlets, the side defroster outlets and the
side outlets.

57RK068

Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the floor outlets and the side outlets, a
small amount of air comes out of the wind-
shield defroster outlets and also comes
slightly out of the side defroster outlets.

5-23

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

DEFROST Air conditioning switch (6)

System operating instructions
Automatic operation
(7) (8)

(6)

57RK070 52RM50400
(6) (1)
Temperature-controlled air comes out of
the windshield defroster outlets, the side The air conditioning switch (6) is used to 52RM50410
turn on and off the air conditioning system
defroster outlets and the side outlets. You can let the climate control system work
only when the blower is on. To turn on the
air conditioning system, push in the switch automatically. To set the system for fully-auto-
NOTE: matic operation, follow the procedure below.
and “A/C” will appear in the display. To turn
When the defrost switch (5) is pushed to
off the air conditioning system, push in the 1) Start the engine.
turn on the defroster, the air conditioning
switch again and “A/C” will go off. 2) Push “AUTO” switch (8).
system will operate and FRESH AIR mode
will be selected automatically. In very cold 3) Set the desired temperature by turning
weather, however, the air conditioning sys- the temperature selector (1).
tem will not operate. The blower speed, air intake and air flow
are controlled automatically to maintain the
set temperature. However, the air flow is
not changed to DEFROST position auto-
matically.

NOTE:
When the recirculated air mode is selected,
the automatic operation system is deacti-
vated even if you push “AUTO” switch (8).

5-24

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

You can use the air conditioning switch (6) are maintained, and the other functions Manual operation
to manually turn the air conditioner on or off remain under automatic operation. You can manually control the climate con-
according to your preference. When you • If the windshield and/or the front door trol system. Set the selectors to the
turn the air conditioning switch off, the cli- windows are fogged, push the defrost desired positions.
mate control system cannot lower the inside switch (5) to turn on the defroster, or
temperature below outside temperature. push the air flow selector (4) to change EXAMPLE
the air flow to HEAT & DEFROST posi-
To turn the climate control system off, push tion to defog the windows.
“OFF” switch (7). • To return the blower speed selector (2),
air intake selector (3), and air flow selec-
NOTE:
tor (4) to automatic operation, push
If “AUTO” in the display blinks, there is a
“AUTO” switch (8).
problem in the heating system and/or air
conditioning system. You should have the
system inspected by an authorized EXAMPLE
SUZUKI dealer.

NOTE: (11)
• To find the temperature at which you are
57RK071
most comfortable, start with the 25°C
(75°F) setting, for example. NOTE:
• If you turn the temperature selector (1) (10) If you need maximum defrosting:
until “HI” or “LO” appears on the display, • push the defrost switch (5) to turn on the
the climate control system will operate at defroster (the air conditioning system will
maximum heating or cooling and the operate and FRESH AIR mode will be
blower will run at full speed. selected automatically),
• To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather • set the blower speed selector to high,
57RK072
or hot air in hot weather, the system will • adjust the temperature selector to “HI”
delay turning on the blower until warmed Be careful not to cover the interior tem- indication on the display, and
or cooled air is available. perature sensor (10) located between the • adjust the side outlets so the air blows
• If your vehicle has been left in the sun steering wheel and the climate control on the side windows.
with the windows closed, it will cool panel, or the solar sensor (11) located at
faster if you open the windows briefly. the top of the driver’s side dashboard.
• Even under the automatic operation, you These sensors are used by the automatic
can set individual selectors to the manual system to regulate temperature.
mode. The manually selected functions

5-25

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Models with ENG A-STOP system

• If the heating performance can no longer Maintenance Radio antenna
perform at a sufficient level due to auto- If you do not use the air conditioner for a
matically stopping the engine, press the long period, such as during winter, it may
ENG A-STOP OFF switch to deactivate not give the best performance when you EXAMPLE
the ENG A-STOP system. (The engine start using it again. To help maintain opti-
will automatically restart and the air con- mum performance and durability of your air
ditioning performance will be restored.) conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.
• If the windshield and/or the driver’s side/ Operate the air conditioner at least once a
passenger side door windows are month for one minute with the engine
fogged during automatically stopping the idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil
engine, stop the ENG A-STOP system and helps protect the internal components.
and restart the engine. Then, turn the air
flow selector (4) to change the air flow to If your air conditioner is equipped with air
the HEAT & DEFROST or DEFROST filters, clean or replace them as specified
position to defog the windows. in “Maintenance schedule” in “INSPEC-
TION AND MAINTENANCE” section. Have
this job done by an authorized SUZUKI 63J055
dealer as the lower glove box must be low-
ered for this job. The radio antenna on the roof is remov-
able. To remove the antenna, turn it coun-
NOTE: terclockwise. To reinstall the antenna, turn
Your vehicle uses the air conditioning it clockwise firmly by hand.
refrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called
R-134a. R-134a replaced R-12 around NOTICE
1993 for automotive applications. Other To avoid damage to the radio
refrigerants are available, including recy- antenna:
cled R-12, but only R-134a should be used • Remove the antenna when using an
in your vehicle. automatic car wash.
• Remove the antenna when the
NOTICE antenna hits anything such as a
Using the wrong refrigerant may low ceiling in a parking garage or
damage your air conditioning sys- putting a car cover over your vehi-
tem. Use R-134a only. Do not mix or cle.
replace the R-134a with other refrig-
erants.

5-26

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Audio system (Type A / Type B) (if equipped)

Type A EXAMPLE

Type B

57RK090

Type A: AM/FM CD player without Bluetooth® function

Type B: AM/FM CD player with Bluetooth® function

5-27

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Safety information Notes on discs

Precautions Cautions on handling
WARNING
• When the inside of the vehicle is very
If you pay too much attention to cold and the player is used soon after
operating the audio system or view- switching on the heater, condensation
ing the audio system display while may form on the disc or the optical parts
driving, an accident can occur. If of the player and proper playback may (A)
you set the sound volume too loud, not be possible. If condensation forms
it could prevent you from being on the disc, wipe it off with a soft cloth. If
aware of road and traffic conditions. condensation forms on the optical parts 52D274
• Keep your eyes on the road and of the player, do not use the player for
about one hour. This will allow the con- This unit has been designed specifically for
your mind on driving. Avoid pay-
densation to disappear normally. playback of compact discs bearing mark
ing too much attention to operat-
• Driving on extremely bumpy roads which (A) shown above.
ing the audio system or viewing
cause severe vibrations may cause No other discs can be played.
the audio system display.
• Familiarize yourself with the audio sound to skip.
system controls and operation of • This unit uses a precision mechanism.
the audio system before driving. Even in the event that trouble arises,
• Preset your favorite radio stations never open the case, disassemble the
before driving so that you can unit, or lubricate the rotating parts. Bring
quickly tune to them using the the unit to an authorized SUZUKI dealer.
presets.
• Set the sound volume to a level
that will allow you to continue to
be aware of road and traffic condi-
tions while driving.

5-28

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Removing the disc Proper way to hold

the compact disc

52D347 52D348

To remove fingermarks and dust, use a Never stick labels on the surface of the
soft cloth, and wipe in a straight line from compact disc or write on the surface with a
the center of the compact disc to the cir- pencil or pen.
52D275
cumference.
To remove the compact disc from its stor-
age case, press down on the center of the (B)
case and lift the disc out, holding it care- (C) (B)
fully by the edges.

Always handle the compact disc by the

edges. 52D349

Never touch the surface. Do not use any solvents such as commer-
cially available cleaners, anti-static spray,
or thinner to clean compact discs.

52D277

New discs may have some roughness

around the edges. The unit may not work
or the sound may skip if such discs are
used. Use a ball-point pen (B), etc. to
remove the roughness (C) from edges of
the disc before inserting it into the unit.

5-29

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

52D350 52D351

Do not use compact discs that have large Do not expose compact discs to direct sun-
scratches, are misshaped, or cracked, etc. light or any heat source.
Use of such discs will cause damage or
prevent the system from operating prop- NOTE:
erly. • Do not use commercially available CD
protection sheets or discs equipped with
stabilizers, etc.
These may get caught in the internal
mechanism and damage the disc.
• It may be impossible to play CD-R discs
with this unit due to the recording condi-
tions.
• CD-RW discs cannot be played with this
unit.

5-30

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

WARNING
The Bluetooth® word mark and logo are
This is a class I laser product. Use of registered trademarks and are owned by
controls or adjustments or perfor- the Bluetooth SIG, Ink.
mance of procedures other than
those specified herein may result in Stop using this unit and a Bluetooth®
hazardous radiation exposure. ready device whenever requested.
Do not open covers and do not This unit shares the communication fre-
attempt to repair this unit by yourself. quency with other private or public wireless
Refer servicing to qualified person- communication equipment such as a wire-
nel. less LAN and other wireless communica-
tion radios.
You should stop using this unit whenever
you are notified that your unit disturbs
other wireless communication immediately.

5-31

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Information on disposal for users of waste electrical & electronic equip- WARNING
ment (private households)
This is a class I laser product. Use of
This symbol on the products and/or accompanying documents controls or adjustments or perfor-
means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mance of procedures other than
mixed with general household waste. those specified herein may result in
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling, please take these hazardous radiation exposure.
products to designated collection points, where they will be accepted Do not open covers and do not
on a free of charge basis. Alternatively, in some countries you may attempt to repair this unit by yourself.
be able to return your products to your local retailer upon the pur- Ask an authorized dealer for the
chase of an equivalent new product. repair.
Disposing of this product correctly will help to save valuable
resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human
health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inap-
propriate waste handling. Please contact your local authority for fur-
68LM560
ther details of your nearest designated collection point.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in
accordance with national legislation.
For business users in the European Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or
supplier for further information.
Information on disposal in other countries outside the European Union
This symbol is only valid in the European Union.
If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask
for the correct method of disposal.

5-32

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Stop using this unit and a Bluetooth® NOTE:

ready device whenever requested. These limits are designed to provide rea-
The Bluetooth® word mark and logo are This unit shares the communication fre- sonable protection against harmful interfer-
registered trademarks and are owned by quency with other private or public wireless ence in a residential installation. This
the Bluetooth SIG, Ink. communication equipment such as a wire- equipment generates, uses and can radi-
less LAN and other wireless communica- ate radio frequency energy and, if not
tion radios. installed and used in accordance with the
You should stop using this unit whenever instructions, may cause harmful interfer-
you are notified that your unit disturbs ence to radio communications. However,
other wireless communication immediately. there is no guarantee that interference will
not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interfer-
ence to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equip-
ment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving anten-
na.
• Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on
a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
• This transmitter must not be co-located
or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.

5-33

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Turning on/off power

Basic operations Press “VOL PUSH PWR” knob (1) to turn
on the power. The unit starts to operate in
EXAMPLE the previous setting that the power was
Type A turned off.

Adjusting the volume

Turn “VOL PUSH PWR” knob (1).
Turning it clockwise increases the volume;
(3) turning it counterclockwise decreases the
volume.

(2) (1) NOTE:

For the purposes of safe driving, adjust the
audio volume to a level that allows you to
hear sounds outside of the vehicle includ-
ing car horns and particularly emergency
Type B vehicle sirens.

Mute (if equipped)

Press MUTE button (3) to mute the sound.
To cancel the mute, press MUTE button (3)
(3) again.

(2) (1)

57RK091

(1) “VOL PUSH PWR” knob

(2) “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(3) MUTE button (if equipped)

5-34

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Adjusting bass/treble/balance/fader Adjusting the AVC (Auto volume con- Preset-EQ

1) Press “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” trol) Preset-EQ calls up various sound types in
knob (2). The Auto Volume Control (AVC) function accordance with the listening music type.
Each time the knob is pressed, sound automatically adjusts (increases/ 1) Press “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND”
adjustment will change as follows: decreases) the sound volume in accor- knob (2) several times until “PRESET-
dance with vehicle speed. The AVC control EQ” appears.
is provided with three selectable levels 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(LEVEL OFF, 1, 2, 3). The range of volume (2).
Preset-EQ (EQ OFF)
adjustment increases together with the Each time the knob is turned, preset
LEVEL number. EQ mode will change as follows:
Bass adjustment (BASS 0)
1) Press “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND”
knob (2) until the AVC adjustment mode
Treble adjustment (TREBLE 0)
is selected. OFF (FLAT)
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
Balance adjustment (BALANCE 0)
(2) to select the desired AVC adjust- JAZZ
ment level. (Initial setting: LEVEL 2)
Fader adjustment (FADER 0)
ROCK
AVC adjustment (AVC LEVEL 2)
POP

CLASSIC
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(2) to adjust the sound. HIP-HOP

5-35

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Listening to the radio Display

EXAMPLE (A)
Type A

(3) (1)
(4) (2)
(B)
(7) 68LM561

(1) “FM” button

(5) (2) “AM” button
(3) UP button
(4) DOWN button
(5) “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(6) (6) PRESET buttons ([1] to [6])
Type B (7) “AS” button
(3) (1) (A) Band
(4) (2) (B) Frequency

(7)
(5)

(6)
57RK092

5-36

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Selecting the FM band Auto store Auto store mode on/off

Press “FM” button (1). Hold down “AS” button (7) for 2 seconds or Press “AS” button (7).
Each time the button is pressed, the recep- longer. Each time the button is pressed, the mode
tion band will change as follows: 6 stations in good reception will automati- will change as follows:
cally be stored to PRESET buttons (6) in
order, starting from a station whose fre-
quency is the lowest. AS mode on AS mode off
FM1 FM2
NOTE:
• Auto store can be cancelled by pressing
“AS” button (7) while auto store search-
ing is ongoing.
Selecting the AM band • When auto store is performed, the sta- Radio reception
Press “AM” button (2). tion previously stored in the memory in Radio reception can be affected by envi-
each position will be overwritten. ronment, atmospheric conditions, or radio
Seek tuning • When there are fewer than 6 stations signal’s power and distance from the sta-
Press UP button (3) or DOWN button (4). that can be stored even if 1 round of tion. Nearby mountains and buildings may
The unit stops searching for a station at a auto store operation is performed, no interfere or deflect radio reception, causing
frequency where a broadcast station is station will be stored at the remaining poor reception. Poor reception or radio
available. PRESET buttons (6). static can also be caused by electric cur-
• 6 stations can be preset for FM1 and rent from overhead wires or high voltage
Manual tuning FM2 in common, and 6 stations for AM power lines.
Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob (5). in auto store mode.
The frequency being received is displayed.

Preset memory
1) Select the desired station.
2) Hold down a desired button ([1] to [6])
of PRESET buttons (6) to which you
want to store the station for 2 seconds
or longer.

5-37

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Display
Listening to a CD
(A)
EXAMPLE
Type A (1)
(2) (3)
(4) (B)
(5)
(1) Insertion slot
(2) EJECT button
(3) “CD” button
(4) UP button
(5) DOWN button
(6) “RPT” button
(7) “RDM” button
(8) (6) (7) (8) “DISP” button
Type B (1)
(2) (3) (A) Track number
(B) Play time
(4)
(5) NOTE:
This product does not support 8 cm CD
(sometimes called as “mini single CD”, “3-
inch CD”, “CD3”, etc.).

(8) (6) (7)

57RK093

5-38

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

NOTICE NOTICE
• Never insert your finger or hand If you forcefully try to push an
into the CD insertion slot. Never ejected CD inside the unit before auto
(A) insert foreign objects. reloading, the disc surface might be
• Never insert a CD with glue coming scratched.
out from adhesive tape or a rental Before reloading a CD, remove it
• CDs or CD-ROMs without mark (A) can- CD label or with a trace indicating from the unit completely.
not be used. that adhesive tape or a rental CD
• Some discs recorded in CD-R/CD-RW label has been removed. This may Listening to a CD
format may sometimes be impossible to cause the CD not to eject or result When a CD is inserted, playback will auto-
use. in a malfunction. matically start.
When a CD is already inside the unit,
Loading a CD press “CD” button (3) to start playback.
Insert a CD in the insertion slot (1).
When the CD is loaded, it starts to play. Selecting a track
• Press UP button (4) to listen to the next
Ejecting a CD track.
Press EJECT button (2). • Press DOWN button (5) twice to listen to
When the ignition switch is in “LOCK” posi- the previous track.
• A CD is to be inserted with its label side tion or the engine switch is in LOCK (OFF) When DOWN button (5) is pressed
up. mode, the CD remained ejected for around once, the track currently being played
• When there is a CD already in the unit, it 15 seconds or longer will automatically be will start from the beginning again.
is impossible to insert another CD with- drawn inside the unit. (Auto reload func-
out ejecting the CD in the unit. Do not tion) Fast forwarding/rewinding a track
use force to insert a CD into the CD The backup eject function: • Hold down UP button (4) to fast forward
insertion slot. This function allows you to eject a CD by the track.
pressing EJECT button (2) even when the • Hold down DOWN button (5) to fast
ignition switch is in “LOCK” position or the rewind the track.
engine switch is in LOCK (OFF) mode.

5-39

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Random playback Display change

Press “RDM” button (7). Press “DISP” button (8).
Each time the button is pressed, the mode Each time the button is pressed, display
will change as follows: will change as follows:

OFF TRACK RANDOM Play time

Disc title

Track title
• TRACK RANDOM
The random indicator “RDM” will light.
The tracks in the loaded disc will be NOTE:
played in random order. • “NO TITLE” will be displayed when there
is no text information in the disc currently
Repeat playback being played.
Press “RPT” button (6). • If text data contains more than 16 char-
Each time the button is pressed, the mode acters, “>” mark will appear at the right
will change as follows: end. Holding down “DISP” button (8) for
1 second or longer can display the next
page.

OFF TRACK REPEAT

• TRACK REPEAT
The repeat indicator “RPT” will light.
The track currently being played will be
played repeatedly.

5-40

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Display
Listening to an MP3/WMA/AAC disc
(A) (B)
EXAMPLE
Type A

(2) (D) (C)

(3)
(1) “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(2) UP button
(3) DOWN button
(1)
(4) “RPT” button
(5) “RDM” button
(6) “DISP” button
(6) (4) (5)
(A) Folder number
Type B (B) Track number
(C) Play time
(2) (D) File type
(3)

(1)

(6) (4) (5)

57RK094

5-41

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Selecting a folder Random playback Repeat playback

Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob (1) Press “RDM” button (5). Press “RPT” button (4).
to select a folder. Each time the button is pressed, the mode Each time the button is pressed, the mode
will change as follows: will change as follows:
Selecting a track
• Press UP button (2) to listen to the next
track.
• Press DOWN button (3) twice to listen to OFF FOLDER RANDOM ALL RANDOM OFF FILE REPEAT FOLDER REPEAT
the previous track.
When DOWN button (3) is pressed
once, the track currently being played
will start from the beginning again.
• FOLDER RANDOM • FILE REPEAT
Fast forwarding/rewinding a track The random indicator “F.RDM” will light. The repeat indicator “RPT” will light.
• Hold down UP button (2) to fast forward The tracks in the current folder will be The track currently being played will be
played in random order. played repeatedly.
the track.
• Hold down DOWN button (3) to fast • ALL RANDOM • FOLDER REPEAT
The random indicator “RDM” will light. The repeat indicator “F.RPT” will light.
rewind the track.
The tracks in the loaded disc will be All tracks in the currently selected folder
played in random order. will be played repeatedly.

5-42

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Display change Points to remember when making MP3/

Press “DISP” button (6). Notes on MP3/WMA/AAC WMA/AAC files
Each time the button is pressed, display What is MP3? Common
will change as follows: • An abbreviation of “MPEG audio layer3”, • High bit rate and high sampling fre-
MP3 is an audio compression format quency are recommended for high qual-
that has become the standard format ity sounds.
Play time among PC users. Its merit is that the • Selecting VBR (Variable Bit Rate) is not
original audio data is compressed to recommended. Selecting VBR may
Folder name approximately 1/10 and high sound qual- cause display of incorrect playing time
ity is maintained. This means that it is and jumpiness of playback.
File name possible to store the data of approxi- • Playback sound quality varies depend-
mately 10 music CDs on a single CD-R/ ing on the encoding environment. For
Album name (MP3, AAC only) RW disc, which in turn makes it possible details, refer to the user manual of the
to play music for a long time without hav- encoding software and the writing soft-
Track title ing to change the disc. ware in use.
What is WMA? NOTICE
Artist name • An abbreviation of “Windows Media
Audio,” WMA is an audio compression Never use “.mp3”, “.wma” or “.m4a”
format developed by Microsoft. as a file name extension if it is not in
NOTE: • WMA files for which the DRM (Digital the MP3/WMA/AAC format file. Fail-
• “NO TITLE” will be displayed when there Rights Management) function is on can- ure to observe this may result in
is no text information in the disc currently not be played. damage to the speaker due to noise
being played. • Windows MediaTM and the Windows® production.
• If text data contains more than 16 char- logo are trademarks or registered trade-
acters, “>” mark will appear at the right marks of Microsoft Corporation in the
end. Holding down “DISP” button (6) for United States and other countries.
1 second or longer can display the next
page. What is AAC?
• An abbreviation of “Advanced Audio
Coding,” AAC is an audio compression
format used by MPEG2 and MPEG4.

5-43

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Recording MP3/WMA/AAC files on a CD Compression formats

media MP3
• It is recommended not to write both CD- • Bit rate:
DA files and MP3/WMA/AAC files on a MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k - 320 kbps
disc. MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps
• If both CD-DA files and MP3/WMA/AAC MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps
files are on the same disc, tracks may • Sampling frequency:
not be played in the correct order or MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k/44.1 k/
some tracks may not be played at all. 48 kHz
• When storing both MP3 data and WMA MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 16 k/22.05 k/
data on the same disc, sort and place 24 kHz
them in different folders. MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k/11.025 k/
• Do not write files other than MP3/WMA/ 12 kHz
AAC files and unnecessary folders on a
disc. WMA (Ver. 7, Ver. 8, Ver. 9*)
• MP3/WMA/AAC files should be named • Bit rate: CBR 32 k - 320 kbps
to meet the standards and the file sys- • Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
tem specifications as shown below. * WMA 9 Professional/LossLess/Voice are
• The file extension “.mp3”, “.wma” or not supported.
“.m4a” should be assigned to files based
on their format independently. AAC*
• You may encounter a trouble in playing • Bit rate: ABR 16 k - 320 kbps
MP3/WMA/AAC files or displaying infor- • Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
mation of MP3/WMA/AAC files depend- * Apple Lossless is not supported.
ing on the writing software or CD
recorder in use. Supported file systems
• This unit does not have a playlist func- ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet, Romeo
tion.
• It is recommended to write discs in Disc- Maximum number of files/folders
at-Once mode even though Multi-ses- • Maximum number of files: 512
sion mode is supported. These modes • Maximum number of files in a folder: 255
are the methods for writing audio data in • Maximum depth of tree structure: 8
CD. • Maximum number of folders: 255
(Root folder is included.)

5-44

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Display
Listening to files stored in a USB device
(A) (B)
EXAMPLE
Type A

(3) (D) (C)

(4)
(1) (1) “MEDIA” button
(2) “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(3) UP button
(2) (4) DOWN button
(5) “RPT” button
(6) “RDM” button
(7) (5) (6) (7) “DISP” button

Type B (A) Folder number

(B) Track number
(3) (C) Play time
(4) (D) File type
(1)
NOTICE
(2) Do not connect any USB device other
than a USB memory or a USB audio
player. Do not connect multiple USB
(7) (5) (6) devices to the USB connector using a
USB hub, etc. Supplying power to
57RK095 multiple USB devices from the con-
nector could cause overheating and
smoking.

5-45

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Selecting USB mode Random playback • FOLDER REPEAT

Press “MEDIA” button (1). Press “RDM” button (6). The repeat indicator “F.RPT” will light.
Each time the button is pressed, the mode Each time the button is pressed, the mode All the tracks in the folder currently
will change as follows: will change as follows: selected will be played repeatedly.

Display change
USB (iPod®) (if equipped) Press “DISP” button (7).
OFF FOLDER RANDOM ALL RANDOM Each time the button is pressed, display
® will change as follows:
Bluetooth audio (if equipped)

AUX (if equipped)

• FOLDER RANDOM Play time
The random indicator “F.RDM” will light.
Selecting a folder The tracks in the currently selected Folder name
Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob (2) folder will be played in random order.
to select the desired folder. • ALL RANDOM File name
The random indicator “RDM” will light.
Selecting a track The tracks in the connected USB device Album name (MP3, AAC only)
• Press UP button (3) to listen to the next will be played in random order.
track. Track title
• Press DOWN button (4) twice to listen to Repeat playback
the previous track. Press “RPT” button (5). Artist name
When DOWN button (4) is pressed Each time the button is pressed, the mode
once, the track currently being played will change as follows:
will start from the beginning again. NOTE:
• “NO TITLE” will be displayed when there
Fast forwarding/rewinding a track is no text information in the disc currently
• Hold down UP button (3) to fast forward OFF FILE REPEAT FOLDER REPEAT being played.
the track. • If text data contains more than 16 char-
• Hold down DOWN button (4) to fast acters, “>” mark will appear at the right
rewind the track. end. Holding down “DISP” button (7) for
1 second or longer can display the next
• FILE REPEAT page.
The repeat indicator “RPT” will light.
The track currently being played will be
played repeatedly.

5-46

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

USB device connection Compression formats

Notes on USB device • When connecting a USB device, make MP3
Compatible USB devices sure that it is properly connected to the • Bit rate:
• USB mass storage class USB port. MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k - 320 kbps
For details as to whether your USB • Do not leave the USB device for long MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps
memory/USB audio is compatible with periods of time inside the vehicle where MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps
USB mass storage class, please contact the temperature can rise too high. • Sampling frequency:
the USB memory/USB audio manufac- • Back up any important data beforehand. MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
turer. We cannot accept responsibility for any MPEG2 Audio Layer III: 16 k/22.05 k/24 kHz
• USB standard compatibility 1.1/2.0 full lost data. MPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k/11.025 k/12 kHz
speed • It is recommended not to connect a USB
• File system FAT12/16/32, VFAT device that contains data files other than WMA (Ver. 7, Ver. 8, Ver. 9*)
• Maximum current less than 1.0 A MP3/WMA/AAC format. • Bit rate: CBR 32 k - 320 kbps
• If devices such as USB hub, extension • Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
cable are connected to the audio sys- Recording MP3/WMA/AAC files on a * WMA 9 Professional/LossLess/Voice are
tem, it may not be recognized. In such USB device not supported.
case, connect the USB device directly to • Playback or display may not be possible
the audio system. depending on the type of USB device in AAC*
• Devices such as MP3 player/mobile use or the condition of the recording. • Bit rate: ABR 16 k - 320 kbps
phone/digital camera may not be recog- • Depending on the connected USB mem- • Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz
nized by the audio system for playing ory, the files may be played in different * Apple Lossless is not supported.
music. order from the stored one.
Maximum number of files/folders
• Maximum number of files: 2500
• Maximum number of files in a folder: 255
• Maximum depth of tree structure: 8
• Maximum number of folders: 255
(Root folder is included.)

5-47

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Display
Listening to an iPod®
(A)
EXAMPLE
Type A

(3) (B) (C)

(4)
(7) (5) (6) (1) (1) “MEDIA” button
(2) “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(3) UP button
(2) (4) DOWN button
(5) “RPT” button
(6) “RDM” button
(8) (7) “DISP” button
(8) PRESET buttons ([1] to [6])
Type B
(A) Track title
(3) (B) Track number
(4) (C) Play time
(7) (5) (6) (1)
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the U.S. and other countries.
(2)

(8)

57RK096

5-48

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Selecting iPod® mode Random playback Display change

Press “MEDIA” button (1). Press “RDM” button (6). Press “DISP” button (7).
Each time the button is pressed, the mode Each time the button is pressed, the mode Each time the button is pressed, display
will change as follows: will change as follows: will change as follows:

USB (iPod®) (if equipped) Album name /

OFF SONG RANDOM ALBUM RANDOM Track title
Bluetooth® audio (if equipped)
Track title /
AUX (if equipped) Play time
• SONG RANDOM Playlist name /
The random indicator “RDM” will light. Track title (Playlist mode only)
Selecting a track The tracks in the iPod® will be played in
• Press UP button (3) to listen to the next random order. Artist name /
track. • ALBUM RANDOM Track title
• Press DOWN button (4) twice to listen to The random indicator “F.RDM” will light.
the previous track. The albums in the iPod® will be played in
When DOWN button (4) is pressed random order. NOTE:
once, the track currently being played If text data contains more than 16 charac-
will start from the beginning again. Repeat playback ters, “>” mark will appear at the right end.
Press “RPT” button (5). Holding down “DISP” button (7) for 1 sec-
Fast forwarding/rewinding a track Each time the button is pressed, the mode ond or longer can display the next page.
• Hold down UP button (3) to fast forward will change as follows:
the track.
• Hold down DOWN button (4) to fast
rewind the track. OFF SONG REPEAT

• SONG REPEAT
The repeat indicator “RPT” will light.
The track currently being played will be
played repeatedly.

5-49

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Playing mode selection * iPhone® is a trademark of Apple Inc.,

1) Press the button numbered [6] of PRE- Notes on iPod® registered in the U.S. and other coun-
SET buttons (8). Supported iPod® tries.
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob • iPod® touch (6th generation) * Apple is not responsible for the opera-
(2). • iPod® touch (5th generation) tion of this device or its compliance with
Each time the knob is turned, the mode • iPod® touch (4th generation) safety and regulatory standards.
will change as follows: • iPod® touch (3rd generation)
• iPod® touch (2nd generation) iPod® connection
PLAYLIST • iPod® touch (1st generation) • Make sure to detach the iPod® after
• iPod® classic turning the ignition switch to “LOCK”
ARTIST • iPod® nano (7th generation) position or pressing the engine switch to
• iPod® nano (6th generation) change the ignition mode to LOCK
ALBUM • iPod® nano (5th generation) (OFF). The iPod® may not be shut down
• iPod® nano (4th generation) when it is being connected and may
SONGS • iPod® nano (3rd generation) result in battery depletion.
• iPod® nano (2nd generation) • Do not connect iPod® accessories such
PODCAST • iPod® nano (1st generation) as an iPod® remote control or head-
• iPod® (5th generation) phones while connecting the iPod® with
GENRE • iPhone® 6S Plus the unit. The unit may not operate cor-
• iPhone® 6S rectly.
AUDIOBOOK • iPhone® 6 Plus
• iPhone® 6
3) Press “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” • iPhone® 5S
knob (2) to select the desired mode. • iPhone® 5C
• iPhone® 5
NOTE: • iPhone® 4S
• When the button numbered [6] of PRE- • iPhone® 4
SET buttons (8) is pressed, the previous • iPhone® 3GS
mode will be displayed. • iPhone® 3G
• iPhone®
* Some functions may not be available
depending on the model of iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the U.S. and other countries.

5-50

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

AUX connection
AUX function To listen to auxiliary audio sources (sold
separately) through the unit, follow the
EXAMPLE instruction below.
Type A 1) Connect the auxiliary audio source to
the AUX/USB socket (separately
attached) with an AUX cable.
2) Press “MEDIA” button (1).
Each time the button is pressed, the
(1) mode will change as follows:

USB (iPod®) (if equipped)

Bluetooth® audio (if equipped)

AUX (if equipped)

Type B

CAUTION
(1) • Before connection, mute the unit,
and also keep the volume of the
auxiliary audio source within a
range that will not cause distortion.
• When the audio source is turned
off, noise may be emitted. Be sure
to turn off the unit or switch to
another mode before turning off the
57RK097 audio source.
(1) “MEDIA” button

5-51

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

NOTE:
• Please consult your place of purchase
for details about whether a given auxil-
iary audio source can be connected and
the proper auxiliary cord to use.
• The volume and tone controls of the
auxiliary audio source can be adjusted
on the unit.
• In AUX mode, the volume setting is dif-
ferent from another mode.

5-52

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Steering switch
Bluetooth® hands-free (if equipped)
EXAMPLE
(10)
EXAMPLE

(9)

(7)
(5) (4)
(8)
(6)

(1) (2) (6) Bluetooth® setup button (on steering

wheel)
(7) OFF HOOK button
(8) ON HOOK button
(9) MUTE switch
(3) (10) “VOL” switch

57RK098

(1) “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob

(2) “VOL PUSH PWR” knob
(3) PRESET buttons
(4) BACK button
(5) Bluetooth® setup button (on control panel)

5-53

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Phone registration 6) When the pairing with the phone is Adjusting the listening volume
established, automatic transfer of the • Turn “VOL PUSH PWR” knob (2) during
To use the hands-free function with this phonebook and the call history a call.
unit, it is required to register the phone becomes selectable. The automatic Turning it clockwise increases the vol-
in advance. transfer starts with “Yes” and it does not ume; turning it counterclockwise
with “No”. decreases the volume.
NOTE: 7) Press ON HOOK button (8). • Press “VOL” switch (10) during a call.
• Up to 5 phones can be registered. Pressing “+” of the switch increases the
• To set up a new phone, disconnect the NOTE: volume; pressing “-” of the switch
audio player from the unit. Connect the • When selecting “Go Back” or pressing decreases the volume.
audio player again after phone setup is BACK button (4), the previous menu will
completed if necessary. be displayed. Adjusting the ring volume
• When attempts to establish the pairing • When registering an additional phone, • Turn “VOL PUSH PWR” knob (2) while a
fail within 60 seconds, the connecting repeat Step from 1). call is coming in.
operation will be canceled. Try to estab- Turning it clockwise increases the vol-
lish the pairing again or refer to the man- Receiving a call ume; turning it counterclockwise
ual of the phone in use for how to Press OFF HOOK button (7) to receive a decreases the volume.
establish the pairing with the phone. call. • Press “VOL” switch (10) during a call.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5) Pressing “+” of the switch increases the
or (6). Ending a call volume; pressing “-” of the switch
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- Press ON HOOK button (8) to end a call. decreases the volume.
played.
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob Rejecting a call (only for supported Adjusting the call or ringtone volume
(1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and models) Follow the instructions below to adjust the
press the knob (1) to determine the Press ON HOOK button (8) to reject a call or ringtone volume.
selection. incoming call. 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob or (6).
Mute of hands-free microphone
(1) to select “Pairing”, and press the The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-
knob (1) to determine the selection. Press MUTE switch (9) to mute the micro-
played.
4) Select “My Car” from the Bluetooth® phone. To cancel the mute, press MUTE
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
menu of the phone and establish the switch (9) again.
(1) to select “Setup Telephone”, and
pairing. press the knob (1) to determine the
Refer to the manual of the phone in use selection.
for further information. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
5) Enter the passkey displayed on the unit (1) to select “Sound Setting”, and press
to the phone. the knob (1) to determine the selection.

5-54

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob Dialing using missed/incoming/ NOTE:

(1) to select “Call Volume” or “Ringtone outgoing calls • When selecting “Go Back” or pressing
Volume”, and press the knob (1) to Follow the instructions below to dial to the BACK button (4), the previous menu will
determine the selection. previously dialed number again. be displayed.
The current call or ringtone volume will • Pressing “Confirm” after selecting “Add
NOTE:
be displayed. Speed Dial” can register the selected
Up to 30 phone numbers of the latest calls
5) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob number in the speed dial.
can be stored. (30 calls including missed,
(1) to select the desired call or ringtone • Pressing “Confirm” after selecting
received and dialed call)
volume, and press the knob (1) to “Delete” can delete the selected number
determine the selection. from the call history.
1) Press OFF HOOK button (7).
The Bluetooth® phonebook menu will
NOTE: Deletion of call history
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing be displayed. Follow the instructions below to delete a
BACK button (4), the previous menu will 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob missed/incoming/outgoing call history.
be displayed. (1) to select “All Calls”, “Missed Calls”, 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
“Incoming Calls” or “Outgoing Calls”,
or (6).
and press the knob (1) to determine the
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-
selection.
played.
To dial from the dialed history or the
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
received history, select “All Calls”,
(1) to select “Setup Telephone”, and
“Missed Calls”, “Incoming Calls” or
press the knob (1) to determine the
“Outgoing Calls” respectively.
selection.
3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(1) to select the desired number, and
(1) to select “Setup Phonebook”, and
press the knob (1) to determine the
press the knob (1) to determine the
selection.
selection.
4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(1) to select “Dial”, and press the knob
(1) to select “Delete History”, and press
(1) or OFF HOOK button (7) to dial to
the knob (1) to determine the selection.
the selected number.
5) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(1) to select “Missed Calls”, “Incoming
Calls”, or “Outgoing Calls”, and press
the knob (1) to determine the selection.

5-55

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

6) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 5) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(1) to select a number to be deleted or (1) to select “Overwrite All” or “Add One (1) to select “Overwrite Call History?”,
“ALL”, and press the knob (1) to deter- Contact”, and press the knob (1) to and press the knob (1) to determine the
mine the selection. determine the selection. selection.
7) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob “Rewrite All (MAX1000): Ok?” or “Rest 5) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(1) to select “Delete?” or “Delete All?”, of Memory XXXX: Ok?” will be dis- (1) to select “Confirm”, and press the
and press the knob (1) to determine the played. knob (1) to transfer the call history from
selection. 6) Press or turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH the phone.
8) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob SOUND” knob (1) to select “Confirm”,
(1) to select “Confirm”, and press the and press the knob (1) to determine the NOTE:
knob (1) to complete the deletion. selection. When selecting “Go Back” or pressing
7) Transfer contacts from the phone. BACK button (4), the previous menu will
NOTE: When the registration is completed, the be displayed.
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing “Setup Phonebook” will be displayed.
BACK button (4), the previous menu will Automatic transfer of phonebook/call
NOTE:
be displayed. history
• When selecting “Go Back” or pressing
You can select whether or not the device
BACK button (4), the previous menu will
Registration in Phonebook transfers the phonebook and the call his-
be displayed.
Follow the instructions below to register tory automatically when the phone is regis-
• Up to 1000 numbers can be registered in
phone numbers in the Phonebook of the tered.
Phonebook.
unit. Follow the instructions below to select.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5) 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
Transfer of call history (Call History)
or (6). or (6).
Follow the instructions below to transfer
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-
call history of the registered phone.
played. played.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(1) to select “Setup Telephone”, and or (6). (1) to select “Setup Telephone”, and
press the knob (1) to determine the The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- press the knob (1) to determine the
selection. played. selection.
3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(1) to select “Setup Phonebook”, and (1) to select “Setup Telephone”, and (1) to select “A.Transfer”, and press the
press the knob (1) to determine the press the knob (1) to determine the knob (1) to determine the selection.
selection. selection. 4) Pressing “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND”
4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob knob (1) switches between “A.transfer
(1) to select “Add Contacts”, and press (1) to select “Call History”, and press On” and “A.transfer Off”.
the knob (1) to determine the selection. the knob (1) to determine the selection.

5-56

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

5) Selecting “Go Back” or pressing the Deletion of registered data (Delete NOTE:
BACK button (4) stores displayed set- Entry) When selecting “Go Back” or pressing
ting and the previous menu is dis- Follow the instructions below to delete a BACK button (4), the previous menu will
played. number registered in phonebook. be displayed.
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
Making a call by phonebook or (6). Registration in speed dial
Follow the instructions below to dial a num- The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- Follow the instructions below to assign a
ber registered in phonebook. played. number to one of PRESET buttons (3) to
1) Press OFF HOOK button (7). 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob use as the speed dial.
The Bluetooth® phonebook menu will (1) to select “Setup Telephone”, and 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
be displayed. press the knob (1) to determine the or (6).
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob selection. The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-
(1) to select “Phonebook”, and press 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob played.
the knob (1) to determine the selection. (1) to select “Setup Phonebook”, and 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob press the knob (1) to determine the (1) to select “Setup Telephone”, and
(1) to select the initial of the name you selection. press the knob (1) to determine the
would like to make a call, and press the 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob selection.
knob (1) to determine the selection. (1) to select “Delete Contacts”, and 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
The registered numbers will be dis- press the knob (1) to determine the (1) to select “Setup Phonebook”, and
played in sequence. If names have selection. press the knob (1) to determine the
been registered together with numbers, 5) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob selection.
the names will be displayed. (1) to select the initial of the name you 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob would like to delete or “ALL”, and press (1) to select “Add Speed Dial”, and
(1) to select the name you would like to the knob (1) to determine the selection. press the knob (1) to determine the
make a call, and press the knob (1) to Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob selection.
determine the selection. (1) to select the name you would like to 5) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob delete, and press the knob (1) to deter- (1) to select the initial of the name you
(1) to select “Dial”, and press the knob mine the selection. would like to register in speed dial, and
(1) or OFF HOOK button (7). 6) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob press the knob (1) to determine the
The displayed number or the number (1) to select “Delete?” or “Delete All?”, selection.
registered with the displayed name will and press the knob (1) to determine the The registered numbers will be dis-
be dialed. selection. played in sequence. If names have
7) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob been registered together with numbers,
(1) to select “Confirm”, and press the the names will be displayed.
knob (1) to complete the deletion. Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(1) to select the name you would like to

5-57

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

register in speed dial, and press the 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob NOTE:
knob (1) to determine the selection. (1) to select “Speed Dials”, and press When selecting “Go Back” or pressing
6) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob the knob (1) to determine the selection. BACK button (4), the previous menu will
(1) to select “Choose Preset”, and 3) Press one of PRESET buttons (3). be displayed.
press one of PRESET buttons (3) to The assigned number will be displayed.
which the selected number is to be If no number is assigned, “No Entry” is Display of device data (Device Name)
assigned. If a number is already displayed. Follow the instructions below to display the
assigned to the selected button, a con- 4) Press OFF HOOK button (7). BD (Bluetooth® Device) address and
firmation message will be displayed. The selected number will be dialed. device name.
Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
(1) to select a confirmation message, Deletion of speed dial (Del Speed Dial) or (6).
and press the knob (1) to complete the Follow the instructions below to delete the The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-
assignment. number assigned for the speed dial. played.
Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 1) Press OFF HOOK button (7). 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(1) to select “Confirm”, and press the The Bluetooth® phonebook menu will (1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and
knob (1) to complete the assignment. be displayed. press the knob (1) to determine the
When the assignment is completed, the 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob selection.
“Setup Phonebook” will be displayed. (1) to select “Speed Dials”, and press 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
the knob (1) to determine the selection. (1) to select “Bluetooth Info”, and press
NOTE:
3) Press one of PRESET buttons (3) to the knob (1) to determine the selection.
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing
which the number to be deleted is 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
BACK button (4), the previous menu will
assigned. (1) to select “Device Name” or “Device
be displayed.
If the number is not registered, “No Address”, and press the knob (1) to dis-
Entry” is displayed. play the device name or the BD (Blue-
One-touch call (Speed dial)
4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob tooth® Device) address.
Follow the instructions below to dial the
(1) to select “Delete”, and press the
number assigned to each of the PRESET NOTE:
knob (1) to determine the selection.
buttons (3). When selecting “Go Back” or pressing
5) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
1) Press OFF HOOK button (7). BACK button (4), the previous menu will
(1) to select “Del Speed Dial”, and
The Bluetooth® phonebook menu will be displayed.
press the knob (1) to determine the
be displayed. selection.
Pressing one of PRESET buttons (3) 6) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
can skip step 2) and the 1st line of step (1) to select “Confirm”, and press the
3). knob (1) to complete the deletion.

5-58

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Reset to the factory defaults Selection of phone (Select Phone) List of phones (List Phones)
Follow the instructions below to reset all Follow the instructions below to select a Follow the instructions below to display the
the settings to the factory defaults. phone to be paired with from the registered names of the registered phones in
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5) phones. sequence.
or (6). 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5) 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- or (6). or (6).
played. The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob played. played.
(1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
press the knob (1) to determine the (1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and (1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and
selection. press the knob (1) to determine the press the knob (1) to determine the
3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob selection. selection.
(1) to select “Initialize”, and press the 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
knob (1) to determine the selection. (1) to select “List Phone”, and press the (1) to select “List Phone”, and press the
4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob knob (1) to determine the selection. knob (1) to determine the selection.
(1) to select “All Initialize”, and press 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob The names of the registered phones
the knob (1) to determine the selection. (1) to select a phone to be paired with, are displayed in sequence.
5) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob and press the knob (1) to determine the
NOTE:
(1) to select “All Initialize”, and press selection.
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing
the knob (1) to determine the selection. 5) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
BACK button (4), the previous menu will
6) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob (1) to select “Select”, and press the
be displayed.
(1) to select “Confirm”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
knob (1) to start the reset.
NOTE: Passkey setting (Set Passkey)
NOTE: • When selecting “Go Back” or pressing Follow the instructions below to set the
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing BACK button (4), the previous menu will security number (passkey).
BACK button (4), the previous menu will be displayed. 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
be displayed. • The Bluetooth® ready audio device will or (6).
be disconnected when the phone is The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-
selected. played.
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and
press the knob (1) to determine the
selection.

5-59

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob Deletion of phone information (Delete BT function on/off (BT Power)
(1) to select “Passkey”, and press the Phone) Follow the instructions below to turn on/off
knob (1) to determine the selection. Follow the instructions below to delete the the Bluetooth® function.
4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob registered phone information. 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5)
(1) to select “Enter New Passkey”, and 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (5) or (6).
press the knob (1) to determine the or (6). The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-
selection. The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- played.
5) Press or turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH played. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
SOUND” knob (1) to select “Confirm”. 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob (1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and
6) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob (1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and press the knob (1) to determine the
(1) to select a number for the first digit, press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
and press the knob (1) to determine the selection. 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
selection. Select and determine num- 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob (1) to select “BT Power”, and press the
bers for the second, third and fourth (1) to select “List Phone”, and press the knob (1) to determine the selection.
digits in order in the same manner. knob (1) to determine the selection. 4) Press “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND”
When not entering up to the eighth 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob knob (1) to select “BT Power On” or “BT
digit, enter blanks for the successive (1) to select a phone to be deleted, and Power Off”.
digits. press the knob (1) to determine the
7) Press “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” selection. NOTE:
knob (1) to determine the passkey set- • When the BT function is turned off, the
5) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
ting. connection between this unit and the
(1) to select “Delete”, and press the
registered phone in use will be discon-
knob (1) to determine the selection.
NOTE: nected.
6) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing • When selecting “Go Back” or pressing
(1) to select “Delete?”, and press the
BACK button (4), the previous menu will BACK button (4), the previous menu will
knob (1) to determine the selection.
be displayed. be displayed.
7) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(1) to select “Confirm”, and press the
knob (1) to determine the selection.
NOTE:
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing
BACK button (4), the previous menu will
be displayed.

5-60

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Steering switch
Bluetooth® audio (if equipped)
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE

(3) (8)
(4)
(7) (1) Display
(A)

(2)

(B)

(5) (6) (1) “MEDIA” button

(2) “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(3) UP button
(4) DOWN button
(5) “DISP” button
(6) BACK button
57RK099 (7) Bluetooth® setup button (on control
panel)
(8) Bluetooth® setup button (on steering
wheel)

(A) Track number

(B) Play time

5-61

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Registration of audio devices NOTE: Fast forwarding/rewinding a track

• When selecting “Go Back” or pressing • Hold down UP button (3) to fast forward
To use Bluetooth® ready audio devices BACK button (6), the previous menu will the track.
with this unit, it is required to register the be displayed. • Hold down DOWN button (4) to fast
devices. • When registering additional audio rewind the track.
devices, repeat Step from 1).
NOTE:
NOTE: Some functions may not be available
• To set up a new audio player, disconnect Selecting Bluetooth® audio mode
depending on Bluetooth® audio.
the phone from the unit. Connect the Press “MEDIA” button (1).
phone after audio player setup is com- Each time the button is pressed, the mode
will change as follows: Display change
pleted if necessary. Press “DISP” button (5).
• When attempts to establish the pairing Each time the button is pressed, display
fail within 60 seconds, the connecting USB (iPod®) (if equipped) will change as follows:
operation will be canceled. Try to estab-
lish the pairing again or refer to the audio Bluetooth® audio (if equipped)
player manual for assistance with the
pairing process. Play time
AUX (if equipped)
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (7)
or (8). Track name
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- Selecting a group (only for supported
played. models) Artist name
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob (2)
(2) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and to select a group. Album name
press the knob (2) to determine the
selection. Selecting a track NOTE:
3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob • Press UP button (3) to listen to the next If text data contains more than 16 charac-
(2) to select “Pairing”, and press the track. ters, “>” mark will appear at the right end.
knob (2) to determine the selection. • Press DOWN button (4) twice to listen to Holding down “DISP” button (5) for 1 sec-
4) Select “My Car” from the Bluetooth® the previous track. ond or longer can display the next page.
menu of the audio player and establish When DOWN button (4) is pressed
the pairing. once, the track currently being played
Refer to the manual of the audio player will start from the beginning again.
in use for further information.
5) Enter the passkey displayed on the unit
to the audio player.

5-62

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Selection of audio device (Select Audio) List of audio devices (List Audio) 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
Follow the instructions below to select an Follow the instructions below to display the (2) to select “Passkey”, and press the
audio device to be paired with from the names of the registered audio devices in knob (2) to determine the selection.
registered audio devices. sequence. 4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (7) 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (7) (2) to select “Enter New Passkey”, and
or (8). or (8). press the knob (2) to determine the
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- selection.
played. played. 5) Press or turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob SOUND” knob (2) to select “Confirm”.
(2) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and (2) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and 6) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
press the knob (2) to determine the press the knob (2) to determine the (2) to select a number for the first digit,
selection. selection. and press the knob (2) to determine the
3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob selection. Select and determine num-
(2) to select “List Audio”, and press the (2) to select “List Audio”, and press the bers for the second, third and fourth
knob (2) to determine the selection. knob (2) to determine the selection. digits in order in the same manner.
4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob The names of registered audio devices When not entering up to the eighth
(2) to select an audio device to be will be displayed in sequence. digit, enter blanks for the successive
used, and press the knob (2) to deter- digits.
NOTE:
mine the selection. 7) Press “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND”
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing
5) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob knob (2) to determine the passkey set-
BACK button (6), the previous menu will
(2) to select “Select”, and press the ting.
be displayed.
knob (2) to determine the selection.
NOTE:
NOTE: Passkey setting (Set Passkey) When selecting “Go Back” or pressing
• When selecting “Go Back” or pressing Follow the instructions below to set the BACK button (6), the previous menu will
BACK button (6), the previous menu will security number (Passkey). be displayed.
be displayed. 1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (7)
• The phone will be disconnected when or (8).
the Bluetooth® ready audio device is The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-
selected. played.
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(2) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and
press the knob (2) to determine the
selection.

5-63

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Deletion of audio device information

(Delete Audio) Disclaimer for Bluetooth® function Remote audio controls (if equipped)
Follow the instructions below to delete the • Depending on compatibility of mobile Controlling basic functions of the audio
registered audio device information. phone models, no Bluetooth® function system is available using the switches on
1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (7) can be used, or some Bluetooth® func- the steering wheel.
or (8). tions may be restricted.
The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis- • Connectivity or voice quality may get EXAMPLE
played. affected depending on circumstances.
2) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob • After the engine switch is pressed to
(2) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, and change the ignition mode to ON, the (1) (3) (4)
press the knob (2) to determine the audio system takes few seconds to
selection. detect and connect to the Bluetooth® (4)
3) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob device (if already paired).
(2) to select “List Audio”, and press the
knob (2) to determine the selection.
4) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(2) to select an audio device to be (2)
deleted, and press the knob (2) to
determine the selection.
5) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob 56RH00552
(2) to select “Delete”, and press the
knob (2) to determine the selection.
6) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(2) to select “Delete?”, and press the
knob (2) to determine the selection.
7) Turn “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(2) to select “Confirm”, and press the
knob (2) to complete the deletion.
NOTE:
When selecting “Go Back” or pressing
BACK button (6), the previous menu will
be displayed.

5-64

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Adjusting the volume Selecting the radio station (AM, FM1,

• To increase the volume, hold down the FM2, DAB1, DAB2 mode)
AM (Radio)
VOLUME knob (1) to “+” side. The vol- • To select the next preset station, press
ume will continue to increase until the “> ” of the switch (4) only for a moment.
FM1 (Radio)
switch is released. • To select the previous preset station,
• To decrease the volume, hold down the press “< ” of the switch (4) only for a
FM2 (Radio)
VOLUME knob (1) to “-” side. The vol- moment.
ume will continue to decrease until the • To scan a higher frequency radio station,
CD
switch is released. press “> ” of the switch (4) for 1 second
• To mute the sound, press the switch (2). or longer.
Bluetooth® audio (if equipped)
• To scan a lower frequency radio station,
Selecting the mode press “ < ” of the switch (4) for 1 second
AUX (if equipped)
Press the “MODE” switch (3). or longer.
Each time the switch is pressed, the mode
USB (iPod®) (if equipped)
will change as follows: Selecting the track (CD, USB (iPod®),
Bluetooth® audio mode)
• To skip to the next track, press “> ” of the
It is possible to turn on the audio system
switch (4) only for a moment.
by pressing the switch (3).
• To skip to the previous track, press “ < ” of
the switch (4) twice only for a moment.
When the switch (4) is pushed down
once only for a moment, the track cur-
rently being played will start from the
beginning again.

Fast forwarding/rewinding a track

• To fast forward a track, press “> ” of the
switch (4) for 1 second or longer.
• To fast rewind a track, press “ < ” of the
switch (4) for 1 second or longer.

5-65

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Anti-theft feature
(1) “VOL PUSH PWR” knob
EXAMPLE (2) PRESET buttons ([1] to [6])
Type A (3) UP button
(4) “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” knob
(3)

(4) (1)

(2)
Type B
(3)

(4) (1)

(2)

57RK100

5-66

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

The anti-theft function is intended to dis- Setting the anti-theft function Canceling the anti-theft feature
courage thefts. For example, when the 1) Press “VOL PUSH PWR” knob (1) to To cancel the anti-theft function, delete the
audio system is installed in another vehi- power off. registered PIN.
cle, it will become unable to operate. 2) Hold down the buttons numbered [1] 1) Press “VOL PUSH PWR” knob (1) to
This function works by entering a Personal and [6] of PRESET buttons (2) and power off.
Identification Number (PIN). press “VOL PUSH PWR” knob (1). 2) Hold down the buttons numbered [1]
When the unit is disconnected from its “SECURITY” will be displayed. and [6] of PRESET buttons (2) and
power source, such as when the audio 3) Press UP button (3) and the button press “VOL PUSH PWR” knob (1).
system is removed or the battery is discon- numbered [1] of PRESET buttons (2) “PIN ENTRY” will be displayed.
nected, the unit will become inoperable simultaneously. 3) Press UP button (3) and the button
until the PIN is reentered. 4) Enter a 4-digit number to be registered numbered [1] of PRESET buttons (2)
as PIN using the buttons numbered [1] - simultaneously.
[4] of PRESET buttons (2). 4) Enter a 4-digit number to be registered
5) Hold down “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND” as PIN using the buttons numbered [1] -
knob (4) for 1 second or longer to set [4] of PRESET buttons (2).
the anti-theft function. 5) Hold down “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND”
knob (4) for 1 second or longer to
NOTE: delete the registered PIN. The indica-
Take a note of the registered PIN and keep tion “----” will be displayed and the anti-
it for the future use. theft function will be canceled.
NOTE:
To change your PIN, first delete your cur-
rent PIN, and then set a new one.

5-67

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Confirming the Personal Identification

Number (PIN)
When the main power source is discon-
nected such as when the battery is
replaced, etc, it is required to enter the PIN
to operate the unit again.
1) Set the ignition switch to “ACC” position
or the ignition mode to “ON”.
“SECURITY” will be displayed.
2) Press UP button (3) and the button
numbered [1] of PRESET buttons (2)
simultaneously.
3) Enter a 4-digit number to be registered
as PIN using the buttons numbered [1] -
[4] of PRESET buttons (2).
4) Hold down “TUNE/FLD PUSH SOUND”
knob (4) for 1 second or longer.
When the same PIN as registered is
entered, the power of the audio system
will be turned off automatically and it
will become operable again.
NOTE:
If an incorrect PIN is entered, “ERROR”
and the total number of incorrect entry
attempts will be displayed.
If an incorrect PIN is entered 10 times,
“HELP” will be displayed and the audio
system will become inoperable.

5-68

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Troubleshooting
When encountering a problem, check and follow the instructions below.
If the described suggestions do not solve the problem, it is recommended to take the unit to your authorized SUZUKI dealer.

Problem Possible cause Possible solution

Common
When “SECURITY” is displayed, enter
the PIN.
Unable to operate The security function is on.
When “HELP” is displayed, contact your
authorized SUZUKI dealer.
Unable to turn on the power
Fuse is blown. Contact your authorized SUZUKI dealer.
(No sound is produced)

Radio
It may not be exactly tuned in to the sta-
Much noise Tune it in exactly to the station.
tion.
There may be no station emitting signals
Unable to receive by auto tuning Pick up a station by manual tuning.
powerful enough.

CD

The disc is dirty. Wipe the disc with a soft cloth.

Sound skips or noise produced
The disc has a major scratch or is Replace the disc with the one which has
warped. no scratch and warp.

5-69

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Problem Possible cause Possible solution

MP3/WMA/AAC
The disc contains unsupported formatted
No playback Check the file format.
data.
Sound skipping may occur when playing
Sound skips or noise produced It is not recommended to play VBR files.
VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files.

USB
There is no supported format file to play
Check the file format.
Playback does not start when the USB on this unit.
device is connected The current consumption of the USB Use a USB device with a current con-
device exceeds 1.0 A. sumption lower than 1.0 A.

Bluetooth®
The distance between this unit and the
Bluetooth® ready device is too far, or a Change the location of the Bluetooth®
metallic object may be located between ready device.
the Bluetooth® ready device and this unit.
Pairing failed
Refer to the manual of the Bluetooth®
The Bluetooth® function of the Bluetooth® ready device. (Some devices have the
ready device is off. power saving function that automatically
activates after a certain time.)
Your current location may be out of ser- Drive your vehicle to the service area of
Unable to receive a call
vice area. the phone.
The voice quality of hands-free is low Another wireless device may be located Switch off the wireless device or keep it
(Distortion, noise etc.) near the unit. away from the unit.

5-70

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Error display messages

Display Possible cause Possible solution

CD
Insert the disc with its label side up.
Check the disc if it is not warped or is free of flaws.
“ERROR 1” The disc cannot be read.
When “ERROR 1” does not disappear even when a nor-
mal disc is inserted, contact your dealer.
When the CD is in the unit, press the CD eject button to
The player developed an error of an
“ERROR 3” remove the disc.
unidentified cause.
When the disc cannot be ejected, contact your dealer.

USB/iPod®

“ERROR 1” The USB device is disconnected. Check the connection of the USB device.

Impossible to communicate correctly with Unplug the USB device and plug it again.
“ERROR 2”
the USB device. Check the USB device.
Unplug the USB device and plug it again.
“ERROR 3” Inoperable due to an unidentified cause. When “ERROR 3” does not disappear, contact your
dealer.
The current consumption of the USB
“ERROR 4” Check the USB device.
device exceeds 1.0 A.

5-71

57RK0-14E
 OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Display Possible cause Possible solution

Bluetooth®
Disconnect the Bluetooth® ready device and connect it
The player developed an error of an again.
“ERROR 1”
unidentified cause. When “ERROR 1” does not disappear, contact your
dealer.
“CONNECTION
Failed to establish pairing or connection Try to establish the pairing or connection again.
FAILED”
Delete registered data of unnecessary number in phone-
Reached the limit for the number of phone-
“MEMORY FULL” book and try to transfer the register phone numbers in
book data in transfer
the phonebook again.

“NOT AVAILABLE” Inoperable during driving Operate the system after pulling over your car.

5-72

57RK0-14E
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

MEMO

5-73

57RK0-14E
 VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING

Vehicle loading .................................................................... 6-1
Trailer towing ....................................................................... 6-1

54G215

57RK0-14E
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING

Vehicle loading WARNING Trailer towing

Your vehicle was designed for specific Never overload your vehicle. The Your SUZUKI was originally designed to
weight capacities. The weight capacities of gross vehicle weight (sum of the carry people and a normal amount of
your vehicle are indicated by the Gross weights of the vehicle, all the occu- cargo, not to tow a trailer.
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the pants, accessories, cargo plus trailer
Permissible maximum Axle Weight (PAW, nose weight if towing a trailer) must
front and rear). The GVWR and PAW (front never exceed the Gross Vehicle
and rear) are listed in “SPECIFICATIONS” Weight Rating (GVWR). In addition,
section. never distribute a load so that the
weight on either the front or rear axle
GVWR – Maximum permissible overall exceeds the Permissible maximum
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including Axle Weight (PAW).
all the occupants, accessories and cargo
plus the trailer nose weight if towing a
trailer). WARNING
PAW (front and rear) – Maximum permissi- Always distribute cargo evenly. To
ble weight on an individual axle. avoid personal injury or damage to
your vehicle, always secure cargo to
Actual weight of the loaded vehicle and prevent it from shifting if the vehicle
actual loads at the front and rear axles can moves suddenly. Place heavier
only be determined by weighing the vehi- objects on the floor and as far for-
cle. Compare these weights to the GVWR ward in the cargo area as possible.
and PAW (front and rear). If the gross vehi- Never pile cargo higher than the top
cle weight or the load on either axle of the seat backs.
exceeds these ratings, you must remove
enough weight to bring the load down to
the rated capacity.

6-1

57RK0-14E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Maintenance schedule ........................................................ 7-2
Periodic maintenance schedule ........................................ 7-3
Maintenance recommended under severe driving
conditions ............................................................................ 7-8
Drive belt .............................................................................. 7-13
Engine oil and filter ............................................................. 7-13
Engine coolant .................................................................... 7-17
Air cleaner ............................................................................ 7-19
Spark plugs .......................................................................... 7-19
Gear oil ................................................................................. 7-20
Clutch pedal ......................................................................... 7-21
Continuously Variable Transaxle (CVT) fluid ................... 7-21 7
Brakes .................................................................................. 7-23
Steering wheel ..................................................................... 7-25
Tires ...................................................................................... 7-26
Battery .................................................................................. 7-28
60G410
Fuses .................................................................................... 7-30
Headlight aiming ................................................................. 7-33
Bulb replacement ................................................................ 7-34
Wiper blades ........................................................................ 7-40
Windshield washer fluid ..................................................... 7-43
Air conditioning system ..................................................... 7-43

57RK0-14E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

WARNING WARNING
(Continued) (Continued)
• When the engine is running, keep • Keep used oil, coolant, and other
hands, clothing, tools, and other fluids away from children and pets.
objects away from the fan and drive Dispose of used fluids properly;
belt. Even though the fan may not never pour them on the ground,
60B128S
be moving, it can automatically into sewers, etc.
turn on without warning.
WARNING • When it is necessary to perform
service work with the engine run-
Take extreme care when working on ning, check that the parking brake
your vehicle to prevent accidental is set fully and the transaxle is in
injury. Carefully observe the follow-
ing precautions: Neutral (for manual transaxle vehi-
• To prevent damage or unintended cles) or Park (for CVT vehicles).
activation of the air bag system or • Do not touch ignition wires or other
seat belt pretensioner system, check ignition system parts when starting
that the lead-acid battery is discon- the engine or when the engine is
nected and the ignition switch has running, or you could receive an
been in “LOCK” position or the igni- electric shock.
tion mode has been LOCK (OFF) for • Be careful not to touch a hot
at least 90 seconds before perform- engine, exhaust manifold and
ing any electrical service work on pipes, muffler, radiator and water
your SUZUKI vehicle. Do not touch hoses.
air bag system components, seat • Do not allow smoking, sparks, or
belt pretensioner system compo- flames around fuel or the battery.
nents or wires. Flammable fumes are present.
The wires are wrapped with yellow • Do not get under your vehicle if it is
tape or yellow tubing, and the cou- supported only with the portable
plers are yellow for easy identifica- jack provided in your vehicle.
tion. • Be careful not to cause accidental
• Do not leave the engine running in
garages or other confined areas. short circuits between the positive
(Continued) and negative battery terminals.
(Continued)

7-1

57RK0-14E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Maintenance schedule NOTICE

The following table shows the times when Whenever it becomes necessary to
you should perform regular maintenance replace parts on your vehicle, it is
on your vehicle. This table shows in miles, recommended that you use genuine
kilometers and months when you should SUZUKI replacement parts or their
perform inspections, adjustments, lubrica- equivalent.
tion and other services. These intervals
should be shortened if driving is usually
done under severe conditions (refer to
“Maintenance recommended under severe
driving conditions”).

WARNING
SUZUKI recommends that mainte-
nance on items marked with an aster-
isk (*) be performed by an authorized
SUZUKI dealer or a qualified service
technician. If you are qualified, you
may perform maintenance on the
unmarked items by referring to the
instructions in this section. If you are
not sure whether you can success-
fully complete any of the unmarked
maintenance jobs, ask an authorized
SUZUKI dealer to do the maintenance
for you.

7-2

57RK0-14E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Periodic maintenance schedule

“R” : Replace or Change
“I” : Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary

NOTE:
This table shows the service schedule up to 180000 km (108000 miles). Beyond 180000 km (108000 miles), perform the same services
at the same intervals shown in the chart.

7-3

57RK0-14E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Interval: This interval should be judged by km (x1000) 15 30 45 60 75 90

odometer reading or months, whichever comes miles (x1000) 9 18 27 36 45 54
first. months 12 24 36 48 60 72
ENGINE
*1-1. Engine accessory drive belt Tension check, *Adjustment, *Replacement – – I – – R
*1-2. Valve clearance – I – I – I
1-3. Engine oil and engine oil filter R R R R R R
1-4. Engine coolant SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) (#1) First time only: Replace at 150000 km (90000 miles) or 96 months.
Second time and after: Replace every 75000 km (45000 miles) or 48 months.
SUZUKI LLC: Standard (Green) – – R – – R
*1-5. Exhaust system (except catalyst) – I – I – I
IGNITION
*2-1. Spark plugs Iridium plug Replace every 105000 km (63000 miles) or 84 months.
FUEL
3-1. Air cleaner filter element Paved-road I I R I I R
Dusty condition Refer to “Severe driving condition” schedule.
*3-2. Fuel lines – I – I – I
*3-3. Fuel filter Replace every 105000 km (63000 miles).
*3-4. Fuel tank – – I – – I
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
*4-1. PCV valve – – – – – I
*4-2. Fuel evaporative emission control system – – – – – I
#1: Perform the engine coolant level check under the daily inspection in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.
If you use the engine coolant other than “SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue)” for replacement, follow the schedule of “SUZUKI LLC: Stan-
dard (Green)”. (Replace every 45000 km (27000 miles) or 36 months.)

7-4

57RK0-14E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Interval: This interval should be judged by km (x1000) 105 120 135 150 165 180
odometer reading or months, whichever comes miles (x1000) 63 72 81 90 99 108
first. months 84 96 108 120 132 144
ENGINE
*1-1. Engine accessory drive belt Tension check, *Adjustment, *Replacement – – I – – R
*1-2. Valve clearance – I – I – I
1-3. Engine oil and engine oil filter R R R R R R
1-4. Engine coolant SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) (#1) First time only: Replace at 150000 km (90000 miles) or 96 months.
Second time and after: Replace every 75000 km (45000 miles) or 48 months.
SUZUKI LLC: Standard (Green) – – R – – R
*1-5. Exhaust system (except catalyst) – I – I – I
IGNITION
*2-1. Spark plugs Iridium plug Replace every 105000 km (63000 miles) or 84 months.
FUEL
3-1. Air cleaner filter element Paved-road I I R I I R
Dusty condition Refer to “Severe driving condition” schedule.
*3-2. Fuel lines – I – I – I
*3-3. Fuel filter Replace every 105000 km (63000 miles).
*3-4. Fuel tank – – I – – I
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
*4-1. PCV valve – – – – – I
*4-2. Fuel evaporative emission control system – – – – – I
#1: Perform the engine coolant level check under the daily inspection in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.
If you use the engine coolant other than “SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue)” for replacement, follow the schedule of “SUZUKI LLC: Stan-
dard (Green)”. (Replace every 45000 km (27000 miles) or 36 months.)

7-5

57RK0-14E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Interval: This interval should be judged by km (x1000) 15 30 45 60 75 90

odometer reading or months, whichever miles (x1000) 9 18 27 36 45 54
comes first. months 12 24 36 48 60 72
BRAKE
*5-1. Brake discs and pads (front) (rear (if equipped)) I I I I I I
Brake drums and shoes (rear (if equipped)) – I – I – I
*5-2. Brake hoses and pipes – I – I – I
*5-3. Brake fluid (#2) – R – R – R
*5-4. Brake (Pedal and fluid level) I I I I I I
5-5. Parking brake lever and cable Check, *Adjustment (1st 15000 km only) I – – – – –
CHASSIS AND BODY
*6-1. Clutch fluid (#2) – R – R – R
*6-2. Clutch (pedal and fluid level) I I I I I I
6-3. Tires/Wheels I I I I I I
*6-4. Wheel bearings – I – I – I
*6-5. Drive axle boots – – I – – I
*6-6. Suspension system – I – I – I
*6-7. Steering system – I – I – I
*6-8. Manual transaxle oil Genuine “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” Inspect every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
Other than “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” (I: 1st 15000 km only) I – R – – R
6-9. Continuously variable transaxle (CVT) Fluid level – I – I – I
6-10. All latches, hinges and locks – I – I – I
*6-11. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped) – I R – I R
#2: Clutch fluid is supplied from brake fluid reservoir.

WARNING
The shock absorbers are filled with high pressure gas. Never attempt to disassemble them or throw them into a fire. Avoid
storing them near a heater or heating device. When scrapping the absorber, the gas must be released from the absorber
safely. Ask an authorized SUZUKI dealer for assistance.

7-6

57RK0-14E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Interval: This interval should be judged by km (x1000) 105 120 135 150 165 180
odometer reading or months, whichever miles (x1000) 63 72 81 90 99 108
comes first. months 84 96 108 120 132 144
BRAKE
*5-1. Brake discs and pads (front) (rear (if equipped)) I I I I I I
Brake drums and shoes (rear (if equipped)) – I – I – I
*5-2. Brake hoses and pipes – I – I – I
*5-3. Brake fluid (#2) – R – R – R
*5-4. Brake (Pedal and fluid level) I I I I I I
5-5. Parking brake lever and cable Check, *Adjustment (1st 15000 km only) – – – – – –
CHASSIS AND BODY
*6-1. Clutch fluid (#2) – R – R – R
*6-2. Clutch (pedal and fluid level) I I I I I I
6-3. Tires/Wheels I I I I I I
*6-4. Wheel bearings – I – I – I
*6-5. Drive axle boots – – I – – I
*6-6. Suspension system – I – I – I
*6-7. Steering system – I – I – I
*6-8. Manual transaxle oil Genuine “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” Inspect every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
Other than “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” (I: 1st 15000 km only) – – R – – R
6-9. Continuously variable transaxle (CVT) Fluid level – I – I – I
6-10. All latches, hinges and locks – I – I – I
*6-11. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped) – I R – I R
#2: Clutch fluid is supplied from brake fluid reservoir.

7-7

57RK0-14E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Maintenance recommended under severe driving conditions

Follow this schedule if your vehicle is mainly operated under one or more of the following conditions:
• When most trips are less than 6 km (4 miles).
• When most trips are less than 16 km (10 miles) and outside temperature remains below freezing.
• Idling and/or low-speed operation in stop-and-go traffic.
• Operating in extremely cold weather and/or on salted roads.
• Operating in rough and/or muddy areas.
• Operating in dusty areas.
• Repeated high speed drive or high engine revolutions.
• Towing a trailer, if admitted.
Schedule should also be followed if the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi or other commercial applications.

7-8

57RK0-14E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Interval: This interval should be judged by km (x1000) 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45

odometer reading or months, whichever comes miles (x1000) 4.5 9 13.5 18 22.5 27
first. months 6 12 18 24 30 36
ENGINE
*1-1. Engine accessory drive belt Tension check, *Adjustment, *Replacement – I – I – R
*1-2. Valve clearance – – – I – –
1-3. Engine oil and engine oil filter R R R R R R
1-4. Engine coolant SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) (#1) First time only: Replace at 150000 km (90000 miles) or 96 months.
Second time and after: Replace every 75000 km (45000 miles) or 48 months.
SUZUKI LLC: Standard (Green) – – – – – R
*1-5. Exhaust system (except catalyst) – – – I – –
IGNITION
*2-1. Spark plugs Iridium plug – – – – R –
FUEL
3-1. Air cleaner filter element*1 Inspect every 2500 km (1500 miles).
Replace every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
*3-2. Fuel lines – – – I – –
*3-3. Fuel filter Replace every 105000 km (63000 miles).
*3-4. Fuel tank – – – – – I
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
*4-1. PCV valve – – – – – –
*4-2. Fuel evaporative emission control system – – – – – –
#1: Perform the engine coolant level check under the daily inspection in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.
If you use the engine coolant other than “SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue)” for replacement, follow the schedule of “SUZUKI LLC: Stan-
dard (Green)”. (Replace every 45000 km (27000 miles) or 36 months.)

7-9

57RK0-14E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Interval: This interval should be judged by km (x1000) 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90

odometer reading or months, whichever comes miles (x1000) 31.5 36 40.5 45 49.5 54
first. months 42 48 54 60 66 72
ENGINE
*1-1. Engine accessory drive belt Tension check, *Adjustment, *Replacement – I – I – R
*1-2. Valve clearance – I – – – I
1-3. Engine oil and engine oil filter R R R R R R
1-4. Engine coolant SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) (#1) First time only: Replace at 150000 km (90000 miles) or 96 months.
Second time and after: Replace every 75000 km (45000 miles) or 48 months.
SUZUKI LLC: Standard (Green) – – – – – R
*1-5. Exhaust system (except catalyst) – I – – – I
IGNITION
*2-1. Spark plugs Iridium plug – R – – – R
FUEL
3-1. Air cleaner filter element*1 Inspect every 2500 km (1500 miles).
Replace every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
*3-2. Fuel lines – I – – – I
*3-3. Fuel filter Replace every 105000 km (63000 miles).
*3-4. Fuel tank – – – – – I
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
*4-1. PCV valve – – – – – I
*4-2. Fuel evaporative emission control system – – – – – I
#1: Perform the engine coolant level check under the daily inspection in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.
If you use the engine coolant other than “SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue)” for replacement, follow the schedule of “SUZUKI LLC: Stan-
dard (Green)”. (Replace every 45000 km (27000 miles) or 36 months.)

7-10

57RK0-14E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Interval: This interval should be judged by km (x1000) 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45

odometer reading or months, whichever miles (x1000) 4.5 9 13.5 18 22.5 27
comes first. months 6 12 18 24 30 36
BRAKE
*5-1. Brake discs and pads (front) (rear (if equipped)) – I – I – I
Brake drums and shoes (rear (if equipped)) – – – I – –
*5-2. Brake hoses and pipes – – – I – –
*5-3. Brake fluid (#2) – – – R – –
*5-4. Brake (Pedal and fluid level) – I – I – I
5-5. Parking brake lever and cable Check, *Adjustment (1st 15000 km only) – I – – – –
CHASSIS AND BODY
*6-1. Clutch fluid (#2) – – – R – –
*6-2. Clutch (pedal and fluid level) – I – I – I
6-3. Tires/Wheels – I – I – I
*6-4. Wheel bearings – I – I – I
*6-5. Drive axle boots – I – I – I
*6-6. Suspension system – – – I – –
*6-7. Steering system – – – I – –
*6-8. Manual transaxle oil Genuine “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” Inspect every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
Replace every 60000 km (36000 miles) or 48 months.
Other than “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” – – – R – –
6-9. Continuously variable transaxle (CVT) Fluid level – – – I – –
*Fluid deterioration check*2 – – – I – –
*Fluid change Replace every 75000 km (45000 miles).
6-10. All latches, hinges and locks – – – I – –
*6-11. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped)*3 – I – I – R
#2: Clutch fluid is supplied from brake fluid reservoir.

WARNING
The shock absorbers are filled with high pressure gas. Never attempt to disassemble them or throw them into a fire. Avoid
storing them near a heater or heating device. When scrapping the absorber, the gas must be released from the absorber
safely. Ask an authorized SUZUKI dealer for assistance.

7-11

57RK0-14E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Interval: This interval should be judged by km (x1000) 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90

odometer reading or months, whichever miles (x1000) 31.5 36 40.5 45 49.5 54
comes first. months 42 48 54 60 66 72
BRAKE
*5-1. Brake discs and pads (front) (rear (if equipped)) – I – I – I
Brake drums and shoes (rear (if equipped)) – I – – – I
*5-2. Brake hoses and pipes – I – – – I
*5-3. Brake fluid (#2) – R – – – R
*5-4. Brake (Pedal and fluid level) – I – I – I
5-5. Parking brake lever and cable Check, *Adjustment (1st 15000 km only) – – – – – –
CHASSIS AND BODY
*6-1. Clutch fluid (#2) – R – – – R
*6-2. Clutch (pedal and fluid level) – I – I – I
6-3. Tires/Wheels – I – I – I
*6-4. Wheel bearings – I – I – I
*6-5. Drive axle boots – I – I – I
*6-6. Suspension system – I – – – I
*6-7. Steering system – I – – – I
*6-8. Manual transaxle oil Genuine “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” Inspect every 30000 km (18000 miles) or 24 months.
Replace every 60000 km (36000 miles) or 48 months.
Other than “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” – R – – – R
6-9. Continuously variable transaxle (CVT) Fluid level – I – – – I
*Fluid deterioration check*2 – I – – – I
*Fluid change Replace every 75000 km (45000 miles).
6-10. All latches, hinges and locks – I – – – I
*6-11. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped)*3 – I – I – R
#2: Clutch fluid is supplied from brake fluid reservoir.

NOTE:
This table shows the service schedule up to 90000 km (54000 miles).
Beyond 90000 km (54000 miles), perform the same services at the same intervals shown in the chart.
*1 Inspect more frequently if the vehicle is used under dusty conditions.
*2 Check or replace as necessary if you usually drive with high speed or high engine revolutions.
*3 Clean more frequently if the air flow from the air conditioner decreases.

7-12

57RK0-14E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Drive belt Engine oil and filter

(2) (1)
(3)
WARNING (b) (a) Specified oil
When the engine is running, keep
hands, hair, clothing, tools, etc. away
from the moving fan and drive belts.
5W-30
Check that the drive belt tension is correct (1)
0W-20
while the engine is stopped. If the belt is (4) (5)
0W-16
too loose, insufficient battery charging,
engine overheating, poor air conditioning, o
C -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40
or excessive belt wear can result. When 57RK119
o
F -22 -4 14 32 50 68 86 104
you push the belt with your thumb midpoint
between the pulleys, there should be a (1) Vehicle front (2) Vehicle rear
deflection according to the following chart. (3) Water pump (4) Generator 57RK120

The belts should also be examined to (5) Air conditioner compressor (1) Preferred
ensure that they are not damaged.
Drive belt deflection (100 N (10 kg, 22 Check that the engine oil you use comes
If you need to replace or adjust the belt lbs) press) under the quality classification as listed
have it done by an authorized SUZUKI below:
dealer. (a) New:
4.8 - 5.9 mm (0.19 - 0.23 in.) • API SL, SM or SN
Readjustment: Select the appropriate oil viscosity accord-
7.1 - 8.2 mm (0.28 - 0.32 in.) ing to the above chart.
(b) New: SAE 0W-16 (1) is the best choice for good
3.4 - 4.3 mm (0.13 - 0.17 in.) fuel economy, and good starting in cold
Readjustment: weather.
5.3 - 6.0 mm (0.21 - 0.24 in.)
NOTE:
We recommend that you use SUZUKI gen-
uine oil. To purchase it, see an authorized
SUZUKI dealer.

7-13

57RK0-14E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

It is important to keep the engine oil at the

Oil level check correct level for proper lubrication of your Refilling
vehicle’s engine. Check the oil level with
the vehicle on a level surface. The oil level EXAMPLE
indication may be inaccurate if the vehicle
is on a slope. The oil level should be
checked either before starting the engine
or at least 5 minutes after stopping the Open Close
engine.
The handle of the engine oil dipstick is col-
ored with yellow for easy identification.
Pull out the oil dipstick, wipe the oil off with
a clean cloth, insert the dipstick all the way
into the engine, and then remove it again.
The oil on the stick should be between the
upper and lower limits shown on the stick.
80G064 52RM60020
If the oil level indication is near the lower
limit, add enough oil to raise the level to Remove the oil filler cap and pour oil slowly
Upper through the filler hole to bring the oil level
EXAMPLE Lower
the upper limit.
to the upper limit on the dipstick. Be careful
NOTICE not to overfill the oil. Too much oil is almost
as bad as too little oil. After refilling, start the
Failure to check the oil level regularly engine and allow it to idle for about a min-
could lead to serious engine trouble ute. Stop the engine, wait about 5 minutes
due to insufficient oil. and check the oil level again.

52D084

7-14

57RK0-14E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Changing engine oil and filter

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
Drain the engine oil while the engine is still
warm.
Open Close
EXAMPLE

52RM60030 60G306

2) Remove the oil filler cap. Tightening torque for drain plug:
3) Place a drain pan under the drain plug. 35 Nm (3.6 kg-m, 25.8 lb-ft)
4) Using a wrench, remove the drain plug
52RM70010 and drain the engine oil. WARNING
1) Remove the bolts and screws, and then Engine oil can be hazardous. Chil-
remove the engine undercover. CAUTION dren and pets may be harmed by
The engine oil temperature may be swallowing new or used oil. Keep
high enough to burn your fingers new and used oil and used oil filters
when the drain plug is loosened. Wait away from children and pets.
until the drain plug is cool enough to Repeated, prolonged contact with
touch with your bare hands. used engine oil may cause skin can-
cer.
Brief contact with used oil may irri-
tate skin.
(Continued)

7-15

57RK0-14E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Tightening (viewed from filter top)

WARNING Oil filter replacement
(Continued) 1) Using an oil filter wrench, turn the oil fil-
To minimize your exposure to used ter counterclockwise and remove it.
oil, wear a long-sleeve shirt and 2) Using a clean rag, wipe off the mount-
moisture-proof gloves (such as dish- ing surface on the engine where the
washing gloves) when changing oil. If new filter will be seated.
oil contacts your skin, wash thor- 3) Smear a small amount of engine oil
oughly with soap and water. around the rubber gasket of the new oil
Launder any clothing or rags if it is filter.
with oil. 4) Screw the new filter by hand until the fil-
Recycle or properly dispose of used ter gasket contacts the mounting sur-
oil and oil filters. face.

5) Reinstall the drain plug with new gas- 54G093

ket. Tighten the plug with a wrench to (1) Oil filter

the specified torque. (2) 3/4 turn

NOTICE
To tighten the oil filter properly, it is
important to accurately identify the
position at which the filter gasket
first contacts the mounting surface.

54G092

(1) Loosen
(2) Tighten

7-16

57RK0-14E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

5) Tighten the filter as specified below

from the point of contact with the Refill with oil and oil leakage check Engine coolant
mounting surface (or to the specified 1) Pour oil through the filler hole and
torque) using an oil filter wrench. install the filler cap.
Tightening torque for oil filter: For the approximate capacity of the oil, Selection of coolant
3/4 turn or refer to “Recommended fuel / lubricants
14 Nm (1.4 kg-m, 10.3 lb-ft) and capacities (approx.)” in “SPECIFI-
CATIONS” section. NOTICE
2) Start the engine and carefully check the SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) coolant;
NOTICE oil filter and the drain plug for leakage. This coolant is already diluted to the
To prevent oil leakage, check that the Run the engine at various speeds for at proper percentage. Do not dilute with
oil filter is tight, but do not over- least 5 minutes. distilled water additionally. Doing so
tighten it. 3) Stop the engine and wait about 5 min- may result in the possibility of freez-
utes. Check the oil level again and add ing and/or overheating coolant.
oil if necessary. Check for leakage
again. To maintain optimum performance and
durability of your engine, use SUZUKI gen-
NOTICE uine coolant or equivalent.
• When replacing the oil filter, it is
recommended that you use a genu- NOTE:
ine SUZUKI replacement filter. If If you use the engine coolant other than
you use an aftermarket filter, check the SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) for replace-
that it is of equivalent quality and ment, follow the schedule of SUZUKI LLC:
follow the manufacturer’s instruc- Standard (Green). To see the detail of the
tions. maintenance schedule, refer to “Periodic
• Oil leakage from the periphery of maintenance schedule” in this section.
the oil filter or drain plug indicate This type of coolant is the best for cooling
incorrect installation or gasket system for the following reasons:
damage. If you find any leakage or • The coolant helps maintain proper
are not sure that the filter has been engine temperature.
properly tightened, have the vehi- • It gives proper protection against freez-
cle inspected by an authorized ing and boiling.
SUZUKI dealer. • It gives proper protection against corro-
sion and rust.

7-17

57RK0-14E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Failure to use the proper coolant can dam-

age your cooling system. An authorized Coolant level check NOTICE
SUZUKI dealer can help you select the Check the coolant level at the reservoir
proper coolant. SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) coolant;
tank, not at the radiator. With the engine This coolant is already diluted to the
cool, the coolant level should be between proper percentage. Do not dilute with
NOTICE “FULL” and “LOW” marks. distilled water additionally. Doing so
To avoid damaging your cooling sys- may result in the possibility of freez-
tem: Adding coolant ing and/or overheating coolant.
• Always use a high quality ethylene
glycol base non-silicate type cool-
ant diluted with distilled water at WARNING NOTICE
the correct mixture concentration. Swallowing engine coolant can cause SUZUKI LLC: Standard (Green) cool-
• Check that the proper mix is 50/50 severe injury or death. Inhaling cool- ant;
coolant to distilled water and in no ant mist or vapors or getting coolant • The mixture you use should con-
case higher than 70/30. Concentra- in your eyes could result in severe tain 50% concentration of anti-
tions greater than 70/30 coolant to injury. freeze.
distilled water will cause overheat- • Do not drink antifreeze or coolant • If the lowest ambient temperature
ing conditions. solution. If swallowed, do not in your area is expected to be –35°C
• Do not use straight coolant nor induce vomiting. Immediately con- (–31°F) or below, use higher con-
plain water (except “SUZUKI LLC: tact a poison control center or a centrations up to 60% following the
Super (Blue)”). physician. instructions on the antifreeze con-
• Do not add extra inhibitors or addi- • Avoid inhaling coolant mist or hot tainer.
tives. They may not be compatible vapors. If inhaled, remove to a
with your cooling system. fresh air area.
• Do not mix different types of base • If coolant gets in the eyes, flush
coolants. Doing so may result in with water and seek medical atten-
accelerated seal wear and/or the tion.
possibility of severe overheating • Wash thoroughly after handling
and extensive engine / CVT dam- coolant.
age. • Keep engine coolant out of the
reach of children and pets.

7-18

57RK0-14E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Air cleaner Spark plugs

If the air cleaner is clogged with dust, there
will be greater intake resistance, resulting Spark plug replacement and inspec-
in decreased power output and increased tion
fuel consumption.
Since special procedures, materials and
tools are required, it is recommended that
EXAMPLE (1) you trust this job to an authorized SUZUKI
FULL dealer.

LOW

52RM70090

If the coolant level is below “LOW” mark,

coolant should be added. While the engine
is cool, remove the reservoir tank cap and
add coolant until the reservoir tank level
reaches “FULL” mark. Never fill the reser-
voir tank above “FULL” mark.
52RS70040

NOTICE 1) Unclamp the side clamps (1).

2) Hold up and pull the air cleaner upper
When putting the cap on the reser- case toward you.
voir tank, line up the mark on the cap 3) Remove the element from the air
and the mark on the tank. Failure to cleaner case. If it appears to be dirty,
follow this can result in coolant leak- clean or replace it with a new one.
age. 4) Clamp the side clamps securely.

Coolant replacement
Since special procedures are required, ask
an authorized SUZUKI dealer for this job.

7-19

57RK0-14E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Gear oil Gear oil level check CAUTION

After driving the vehicle, the gear oil
EXAMPLE temperature may be high enough to
Manual transaxle oil burn you. Wait until the oil filler and
When adding gear oil, use gear oil with the (1) level plug are cool enough to touch
appropriate viscosity and grade as shown with your bare hands before inspect-
in the chart below. ing gear oil level.

We highly recommend you use “SUZUKI

GEAR OIL 75W” for manual transaxle oil. NOTICE
Be sure to use new plug with new gas-
Manual transaxle oil ket to avoid looseness of the plug and
oil leakage.
75W 68KH073

o
C -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 (1) Oil filler and level plug Gear oil change
Since special procedures, materials and
o
F -22 -4 14 32 50 68 86 104
To check the gear oil level, use the fol-
lowing procedure: tools are required, ask an authorized
54P120706
1) Park the vehicle on a level surface with SUZUKI dealer for this job.
the parking brake applied. Then, stop
the engine.
2) Remove the oil filler and level plug.
3) If gear oil flows from the plug hole, the
oil level is correct. Reinstall the plug. If
gear oil does not flow from the plug
hole, add oil through the filler plug hole
until oil flows a little from the plug hole.

Tightening torque for oil filler and level

plug
Manual transaxle (1):
21 Nm (2.1 kg-m, 15.5 lb-ft)

7-20

57RK0-14E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

NOTE:
Clutch pedal Continuously Variable Do not check the fluid level if you have just
Transaxle (CVT) fluid driven the vehicle for a long time at high
speed, or if you have driven in city traffic in
Fluid control clutch hot weather. Wait until the fluid cools down
(about 30 minutes), or the fluid level indi-
Specified fluid cation will not be correct.
EXAMPLE Use a CVT fluid SUZUKI CVT FLUID
GREEN-2. 3) Park your vehicle on level ground.
4) Apply the parking brake and then start
the engine in “P” (Park). Let it idle for
Fluid level check two minutes and keep it running during
the fluid level check.
NOTICE 5) With your foot on the brake pedal,
MAX move the gearshift lever through each
Driving with too much or too little gear position, pausing for about three
fluid can damage the transaxle. seconds in each position. Then move it
MIN back to “P” (Park) position.
You must check the fluid level with the CVT
fluid at normal operating temperature. WARNING
57RK086

Check the clutch pedal for smooth opera- To check the fluid level: Be sure to depress the brake pedal
tion and clutch fluid level from time to time. 1) To warm up the CVT fluid, drive the when moving the gearshift lever, or
vehicle for more than 5 km (3 miles). the vehicle can move suddenly.
If clutch dragging is felt with the pedal fully
depressed, have the clutch inspected by 2) Then drive for ten more minutes.
an authorized SUZUKI dealer. If the clutch
fluid level is near “MIN” line, fill it up to NOTICE
“MAX” line with DOT3 or SAE J1703 brake Be sure to use the specified CVT
fluid. fluid. Using CVT fluid other than
SUZUKI CVT FLUID GREEN-2 may
damage the CVT of your vehicle.

7-21

57RK0-14E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Deterioration checking or changing

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE oil

H
Since special procedures, materials and
(3)
(1) tools are required to check the deteriora-
tion of CVT oil or change, ask an autho-
rized SUZUKI dealer for this job.
(2)

C
52RM70300 57RK073

(1) FULL HOT

EXAMPLE (2) LOW HOT
(3) The lowest point = Fluid level

6) The handle of the CVT fluid dipstick is

colored orange for easy identification.
Remove the dipstick, wipe the oil off
with a clean cloth and push it back in
until the cap seats. Then pull out the
dipstick.
7) Check both sides of the dipstick, and
read the lowest level. The fluid level
should be between the two marks in “H”
(hot) range on the dipstick.
81PN159
NOTICE
After checking or adding oil, be sure
to insert the dipstick securely.

7-22

57RK0-14E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Brakes WARNING WARNING

Failure to follow the guidelines below Brake fluid is harmful or fatal if swal-
can result in personal injury or seri- lowed, and harmful if it comes in con-
Brake fluid ous damage to the brake system. tact with skin or eyes. If swallowed,
• If the brake fluid in the reservoir do not induce vomiting. Immediately
EXAMPLE drops below a certain level, the contact a poison control center or a
brake warning light on the instru- physician. If brake fluid gets in eyes,
ment cluster will come on (the flush eyes with water and seek medi-
engine must be running with the cal attention. Wash thoroughly after
parking brake fully disengaged). handling. Solution can be poisonous
Should the light come on, immedi- to animals. Keep out of reach of chil-
ately ask an authorized SUZUKI dren and animals.
MAX dealer to inspect the brake system.
• A rapid fluid loss indicates leakage NOTE:
in the brake system which should • The fluid level can be expected to gradu-
be inspected by an authorized ally fall as the brake pad and/or shoe
MIN
SUZUKI dealer immediately. wear.
• Do not use any fluid other than • Brake fluid absorbs water over time and
57RK086 DOT3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid. Do brake fluid with high water content may
Check the brake fluid level by looking at not use reclaimed fluid or fluid that cause vapor lock or brake system mal-
the reservoir in the engine compartment. has been stored in old or open con- function.
Check that the fluid level is between “MAX” tainers. It is essential that foreign Replace your brake fluid in accordance
and “MIN” lines. particles and other liquids are kept with the maintenance schedule in your
out of the brake fluid reservoir. Owner’s Manual.
NOTICE
If your brake fluid level is near the CAUTION
“MIN” line, there is a possibility of Brake fluid can harm your eyes and
brake pad and/or shoe wear and damage painted surfaces. Be careful
brake fluid leakage. Consult with when refilling the reservoir.
your authorized SUZUKI dealer
regarding this possibility before fill-
ing the reservoir.

7-23

57RK0-14E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

With the engine running, measure the dis-

Brake pedal tance between the brake pedal and floor EXAMPLE
Check brake pedal stroke. If the stroke is carpet when the pedal is depressed with
so large, have the brake system inspected approximately 30 kg (66 lbs) of force. The
by an authorized SUZUKI dealer. If you minimum distance required is as specified.
doubt the brake pedal is at its normal Since your vehicle’s brake system is self-
height, check it as follows: adjusting, there is no need for pedal
adjustment.
If the pedal to floor carpet distance as
measured above is less than the minimum
distance required, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI
dealer.

NOTE: 52RM70500
• When measuring the distance between
the brake pedal and floor wall, be sure WARNING
not to include the floor mat or rubber on
the floor carpet in your measurement. If you experience any of the following
• Measure the distance at the brake problems with your vehicle’s brake
pedal’s side facing toward the driver’s system, have the vehicle inspected
54G108 door. immediately by an authorized
SUZUKI dealer.
Minimum distance between brake pedal • Poor braking performance
and floor carpet “a” : • Uneven braking (brakes not work-
53 mm (2.1 in.) ing uniformly on all wheels.)
• Excessive pedal travel
• Brake dragging
• Excessive noise

7-24

57RK0-14E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Parking brake Brake discs and brake drums Steering wheel

Brake disc
EXAMPLE
Brake location Minimum thickness EXAMPLE
Front wheels
(if equipped with 18.0 mm (0.7 in.)
rear brake disc)
Front wheels
(if equipped with 15.0 mm (0.6 in.) “c”
rear brake drum)
Rear wheels
8.0 mm (0.3 in.)
(if equipped)

54G109 Brake drum

52RM70030
Ratchet tooth specification “b”: Maximum inner
4th – 9th Brake location Steering wheel play “c”:
diameter
Lever pull force (1): 0 – 30 mm (0.0 – 1.2 in.)
200 N (20 kg, 45 lbs) Rear wheels
181 mm (7.13 in.)
(if equipped) Check the free play of the steering wheel
Check the parking brake for proper adjust- by gently turning it from left to right and
ment by counting the number of clicks If the measured thickness or inner diame- measuring the distance that it moves
made by the ratchet teeth as you slowly ter of the most worn part falls below or before you feel slight resistance. The play
pull up on the parking brake lever to the exceeds the value indicated above, the should be between the specified values.
point of full engagement. The parking parts should be replaced with a new one. Check that the steering wheel turns easily
brake lever should stop between the speci- The measurement involves disassembling and smoothly without rattling by turning it
fied ratchet teeth and the rear wheels each brake and requires the use of a all the way to the right and to the left while
should be securely locked. If the parking micrometer or caliper, which must be done driving very slowly in an open area. If the
brake is not properly adjusted or the according to the instructions described in amount of free play is not as specified or
brakes drag is suspected even after the the relevant service manual or available you find anything else to be wrong, an
lever has been fully released, have the from the relevant repair information site. inspection must be performed by an autho-
parking brake inspected and/or adjusted by rized SUZUKI dealer.
an authorized SUZUKI dealer.

7-25

57RK0-14E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Tires Tire inspection

EXAMPLE
Inspect your vehicle’s tires at least once a
month or before long trip by performing the
following checks:
1) Measure the air pressure with a tire
gauge. Adjust the pressure if neces-
sary.

WARNING
• Air pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold or you may
get inaccurate readings.
• Check the inflation pressure from 54G136

EXAMPLE time to time while inflating the tire (1) Tread wear indicator
gradually, until the specified pres- (2) Indicator location mark
57RK074 sure is obtained.
The front and rear tire pressure specifica- • Never under-inflate or over-inflate 2) Check that the depth of the tread
tions are listed in the tire information label. the tires. groove is more than 1.6 mm (0.06 in.).
Both front and rear tires should have the Under-inflation can cause unusual To help you check this, the tires have
specified tire pressure. handling characteristics or can molded-in tread wear indicators in the
cause the rim to slip on the tire grooves. When the indicators appear
bead, resulting in an accident or on the tread surface, the remaining
damage to the tire or rim. depth of the tread is 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
Over-inflation can cause the tire to or less and the tire should be replaced.
burst, resulting in personal injury. 3) Check for abnormal wear, cracks and
Over-inflation can also cause damage. Any tires with cracks or other
unusual handling characteristics damage should be replaced. If any tires
which may result in an accident. show abnormal wear, have them
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI
dealer.

7-26

57RK0-14E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

CAUTION NOTICE Tire rotation

Hitting curbs and running over rocks Replacing the original tires with tires 4-tire rotation
can damage tires and affect wheel of a different size may result in false
alignment. Have tires and wheel speedometer or odometer readings.
alignment checked periodically by an Check with an authorized SUZUKI
authorized SUZUKI dealer. dealer before purchasing replace-
ment tires that differ in size from the
4) Check for loose wheel nuts. original tires.
5) Check that there are no nails, stones or
other objects sticking into the tires.

WARNING
• Your SUZUKI vehicle is equipped
with tires which are all the same
type and size. This is important to
ensure proper steering and han- 54G114
dling of the vehicle. Never mix tires To avoid uneven wear of your tires and to
of different size or type on the four prolong their life, rotate the tires as illus-
wheels of your vehicle. The size trated. Tires should be rotated every 10000
and type of tires used should be km (6000 miles). After rotation, adjust front
only those approved by SUZUKI as and rear tire pressures to the specification
standard or optional equipment for listed in your vehicle’s tire information
your vehicle. label.
• Replacing the wheels and tires
equipped on your vehicle with cer-
tain combinations of aftermarket
wheels and tires can significantly
change the steering and handling
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Therefore, use only those wheel
and tire combinations approved by
SUZUKI as standard or optional
equipment for your vehicle.

7-27

57RK0-14E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Battery NOTICE EXAMPLE

If your vehicle is equipped with the
WARNING ENG A-STOP system, only use the
vehicle battery types that have been
• Batteries produce flammable approved by SUZUKI vehicle manu-
hydrogen gas. Keep flames and facture, otherwise you could damage (1)
sparks away from the battery or an your vehicle, and the ENG A-STOP
explosion may occur. Never smoke system could not be available. If a
when working near the battery. (2)
vehicle battery has to be replaced,
• When checking or servicing the consult an authorized SUZUKI dealer.
battery, disconnect the negative
cable. Be careful not to cause a
short circuit by allowing metal 76MS006
objects to contact the battery posts
and the vehicle at the same time. For maintenance-free battery (cap-less
• To avoid harm to yourself or dam- type), you need not add water. For tradi-
age to your vehicle or battery, fol- tional type battery, which has water filler
low the jump-starting instructions caps, the level of the battery solution must
in “EMERGENCY SERVICE” sec- be kept between the upper level line (1)
tion if it is necessary to jump-start and lower level line (2) at all times. If the
your vehicle. level is found to be below the lower level
• Diluted sulfuric acid spilled from line (2), add distilled water to the upper
battery can cause blindness or level line (1). You should periodically check
severe burns. Use proper eye pro- the battery, battery terminals, and battery
tection and gloves. Flush eyes or hold-down bracket for corrosion. Remove
body with ample water and get corrosion using a stiff brush and ammonia
medical care immediately if suf- mixed with water, or baking soda mixed
fered. Keep batteries out of reach with water. After removing corrosion, rinse
of children. with clean water.
If your vehicle is not going to be driven for
a month or longer, disconnect the cable
from the negative terminal of the battery to
help prevent discharge.

7-28

57RK0-14E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Replacement of the battery • Do not disconnect the battery terminals (Battery label)
for at least one minute after the ignition
EXAMPLE (3) (1) switch is turned off, or the engine switch
is pressed to change the ignition mode
(2) to LOCK (OFF).
(5)
WARNING
Batteries contain toxic substances
including sulfuric acid and lead. They
(4) could have potential negative conse-
quences for the environment and
human health. Used batteries must
be disposed of or recycled according
to applicable rules or regulations and
Pb (6)

68PM00711
must not be disposed of with ordi- 51KM042
nary household trash. Make sure not (5) Crossed-out wheeled bin symbol
To remove the battery: to tip over the battery when you (6) Chemical symbol of “Pb”
1) Disconnect the negative cable (1). remove it from the vehicle. Other-
2) Disconnect the positive cable (2). wise, sulfuric acid could run out and The crossed-out wheeled bin symbol (5)
3) Remove the retainer nuts (3) and you might get injury. located on the battery label indicates that
remove the retainer (4). the used battery should be collected sepa-
To install the battery: rately from ordinary household trash. The
1) Install the battery in the reverse order of
NOTICE chemical symbol of “Pb” (6) indicates the
removal. After stopping the engine, controller battery contains more than 0.004% lead.
2) Tighten the bracket bolt and battery and system are operated for a while.
By ensuring the used battery is disposed
cables securely. Therefore, before removing the bat-
of or recycled correctly, you will help pre-
tery, wait for more than one minute
vent potential negative consequences for
NOTE: after turning the ignition switch to
the environment and human health, which
• When the battery is disconnected, some “OFF” or changing the ignition mode
could otherwise be caused by inappropri-
of the vehicle’s functions will be initial- to LOCK (OFF).
ate trash handling of the battery. The recy-
ized and/or deactivated. cling of materials will help to conserve
These functions must be required to natural resources. For more detailed infor-
reset after the battery is reconnected. mation about disposing of or recycling the
used battery, consult an authorized
SUZUKI dealer.

7-29

57RK0-14E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Relay box
Fuses Fuses in engine compartment

Your vehicle has three types of fuses, as

(10)
(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)
EXAMPLE
described below:
(2)
Main fuse (1)

(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
The main fuse takes current directly from
the lead-acid battery.

(19)

(20)

(21)

(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)

(26)

(27)
(28)
(29)
Primary fuses
These fuses are between the main fuse (30) (31) (32) (33)
and individual fuses, and are for electrical
load groups.
Individual fuses
These fuses are for individual electrical cir- (3)
cuits.
52RM70310

To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller pro- (1) Main fuse box 52RM70050
vided in the fuse box cover. (2) Relay box
(3) Sub relay box (if equipped) Sub relay box (if equipped)
EXAMPLE
Main fuse box

(34)
(5) (35)
(36)
(4) (37)

(3) (1)

(2)
52RM70060

52RS70020
63J095

7-30

57RK0-14E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

The main fuse, primary fuses and some of

(21) 60 A Power steering
MAIN FUSE / PRIMARY FUSE the individual fuses are located in the
(22) – Blank engine compartment. If the main fuse
(1) 120 A FL1 blows, no electrical component will func-
(23) – Blank tion. If a primary fuse blows, no electrical
(2) 100 A FL2
(24) 20 A Front fog light component in the corresponding load
(3) 80 A FL3 group will function. When replacing the
(25) 10 A Air compressor main fuse, a primary fuse or an individual
(4) 100 A FL4 fuse, use a genuine SUZUKI replacement
(26) 50 A Ignition switch 2 parts or equivalent for individual fuses.
(5) 50 A FL5
(27) – Blank To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller pro-
(6) 30 A Starting motor vided in the fuse box. The amperage of
(28) 15 A FI*2 each fuse is shown in the back of the fuse
(7) 30 A Blower fan
box cover.
(29) – Blank
(8) 40 A Battery*1
(30) 15 A CVT CON*2
(9) 40 A ABS motor
(31) 15 A T/M PUMP*2
(10) 40 A Ignition switch
(32) 5A Starting Signal
(11) 30 A B/U
(33) – Blank
(12) 30 A IDLE STOP CONT
(34) – Blank
(13) – Blank
(35) 25 A Headlight high*1
(14) – Blank
(36) 15 A Headlight high (Right)*1
(15) 25 A ABS control module
(37) 15 A Headlight high (Left)*1
(16) 15 A Headlight (Left)
*1: Models with LED headlights
(17) 15 A Headlight (Right)
*2: Models with CVT
(18) 30 A DCDC
(19) 30 A Radiator fan
(20) – Blank

7-31

57RK0-14E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Fuses under dashboard PRIMARY FUSE

EXAMPLE
(1) 30 A Power window
EXAMPLE
(2) 10 A Meter
OK
(3) 15 A Ignition coil
(4) 5A Ignition-1 signal 2
(5) 20 A Shift lever
BLOWN
(6) – Blank
(7) – Blank
60G111 (8) 20 A Door lock
(9) 15 A Steering lock
WARNING 57RK075
(10) 10 A Hazard
If the main fuse or a primary fuse
blows, have your vehicle inspected (11) 5A IDLE STOP CONT
by an authorized SUZUKI dealer.
Always use a genuine SUZUKI (12) – Blank
replacement. Never use a substitute (13) 5A ABS/ESP® control module
such as a wire even for a temporary
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
repair, or extensive electrical damage (14) 15 A Seat heater
and a fire can result. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
(15) 5A Ignition-1 signal 3
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
NOTE: (16) 10 A Dome light-2
Check that the fuse box always carries
spare fuses. (17) 5A Dome light
(18) 15 A Radio
80P0185
(19) 5A CONT
(20) 5A Key 2

7-32

57RK0-14E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

(21) 20 A Power window timer

Headlight aiming
(22) 5A Key
Since special procedures are required, ask
(23) 15 A Horn an authorized SUZUKI dealer for this job.
(24) 5A Tail light (Left)
(25) 10 A Tail light
(26) 10 A Air bag
(27) 10 A Ignition-1 signal OK BLOWN

(28) 10 A Back-up light

(29) 5A ACC-3
81A283
(30) 20 A Rear defogger
(31) 10 A Heated mirror WARNING
(32) 15 A ACC-2 Always replace a blown fuse with a
fuse of the correct amperage. Never
(33) 5A ACC use a substitute such as aluminum
foil or wire to replace a blown fuse. If
(34) 10 A Rear wiper you replace a fuse and the new one
(35) 5A Ignition-2 signal blows in a short period of time, you
may have a major electrical problem.
(36) 15 A Washer Have your vehicle inspected immedi-
ately by an authorized SUZUKI dealer.
(37) 25 A Front wiper
(38) 10 A Stop light

7-33

57RK0-14E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Bulb replacement Headlights

EXAMPLE
LED type (4)
CAUTION Since special procedures are required, it is
recommended that you take your vehicle (2)
• Light bulbs can be hot enough to to an authorized SUZUKI dealer for bulb
burn your finger right after turning replacement.
off lights. This is true especially for (3)
halogen headlight bulbs. Replace Halogen type
the bulbs after they become cool EXAMPLE
enough. (1)
• The headlight bulbs are filled with
pressurized halogen gas. They can 52RM70320
burst and injure you if they are hit
or dropped. Handle them carefully. 1) Open the engine food while the engine
• To avoid injury by sharp-edged is stopped. Disconnect the coupler (2).
parts of the body, wear gloves and Remove the sealing rubber (3) by pull-
a long-sleeved shirt when replacing ing the grip (4).
light bulbs.

NOTICE
The oils from your skin may cause a 52RM70220
halogen bulb to overheat and burst (1) Bulb
when the lights are on. Grasp a new
bulb with a clean cloth.

NOTICE
(5)
Frequent bulb replacement indicates
the need for an inspection of the elec- 52RM70330
trical system. This should be carried 2) Push the retaining spring (5) forward
out by an authorized SUZUKI dealer. and unhook it. Then remove the bulb.
Install a new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.

7-34

57RK0-14E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Vehicle with the LED headlights

Front turn signal light and
EXAMPLE front position light
For LED position light (if equipped), it is
recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized SUZUKI dealer for bulb (1)
replacement since special procedures are
required.
Vehicle with the halogen headlights
EXAMPLE

52RM70230
(1) 52RM70140
NOTE: (1) Front turn signal light
You can see the position of retaining spring
from the hole of headlight.
(2)

52RM70240

(1) Front turn signal light

(2) Front position light (if equipped)

7-35

57RK0-14E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Side turn signal light

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
Outside rearview mirror type
LED is used. It is recommended that you
take your vehicle to an authorized SUZUKI
dealer for bulb replacement since special
procedures are required.
(2)
Fender type
(3)
(4) (1)

68PH00732 68PM00721

1) Open the engine hood while the engine (3) Removal

is stopped. To remove the bulb holder (4) Installation
of the front turn signal light or the front
2) To remove the bulb of the front turn sig-
position light from the light housing,
nal light (1) from the bulb holder, push
turn the holder counterclockwise and
in the bulb and turn it counterclockwise.
pull it out.
To install a new bulb, push it in and turn
it clockwise.
To remove and install the bulb of the 64J195
front position light (2), simply pull out or Since the bulb is built-in type, replace it as
push in the bulb. the light assembly. Remove the light
assembly by sliding the light housing left-
ward with your finger.

7-36

57RK0-14E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Front fog light (if equipped) Daytime running light (if equipped)
1) Start the engine. Turn the steering LED type
wheel to the opposite side of the fog Since special procedures are required, it is
light to be replaced to replace the bulb recommended that you take your vehicle
easily. Then turn off the engine. to an authorized SUZUKI dealer for bulb
replacement.
EXAMPLE
Rear combination light
For LED tail / brake light, it is recom-
mended that you take your vehicle to an
EXAMPLE authorized SUZUKI dealer for bulb
(1) replacement since special procedures are
52RM70250
required.
3) Open the end of the cover inside the
fender.
(2)
(2)
(1)
57RK076

2) Remove the clip (1) and screws (2) at (4)

the bottom of bumper.
For removing the clip, use a flat blade
screwdriver as show in the illustration.

(3)
52RM70160

52R70140 1) With the tailgate opened, remove the

bolts (1) and pull the light housing (2)
4) Disconnect the coupler (3) by pushing firmly to the rearward.
the lock release. Turn the bulb holder
(4) counterclockwise and remove it.

7-37

57RK0-14E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

(6) EXAMPLE
(5)

(5) / (6)

(7)
(8)
(3) (4)
52RS70030 52RS70050

2) Remove the wire (3) from a clamp (4). (7) Removal

3) To remove the bulb holder of the rear (8) Installation
turn signal light (5) or the reversing light
4) To remove and install the bulb of the
(6) from the light housing, turn the
rear turn signal light (5) or the reversing
holder counterclockwise and pull it out.
light (6), simply pull out or push in the
bulb.
52RM70190

NOTE:
When reinstalling the light housing, check
that the clips are properly attached.

7-38

57RK0-14E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

License plate light Interior light

Remove the lens by using a flat-bladed
screwdriver covered with a soft cloth as
shown. To install it, simply push it back in.
Front

(2)

(1) 76MH0A126

2) To remove and install the bulb of the

52RM70070 license plate light (2), simply pull out or
1) Remove the cover (1) by turning it push in the bulb.
counterclockwise.
High-mount stop light 76MH0A139

LED is used. It is recommended that you

take your vehicle to an authorized SUZUKI Luggage compartment (if equipped)
dealer for bulb replacement since special
procedures are required.

52RM70281

7-39

57RK0-14E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

NOTE:
Wiper blades Some wiper blades may be different from
the ones described here depending on
vehicle specifications. If so, consult an (1)
authorized SUZUKI dealer for proper
replacement method.

For windshield wipers:

EXAMPLE (2)

EXAMPLE
52RM70510.

2) Open the lock (1), slide the wiper frame

and remove it from the arm (2) as
54G129
shown.
If the wiper blades become brittle or dam-
aged, or make streaks when wiping, EXAMPLE
replace the wiper blades.
To install new wiper blades, follow the pro- 52RM70390
cedures below.
1) Hold the wiper arm away from the win-
dow.
NOTICE
To avoid scratching or breaking the NOTE:
window, do not let the wiper arm When raising both of the front wiper arms,
strike the window while replacing the pull the driver’s side wiper arm up first.
wiper blade. When returning the wiper arms, lower the
passenger’s side wiper arm first.
Otherwise, the wiper arms may interfere
with each other. 61MM0A211

7-40

57RK0-14E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

3) Pull the locked end of the wiper blade

firmly to unlock the blade and slide the EXAMPLE (3) EXAMPLE
blade out as shown.

EXAMPLE (3)
(A)

(B)
(3)
(3)
61MM0B098 61MM0A212

(3) (A) Up
(B) Down
52RM70520
NOTE:
(3) Retainer
When you install the metal retainers (3),
make sure the direction of metal retainers
4) If the new blade is provided without the
as shown in the above illustrations.
two metal retainers (3), move them
from the old blade to the new one.

7-41

57RK0-14E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

For rear wiper:

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
(4)

(4)

61MM0A213 52RM70460 52RM70470

(4) Locked end 1) Hold the wiper arm away from the win- 3) Slide the blade out as shown.
dow.
5) Install the new blade in the reverse NOTE:
order of removal, with the locked end EXAMPLE Do not flex the wiper blade frame end more
(4) positioned toward the wiper arm. than necessary. If you do, it can break off.
Make sure the blade is properly
retained by all the hooks. Lock the
blade end into place.
6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm, making
sure that the lock lever is snapped
securely into the arm.

52RM70490

2) Remove the wiper frame from the wiper

arm after rotating the wiper frame clock-
wise.

7-42

57RK0-14E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

EXAMPLE Windshield washer fluid Air conditioning system

If you do not use the air conditioner for a
(1) EXAMPLE long period, such as during winter, it may
not give the best performance when you
start using it again. To help maintain opti-
mum performance and durability of your air
conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.
Operate the air conditioner at least once a
(1) month for one minute with the engine
idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil
and helps protect the internal components.

52RM70480
Air conditioner filter replacement
(1) Retainer
80JM078 Since special procedures are required, ask
4) If the new blade is provided without the an authorized SUZUKI dealer for this job.
two metal retainers, move them from Check that there is washer fluid in the tank.
the old blade to the new one. Refill it if necessary. Use a good quality
5) Install the new blade in the reverse windshield washer fluid, diluted with water
EXAMPLE
order of removal. as necessary.
Check that the blade is properly
retained by all the hooks. WARNING
6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm in the
reverse order of removal. Do not use radiator antifreeze in the
windshield washer reservoir. This
can severely impair visibility when
sprayed on the windshield, and also
can damage your vehicle’s paint.

NOTICE
57RK077
Damage may result if the washer
motor is operated with no fluid in the
washer tank.

7-43

57RK0-14E
 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

1) To approach the air conditioner filter,

remove the glove box by pressing both
sides of the glove box inward and pull-
ing it out.

(3)

(2)

(1)

57RK078

2) Remove the cover (1) and pull out the

air conditioner filter (2).

NOTE:
When you install a new filter, check that
the UP mark (3) faces upward.

7-44

57RK0-14E
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

MEMO

7-45

57RK0-14E
 EMERGENCY SERVICE

EMERGENCY SERVICE
Tire changing tool ............................................................... 8-1
Jacking instructions ........................................................... 8-2
Flat tire repair kit ................................................................. 8-6
Jump-starting instructions ................................................. 8-10
Towing .................................................................................. 8-11
Engine trouble: Starter does not operate ......................... 8-12
Engine trouble: Does not start ........................................... 8-12
Engine trouble: Overheating .............................................. 8-12

60G411

57RK0-14E
EMERGENCY SERVICE

NOTE:
Tire changing tool EXAMPLE If you are difficult to use the jack handle
(2) (1) (2), use jack handle and wheel wrench (3)
as shown in the illustration.
EXAMPLE
(1) To stow the jack, place it in the storage
bracket and turn the shaft clockwise until
the jack is securely held in place.

(2) WARNING
After using the tire changing tools,
stow them securely or they can
(3) cause injury if an accident occurs.

52RM80040
CAUTION
To remove the jack (1), turn its shaft coun-
terclockwise by using jack handle (2) and The jack should be used only to
52RM80010
pull the jack out of the storage bracket. change wheels. It is important to read
(1) Jack the jacking instructions in this sec-
(2) Jack handle EXAMPLE tion before attempting to use the
(3) Wheel wrench (2) jack.

The tire changing tools are stowed in the

luggage compartment.
Refer to “LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT” in
“ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS”
section. (3)

52RM80040

8-1

57RK0-14E
 EMERGENCY SERVICE

Jacking instructions WARNING EXAMPLE

• Shift into “P” (Park) for a CVT, or into
“R” (Reverse) for a manual transaxle
vehicle when you jack up the vehi-
cle.
• Never jack up the vehicle with the
transaxle in “N” (Neutral). Other-
wise, unstable jack may cause an
accident.
3) Turn on the hazard warning switch if
your vehicle is near traffic.
4) Block the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the wheel being
52RM80020
lifted.
5) Place the spare tire (if equipped) near
75F062
the wheel being lifted as shown in the EXAMPLE
1) Place the vehicle on level, hard ground. illustration in case the jack slips.
2) Set the parking brake firmly and shift
into “P” (Park) if your vehicle has a EXAMPLE
CVT, or shift into “R” (Reverse) if your
vehicle has a manual transaxle.

52RM80030

54G253

8-2

57RK0-14E
EMERGENCY SERVICE

6) Position the jack at an angle as shown

in the illustration and raise the jack by
turning the jack handle clockwise until
the jack-head groove fits around the
jacking bar beneath the vehicle body.
7) Continue to raise the jack slowly and
smoothly until the tire clears the
ground. Do not raise the vehicle more
than necessary.

WARNING
• Use the jack only to change wheels
on level, hard ground.
• Never jack up the vehicle on an
inclined surface.
• Never raise the vehicle with the
jack in a location other than the
specified jacking point (shown in
the illustration) near the wheel to
be changed.
• Check that the jack is raised at
least 25 mm (1 inch) before it con-
tacts the flange. Use of the jack
when it is within 25 mm (1 inch) of
being fully collapsed may result in
failure of the jack.
• Never get under the vehicle when it
is supported by the jack.
• Never run the engine when the
vehicle is supported by the jack
and never allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.

8-3

57RK0-14E
 EMERGENCY SERVICE

Raising vehicle with garage jack

EXAMPLE
• Apply the garage jack to one of the
points indicated below. (1) (2)
• Always support the raised vehicle with
jack stands (commercially available) at
the points indicated below.

(3) (3)

(1)

(1) (2) (5)

(5)

(4) (4)

52RS80020

(1) Front (4) Garage jack

(2) Rear (5) Jacking point for garage jack
(3) Jack stand

8-4

57RK0-14E
EMERGENCY SERVICE

4) Remove the wheel nuts and wheel. 6) Install the new wheel and replace the
NOTICE wheel nuts with their cone shaped end
EXAMPLE facing the wheel. Tighten each nut
Never apply a garage jack to the snugly by hand until the wheel is
exhaust pipe, side under spoiler (if securely seated on the hub.
equipped), engine undercover or rear
torsion beam. (1)
EXAMPLE
NOTE:
For more details, contact an authorized
SUZUKI dealer.

Changing wheels
To change a wheel, use the following pro-
cedure:
1) Prepare the jack and tools.
2) Loosen, but do not remove the wheel (2)
nuts.
52RM80070
3) Jack up the vehicle (follow the jacking
instructions in this section). (3) Tightening torque for wheel nut
100 Nm (10.2 kg-m, 74.0 lb-ft)
WARNING
7) Lower the jack and fully tighten the nuts
• Shift into “P” (Park) for a CVT, or into (4) with a wheel wrench in numerical order
“R” (Reverse) for a manual transaxle 65J4033 as shown in the illustration.
vehicle when you jack up the vehicle.
• Never jack up the vehicle with the 5) Clean any mud or dirt off from the sur-
transaxle in “N” (Neutral). Other- face of the wheel (1), hub (2), thread
wise, unstable jack may cause an part (3) and surface of the wheel nuts
accident. (4) with a clean cloth.
Clean the hub carefully; it may be hot
from driving.

8-5

57RK0-14E
 EMERGENCY SERVICE

WARNING EXAMPLE Flat tire repair kit

Use genuine wheel nuts and tighten The flat tire repair kit is stowed in the lug-
them to the specified torque as soon gage compartment.
as possible after changing wheels. Refer to “LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT” in
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly “ILLUSTRATED TABLE OF CONTENTS”
tightened wheel nuts may come section.
loose or fall off, which can result in
an accident. If you do not have a WARNING
torque wrench, have the wheel nut
torque checked by an authorized Failure to follow the instructions in
SUZUKI dealer. this section for using the flat tire
repair kit can result in an increased
52RM80090
risk of loss of control and an acci-
Full wheel cover (if equipped) dent.
Install the full wheel cover not to cover or Carefully read and follow the instruc-
foul the air valve. tions in this section.
EXAMPLE

(1)

(2)

52RM80080

Remove the full wheel cover by using jack

handle (1) covered with a soft cloth (2), as
shown in the illustration.

8-6

57RK0-14E
EMERGENCY SERVICE

IMPORTANT Flat tire repair kit contents

The flat tire repair kit cannot be used in WARNING
the following cases. Consult an autho-
rized SUZUKI dealer or a roadside Flat tire repair kit sealant is harmful if
(5) swallowed, or if it comes in contact
assistance service.
• Cuts or piercing in the tire tread with skin or eyes. If swallowed, do
larger than approx. 4 mm. not induce vomiting. Give plenty of
• Cuts in the tire side wall.
(6) water (if possible charcoal slurry)
• Tire damage caused by driving with
(1) and seek medical attention immedi-
(4) ately. If sealant gets in eyes, flush
considerably reduced tire pressure or
even with deflated tire. eyes with water and seek medical
• The tire bead completely dislocated attention. Wash thoroughly after han-
from the rim. dling. Solution can be poisonous to
• The rim damaged. animals. Keep out of the reach of
Small punctures in the tire tread, children and animals.
caused by a nail or a screw, can be
sealed with the flat tire repair kit. (2) (3) NOTICE
Do not remove nails or screws from the
tire during an emergency repair to avoid EXAMPLE Replace the sealant before expiry
the air being released from the enlarged 52RM80050 date indicated on the label of the
opening. (1) Air compressor sealant bottle. To purchase new seal-
(2) Sealant bottle ant, see an authorized SUZUKI dealer.
(3) Speed restriction sticker
(with sealant bottle)
(4) Filler hose
(5) Power plug
(6) Air hose

8-7

57RK0-14E
 EMERGENCY SERVICE

seal. Consult an authorized SUZUKI

Emergency repair 10 min. Max. dealer or a roadside assistance service.
1) Place the vehicle on level, hard ground.
Set the parking brake firmly and shift NOTE:
into “P” (Park) if your vehicle has a If the tire is over-inflated, deflate air by
(2) required
CVT, or shift into “R” (Reverse) if your air pressure
loosening the filler hose.
vehicle has a manual transaxle.
Turn on the hazard warning switch if (3) 7) Switch off the compressor. Pull out the
your vehicle is near traffic. power plug from the accessory socket.
Block the front and rear of the wheel 8) Disconnect the filler hose of the sealant
diagonally opposite of the wheel being bottle from the tire valve.
(4) 9) Push the release button on the side and
repaired.
2) Take out the sealant bottle and the (1) detach the sealant bottle.
compressor.
3) Screw the bottle into the socket of the 68PM00807
compressor. (1) Tire valve
4) Remove the valve cap from the tire (2) Filler hose
valve. (3) Compressor
5) Connect the filler hose of the sealant (4) Power plug
bottle to the tire valve.
6) Connect the power plug of the com- NOTICE
pressor to the accessory socket located
in the instrument panel. Start the Do not operate the compressor for
engine. Switch on the compressor. longer than 10 minutes. It can cause
Inflate the tire to the required air pres- overheating of the compressor.
(5)
sure which is indicated in the tire infor-
mation placard. If the tire cannot be inflated to the required
air pressure within 5 minutes, move the 68PM00808
vehicle a few meters back and forth to (5) Release button
spread the sealant over the entire tire.
Then, inflate the tire again.
If the tire still cannot be inflated to the
required air pressure, the tire may be
severely damaged. In this case, the flat tire
repair kit cannot provide the necessary

8-8

57RK0-14E
EMERGENCY SERVICE

10)Affix the speed restriction label from the

sealant bottle in the driver’s field of WARNING Using compressor to inflate a tire
view.
11)Make a short drive immediately after Check the tire pressure and confirm 1) Place the vehicle on level, hard ground.
inflating the tire to the required air pres- the completion of the emergency Set the parking brake firmly and shift
sure. Drive carefully with a maximum repair after driving for up to 10 min- into “P” (Park) if your vehicle has a
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph). utes. CVT, or shift into “R” (Reverse) if your
12)Carry on driving carefully to the nearest vehicle has a manual transaxle.
an authorized SUZUKI dealer or a tire 2) Take out the compressor.
NOTICE 3) Remove the valve cap from the tire
repair shop.
Have the tire renewed at the nearest valve.
WARNING an authorized SUZUKI dealer. When 4) Connect the air hose of the compressor
reusing the sealed tire, consult a tire to the tire valve.
Do not affix the speed restriction repair shop. 5) Connect the power plug of the com-
label to the air bag. Also do not affix The wheel can be reused after wiping pressor to the accessory socket located
it to the warning light indicator or to sealant off completely with cloth in in the instrument panel. Start the
the speedometer. order to prevent rust. engine. Switch on the compressor.
Dispose of the sealant bottle at an Inflate the tire to the required air pres-
13)After driving for up to 10 minutes, check authorized SUZUKI dealer or in sure which is indicated in the tire infor-
the tire pressure with the pressure accordance with your regional codes mation placard.
gauge of the compressor. If the air and practices.
pressure indicates more than 200 kPa After using the sealant bottle, replace NOTICE
(2.0 bar), the emergency repair is com- it with a new bottle from an autho- Do not operate the compressor for
pleted. But, if the air pressure indicates rized SUZUKI dealer. longer than 10 minutes. It can cause
less than the required air pressure, cor-
overheating of the compressor.
rect the tire pressure to the required air
pressure. If the tire pressure has
dropped below 130 kPa (1.3 bar), the
flat tire repair kit cannot provide the
necessary seal. Do not use the tire and
consult an authorized SUZUKI dealer
or a roadside assistance service.

8-9

57RK0-14E
 EMERGENCY SERVICE

Jump-starting instructions NOTICE EXAMPLE

Your vehicle should not be started by
WARNING pushing or towing. This starting
method could result in permanent
• Never attempt to jump-start your damage to the catalytic converter.
vehicle if the lead-acid battery Use jump leads to start a vehicle with
appears to be frozen. Batteries in a weak or flat battery.
this condition may explode.
• When making jump lead connec-
1) Use only a 12-volt lead-acid battery to (3)
tions, check that your hands and
the jump leads remain clear from jump-start your vehicle. Position the
pulleys, belts or fans. good 12-volt lead-acid battery close to (1)
• Lead-acid batteries produce flam- your vehicle so that the jump leads will
mable hydrogen gas. Keep flames reach both batteries. When using a bat-
and sparks away from the battery tery installed on another vehicle, check
or an explosion may occur. Never that two vehicles do not touch each
smoke when working near the bat- other. Set the parking brakes fully on
both vehicles. 4 1
tery.
• If the booster battery you use for 2) Turn off all vehicle accessories, except
jump-starting is installed in another those necessary for safety reasons (for
vehicle, check that the two vehicles example, headlights or hazard lights).
are not touching each other. 2 3
• If your lead-acid battery discharges
repeatedly, for no apparent reason, (2)
have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized SUZUKI dealer. 52RS80010
• To avoid harm to yourself or dam-
age to your vehicle or battery, fol- 3) Connect jump leads as follows:
low the jump-starting instructions 1. Connect one end of the first jump
below. lead to the positive (+) terminal of
If you are in doubt, call for qualified the discharged battery (1).
road service. 2. Connect the other end to the positive
(+) terminal of the booster battery
(2).

8-10

57RK0-14E
EMERGENCY SERVICE

3. Connect one end of the second jump

lead to the negative (–) terminal of Towing 2-wheel drive (2WD) manual tran-
the booster battery (2). saxle
4. Make the final connection to an If you need to have your vehicle towed, Manual transaxle vehicles may be towed
unpainted, heavy metal part (i.e. contact a professional service. An autho- using either of the following methods.
engine mount bolt (3)) of the engine rized SUZUKI dealer can provide you with
of the vehicle with the discharged detailed towing instructions. 1) From the front, with the front wheels
battery (1). lifted and the rear wheels on the
NOTICE ground. Before towing, check that the
WARNING parking brake is released.
Observe the following instructions 2) From the rear, with the rear wheels
Never connect the jump lead directly when towing your vehicle. lifted and the front wheels on the
to the negative (–) terminal of the dis- • To help avoid damage to your vehi- ground, provided the steering and
charged battery, or an explosion may cle during towing, proper equip- drivetrain are in operational condition.
occur. ment and towing procedures must Before towing, check that transaxle is in
be used. neutral, the steering wheel is unlocked
• Using the frame hook, tow your (the ignition key should be in “ACC”
CAUTION vehicle on paved roads for short position), and the steering wheel is
Connect the jump lead to the engine distances at low speed. secured with a clamping device
mount bolt securely. If the jump lead designed for towing service.
disconnects from the engine mount 2-wheel drive (2WD) CVT
bolt because of vibration at the start NOTICE
of the engine, the jump lead could be CVT vehicles may be towed using either of The steering column is not strong
caught in the drive belts. the following methods. enough to withstand shocks trans-
1) From the front, with the front wheels mitted from the front wheels during
4) If the booster battery you are using is lifted and the rear wheels on the towing. Always unlock the steering
fitted to another vehicle, start the ground. Before towing, make sure that wheel before towing.
engine of the vehicle with the booster the parking brake is released.
battery. Run the engine at moderate 2) From the rear, with the rear wheels
speed. lifted and a dolly under the front wheels.
5) Start the engine of the vehicle with the
discharged battery. NOTICE
6) Remove the jump leads in the exact Towing your vehicle with the front
reverse order in which you connected wheels on the ground can result in
them. damage to the CVT.

8-11

57RK0-14E
 EMERGENCY SERVICE

Engine trouble: Starter does Engine trouble: Does not start Engine trouble: Overheating
not operate Make sure that your vehicle has enough The engine could overheat temporarily
fuel and battery. under severe driving conditions. If the high
1) Try turning the ignition switch to
If the engine does not start under very cold engine coolant temperature warning light
“START” position or try pressing the
condition, press the accelerator pedal all comes on as overheating or the engine
engine switch to change the ignition
the way to the floor and hold it while crank- coolant temperature gauge indicates over-
mode to START with the headlights
ing the engine. heating during driving:
turned on to determine the lead-acid
Refer to “Starting engine (vehicle without
battery condition. If the headlights go 1) Turn off the air conditioner, if equipped.
keyless push start system) (if equipped)”
excessively dim or go off, it usually 2) Take the vehicle to a safe place and
or “Starting engine (vehicle with keyless
means that either the lead-acid battery park.
push start system) (if equipped)” in operat-
is discharged or the battery terminal 3) Run the engine at a normal idle speed
ing your vehicle section.
contact is poor. Recharge the lead-acid for a few minutes until the high engine
If the engine still does not start have your
battery or correct battery terminal con- coolant temperature warning light goes
vehicle inspected at an authorized
tact as necessary. off or the indicator is within the normal,
SUZUKI dealer.
2) If the headlights remain bright, check acceptable temperature range between
• Do not operate the starter motor for
the fuses. If the reason for failure of the “H” and “C”.
more than 12 seconds.
starter is not obvious, there may be a
major electrical problem. Have the vehi- WARNING
(Vehicle with keyless push start sys-
cle inspected by an authorized SUZUKI
tem) If you see or hear escaping steam,
dealer.
stop the vehicle in a safe place and
NOTE: immediately turn off the engine to
If the engine refuses to start, the starter cool it. Do not open the hood when
motor automatically stops after a certain steam is present. When the steam
period of time. After the starter motor has can no longer be seen or heard, open
automatically stopped or if there is any- the hood to see if the coolant is still
thing abnormal in the engine starting sys- boiling. If it is, you must wait until it
tem, the starter motor runs only while the stops boiling before you proceed.
engine switch is held pressed.

8-12

57RK0-14E
EMERGENCY SERVICE

If the high engine coolant temperature

warning light does not go off or the tem-
perature indication does not come down to
within the normal, acceptable range:
1) Turn off the engine and check that the
water pump belt and pulleys are not
damaged or slipping. If any abnormality
is found, correct it.
2) Check the coolant level in the reservoir.
If it is found to be lower than “LOW”
line, check radiator, water pump, radia-
tor hoses and heater hoses for leakage.
If leakage that may cause overheating
is found, do not run the engine until 79J007
these problems have been corrected.
3) If leakage is not found, carefully add
coolant to the reservoir and then the WARNING
radiator, if necessary. (Refer to “Engine • It is hazardous to remove the radia-
coolant” in “INSPECTION AND MAIN- tor cap when the water temperature
TENANCE” section.) is high, because scalding fluid and
steam may be blown out under
NOTE: pressure. The cap should only be
If engine overheats and you are not sure taken off when the coolant tem-
what to do, contact an authorized SUZUKI perature has lowered.
dealer. • To help prevent personal injury,
keep hands, tools and clothing
away from the engine cooling fan
and air-conditioner fan (if
equipped). These electric fans can
automatically turn on without warn-
ing.

8-13

57RK0-14E
 APPEARANCE CARE

APPEARANCE CARE
Corrosion prevention .......................................................... 9-1
Vehicle cleaning .................................................................. 9-2

60G412 9

57RK0-14E
APPEARANCE CARE

4) High temperatures will cause an accel- Remove foreign material deposits

Corrosion prevention erated rate of corrosion to parts of the Foreign materials such as salts, chemicals,
vehicle which are not well-ventilated to road oil or tar, tree sap, bird droppings and
It is important to take good care of your permit quick drying. industrial fall-out may damage the finish of
vehicle to protect it from corrosion. Listed your vehicle if it is left on painted surfaces.
below are instructions for how to maintain This information illustrates the necessity of
Remove these types of deposits as quickly
your vehicle to prevent corrosion. Please keeping your vehicle (particularly the
as possible. If these deposits are difficult to
read and follow these instructions carefully. underbody) as clean and dry as possible. It
wash off, an additional cleaner may be
is equally important to repair any damage
required. Check that any cleaner you use
to the paint or protective coatings as soon
is not harmful to painted surfaces and is
Important information about corro- as possible.
specifically intended for your purposes.
sion Follow the manufacturer’s directions when
How to help prevent corrosion using these special cleaners.
Common causes of corrosion
1) Accumulation of road salt, dirt, moisture Repair finish damage
Wash your vehicle frequently
or chemicals in hard-to-reach areas of Carefully examine your vehicle for damage
The best way to preserve the finish on your
the vehicle underbody or frame. to the painted surfaces. Should you find
vehicle and to help avoid corrosion is to
2) Chipping, scratches and any damage to any chips or scratches in the paint, touch
keep it clean with frequent washing.
treated or painted metal surfaces them up immediately to prevent corrosion
Wash your vehicle at least once during the
resulting from minor accidents or abra- from starting. If the chips or scratches have
winter and once immediately after the win-
sion by stones and gravel. gone through to the bare metal, have a
ter. Keep your vehicle, particularly the
underside, as clean and dry as possible. qualified body shop make the repair.
Environmental conditions which accel-
If you frequently drive on salted roads,
erate corrosion Keep passenger and luggage compart-
your vehicle should be washed at least
1) Road salt, dust control chemicals, sea ments clean
once a month during the winter. If you live
breeze or industrial pollution will all Moisture, dirt or mud can accumulate
near the ocean, your vehicle should be
accelerate the corrosion of metal. under the floor mats and may cause corro-
washed at least once a month throughout
2) High humidity will increase the rate of sion. Occasionally, check under these
the year.
corrosion particularly when the tem- mats to ensure that this area is clean and
perature range is just above the freez- For washing instructions, refer to “Vehicle dry. More frequent checks are necessary if
ing point. cleaning” section. the vehicle is used for off-road driving or in
3) Moisture in certain areas of a vehicle wet weather.
for an extended period of time may pro- Certain cargos such as chemicals, fertiliz-
mote corrosion even though other body ers, cleaners, salts, etc. are extremely cor-
sections may be completely dry. rosive by nature. These products should
be transported in sealed containers. If they

9-1

57RK0-14E
 APPEARANCE CARE

are spilled or leaked, clean and dry the

area immediately. Vehicle cleaning Cleaning interior

Park your vehicle in a dry, well-venti- Vinyl upholstery

lated area Prepare a solution of soap or mild deter-
Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly- gent dissolved in warm water. Apply the
ventilated area. If you often wash your solution to the vinyl with a sponge or soft
vehicle in the garage and place it there in cloth and let it soak for a few minutes to
wet condition, your garage may be damp. loosen dirt.
The high humidity in the garage may Rub the surface with a clean, damp cloth
cause or accelerate corrosion. A wet vehi- to remove dirt and the soap solution. If
cle may corrode even in a heated garage if some dirt still remains on the surface,
the ventilation is poor. repeat this procedure.

WARNING Fabric upholstery

Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
Do not apply additional undercoating Using a mild soap solution, rub stained
or rust preventive coating on or 76G044S areas with a clean damp cloth. To remove
around exhaust system components soap, rub the areas again with a cloth
such as the catalytic converter and dampened with water. Repeat this until the
exhaust pipes. A fire could be started WARNING stain is removed, or use a commercial fab-
if the undercoating substance When cleaning the interior or exterior ric cleaner for tougher stains. If you use a
becomes overheated. of the vehicle, do not use flammable fabric cleaner, carefully follow the manu-
solvents such as lacquer thinners, facturer’s instructions and precautions.
gasoline and benzene. Also, do not
use cleaning materials such as
bleaches and strong household
detergents. The materials could
cause personal injury or damage to
the vehicle.

9-2

57RK0-14E
APPEARANCE CARE

Leather upholstery Seat belts

Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. Clean seat belts with a mild soap and NOTICE
Using a mild soap or saddle soap solution, water. Do not use bleach or dye on the
wipe dirt off with a clean damp soft cloth. belts. They may weaken the fabric in the Do not use chemical products that
To remove soap, wipe the areas again with belts. contain silicon to wipe electrical
a soft cloth dampened with water. Wipe the components such as the air condi-
areas dry with a soft dry cloth. Repeat this Vinyl floor mats tioning system, audio, navigation
until the dirt or stain is removed, or use a Ordinary dirt can be removed from vinyl system, or other switches. These will
commercial leather cleaner for tougher dirt with water or mild soap. Use a brush to cause damage to the components.
or stains. If you use a leather cleaner, help loosen dirt. After the dirt is loosened,
carefully follow the manufacturer’s instruc- rinse the mat thoroughly with water and Cleaning exterior
tions and precautions. Do not use solvent dry it in the shade.
type cleaners or abrasive cleaners.
Carpets NOTICE
NOTE: Remove dirt and soil as much as possible It is important that your vehicle be
• In order to keep leather upholstery look- with a vacuum cleaner. Using a mild soap kept clean and free from dirt. Failure
ing good, it should be cleaned at least solution, rub stained areas with a clean to keep your vehicle clean may result
twice a year. damp cloth. To remove soap, rub the areas in fading of the paint or corrosion to
• If leather upholstery becomes wet, again with a cloth dampened with water. various parts of the vehicle body.
immediately wipe it dry with tissue paper Repeat this until the stain is removed, or
or a soft cloth. Water may cause leather use a commercial carpet cleaner for
to harden and shrink if it is not wiped off. tougher stains. If you use a carpet cleaner, Caring for aluminum wheels
• When parking on sunny days, select a carefully follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
shady place or use a sunshade. If tions and precautions. NOTE:
leather upholstery is exposed to direct • Do not use an acidic or alkaline deter-
sunlight for a long time, it may discolor Instrument panel and console gent, or a cleaner containing petroleum
and shrink. Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. solvent to wash aluminum wheels.
• As is common with natural materials, Gently wipe dirt off with a tightly squeezed These types of cleaner will cause per-
leather is inherently irregular in grain and damp clean cloth. Repeat this until the dirt manent spots, discoloration and cracks
cowhide has spots in its natural state. is removed. on finished surfaces and damage to cen-
These do not affect the performance of ter caps.
the leather in any way. • Do not use a bristle brush and soap con-
taining an abrasive material. These will
damage finished surfaces.

9-3

57RK0-14E
 APPEARANCE CARE

Washing by hand 2) Rinse the body to loosen the dirt.

Washing Remove dirt and mud from the body
exterior with running water. You may
WARNING use a soft sponge or brush. Do not use
hard materials which can scratch the
• Never attempt to wash and wax paint or plastic. Remember that the
your vehicle with the engine run- headlight covers or lenses are made of
ning. plastic in many cases.
• When cleaning the underside of the
body and fender, where there may NOTICE
be sharp-edged parts, wear gloves
and a long-sleeved shirt to protect To avoid damage to the paint or plas-
your hands and arms from being tic surface, do not wipe the dirt off
cut. without ample water. Follow the
• After washing your vehicle, care- above procedure.
fully test the brakes before driving 60B212S

to check that they have maintained When washing the vehicle, park it in the 3) Wash the entire exterior with a mild
their normal effectiveness. place where direct sunlight does not fall on detergent or car wash soap using a
it as much as possible and follow the sponge or soft cloth. The sponge or
instructions below: cloth should be frequently soaked in the
1) Flush the underside of body and wheel soap solution.
housings with pressurized water to
remove mud and debris. Use plenty of NOTICE
water.
When using a commercial car wash
product, observe the cautions speci-
NOTICE fied by the manufacturer. Never use
When washing the vehicle: strong household detergents or
• Avoid directing steam or hot water soaps.
of more than 80°C (176°F) on plas-
tic parts. 4) Once the dirt has been completely
• To avoid damaging engine compo- removed, rinse off the detergent with
nents, do not use pressurized running water.
water in the engine compartment. 5) Wipe off the vehicle body with a wet
chamois or cloth and allow it to dry in
the shade.

9-4

57RK0-14E
APPEARANCE CARE

6) Check carefully for damage to painted Washing by a high-pressure cleaner

surfaces. If there is any damage, touch Waxing
up the damage following the procedure NOTICE
below:
1. Clean all damaged spots and allow If you use a high-pressure cleaner,
them to dry. keep away the nozzle from your vehi-
2. Stir the paint and touch up the dam- cle sufficiently.
aged spots lightly using a small • Bringing the nozzle to your vehicle
brush. too close or pointing the nozzle to
3. Allow the paint to dry completely. the opening of front grill or bumper
etc. can cause damage and mal-
Washing by an automatic car wash function of the vehicle body and
parts.
• Pointing the nozzle to the weather-
NOTICE strip of door glasses, doors and the
If you use an automatic car wash, sunroof (if equipped) can allow
check that your vehicle’s body parts, water to enter the cabin.
60B211S
such as spoilers, cannot be dam-
aged. If you are in doubt, consult the After washing the vehicle, waxing and pol-
car wash operator for advice. ishing are recommended to further protect
and beautify the paint.
• Only use waxes and polishes of good
quality.
• When using waxes and polishes,
observe the precautions specified by the
manufacturers.

9-5

57RK0-14E
 GENERAL INFORMATION

GENERAL INFORMATION
Vehicle identification .......................................................... 10-1

84MM01001

10

57RK0-14E
GENERAL INFORMATION

The chassis and/or engine serial numbers

Vehicle identification are used to register the vehicle. They are Engine serial number
also used to assist an authorized SUZUKI
dealer when ordering or referring to special
Chassis serial number service information. Whenever you have
occasion to consult an authorized SUZUKI
dealer, remember to identify your vehicle
with this number. Should you find the num-
ber difficult to read, you will also find it on
the identification plate.

60G128

The engine serial number is stamped on

EXAMPLE the cylinder block as shown in the illustra-
57RK080 tion.

EXAMPLE

52RM100020

10-1

57RK0-14E
 SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE:
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

M/T: Manual transaxle

CVT: Continuously variable transaxle

ITEM: Dimensions UNIT: mm (in.)

Overall length 3840 (151.2)
Overall width 1735 (68.3)
Overall height 1495 (58.9)
Wheelbase 2450 (96.5)
Track 175/65R15 tire Front 1530 (60.2)
Rear Brake drum 1530 (60.2)
Brake disc 1535 (60.4)
185/55R16 tire Front 1520 (59.8)
Rear Brake drum 1520 (59.8)
Brake disc 1525 (60.0)
Ground clearance 120 (4.7)
11
ITEM: Mass (weight) UNIT: kg (lbs)
Curb mass (weight) M/T 840 - 850 (1852 - 1874)
CVT 875 - 910 (1929 - 2006)
Gross vehicle mass (weight) rating 1365 (3009)
Permissible maximum axle weight Front 740 (1631)
Rear 760 (1676)

11-1

57RK0-14E
SPECIFICATIONS

ITEM: Engine
Type K12M (DOHC)
Number of cylinders 4
Bore 73.0 mm (2.87 in.)
Stroke 71.5 mm (2.81 in.)
Piston displacement 1197 cm3 (1197 cc, 73.0 cu.in)
Compression ratio 11.5 : 1

ITEM: Electrical
Standard spark plug NGK ILZKR6F11
Lead-acid battery B24 20HR 45Ah CCA 480A (JIS)
Fuses See “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section.

11-2

57RK0-14E
 SPECIFICATIONS

ITEM: Lights WATTAGE BULB No.

Headlight Halogen 12V 60/55W H4
LED LED –
Front fog light (if equipped) 12V 55W H11
Position light (if equipped) 12V 5W W5W
Position light & Daytime running light (if equipped) LED –
Turn signal light Front 12V 21W PY21W
Rear 12V 21W WY21W
Side turn signal light (on fender) 12V 5W –
(on outside rearview mirror) LED –
Tail/brake light LED –
High mount stop light LED –
Reversing light 12V 16W W16W
License plate light 12V 5W W5W
Interior light Front 12V 10W –
Luggage compartment
12V 5W –
(if equipped)

11-3

57RK0-14E
SPECIFICATIONS

ITEM: Wheels and tires

Tire size, front and rear 175/65R15 84H*1, 185/55R16 83V*1
Rim size 175/65R15 tire: 15X5J
185/55R16 tire: 16X6J
Tire pressures For the specified tire pressure, see the tire information label located on the driver’s
door lock pillar.
Recommended snow chain Radial thickness: 10 mm, axial thickness: 10 mm
Recommended snow tire 175/65R15*2 or 185/55R16*2

*1 If you cannot prepare tires with the specified load index rate and speed symbol, prepare tires with higher load index rate and speed
symbol.
*2 If you prepare snow tires;
• Check that they are tires of the same size, structure and load capacity as the originally installed tires.
• Mount the snow tires on all four wheels.
• Understand that the maximum permissible speed of snow tires is generally less than the originally installed tires.
Consult an authorized SUZUKI dealer or supplier for further information.

11-4

57RK0-14E
 SPECIFICATIONS

ITEM: Recommended fuel / lubricants and capacities (approx.)

Fuel See “FUEL RECOMMENDATION” section. 37 L (8.1 Imp gal)
Engine oil Classification: API SL, SM or SN 3.1 L (5.5 Imp pt)
Viscosity: SAE 0W-16 (replacement with oil filter)
Engine coolant M/T 4.6 L (8.1 Imp pt)
(including reservoir tank)
“SUZUKI LLC: Super (Blue) Coolant”
CVT 4.7 L (8.3 Imp pt)
(including reservoir tank)
Manual transaxle oil “SUZUKI GEAR OIL 75W” 1.5 L (2.6 Imp pt)
CVT fluid SUZUKI CVTF GREEN-2 5.73 L (10.1 Imp pt)
Brake fluid / Clutch fluid Refill to the proper oil level according to the
SAE J1703 or DOT3 instructions in “INSPECTION AND MAINTE-
NANCE” section.

11-5

57RK0-14E
SPECIFICATIONS

MEMO

11-6

57RK0-14E
 INDEX

INDEX Brakes ...................................................................................7-23

Braking..................................................................................3-27
A Brightness control ......................................................2-54, 2-63
Accelerator pedal................................................................. 3-11 Bulb replacement ................................................................. 7-34
Accessory socket .................................................................. 5-6 C
Adding coolant..................................................................... 7-18 Catalytic converter................................................................. 4-1
AIR BAG light .............................................................. 2-42, 2-84 Center console tray................................................................ 5-8
Air cleaner ............................................................................ 7-19 Central door locking system................................................. 2-3
Air conditioning system...................................................... 7-43 Changing engine oil and filter............................................. 7-15
AM/FM CD player ................................................................. 5-27 Changing wheels.................................................................... 8-5
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ................................... 3-28, 3-30 Charging light.......................................................................2-83
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light ..................... 2-81 Chassis serial number.........................................................10-1
Anti-theft feature.................................................................. 5-66 Child restraint systems .......................................................2-33
Assist grips ............................................................................ 5-7 Child-proof locks (rear door) ................................................ 2-4
Audio system ....................................................................... 5-27 Clock ............................................................................2-55, 2-65
Automatic heating and air conditioning system Clutch pedal.................................................................3-11, 7-21
(climate control)................................................................... 5-20 Continuously Variable Transaxle (CVT).............................3-17
AUX function ........................................................................ 5-51 Continuously Variable Transaxle (CVT) fluid .................... 7-21
AUX/USB socket .................................................................... 5-7 Coolant level check.............................................................. 7-18
Average fuel consumption......................................... 2-56, 2-66 Coolant replacement............................................................7-19
Average speed ..................................................................... 2-66 Corrosion prevention............................................................. 9-1
B Cruise control.......................................................................3-25
Basic operations.................................................................. 5-34 Cup holder and storage area ................................................ 5-8
Battery .................................................................................. 7-28 D
Battery replacement ............................................................ 2-13 12
Daily inspection checklist ..................................................... 3-1
Bluetooth® audio ................................................................. 5-61 Daytime running light ..........................................................7-37
Bluetooth® hands-free......................................................... 5-53 Daytime running light (D.R.L.) system ............................... 2-90
Brake assist system ............................................................ 3-28 Door locks............................................................................... 2-2
Brake fluid ............................................................................ 7-23 Drive belt............................................................................... 7-13
Brake pedal ................................................................. 3-11, 7-24 Driver’s seat belt reminder light /
Brake system warning light ................................................ 2-80 Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light ....................... 2-83

12-1

57RK0-14E
INDEX

Driving on hills....................................................................... 4-3 Fluid control clutch.............................................................. 7-21

Driving on slippery roads ..................................................... 4-4 Fluid level check ..................................................................7-21
Driving range............................................................... 2-56, 2-66 Folding rear seats ................................................................2-25
Driving time .......................................................................... 2-66 Footrest................................................................................... 5-9
E Frame hooks......................................................................... 5-11
Eco-driving display.............................................................. 2-69 Front air bags .......................................................................2-42
Electric mirrors .................................................................... 2-21 Front bottle holder ................................................................. 5-9
Electric power steering light............................................... 2-85 Front cup holders................................................................... 5-9
Electric window controls .................................................... 2-18 Front fog light.......................................................................7-37
Electronic stability program (ESP®)................................... 3-29 Front fog light indicator light ..............................................2-87
Emergency locking retractor (ELR) ................................... 2-29 Front fog light switch........................................................... 2-90
ENG A-STOP indicator light................................................ 2-88 Front position light .............................................................. 7-35
ENG A-STOP OFF light........................................................ 2-88 Front seat back pocket .......................................................... 5-9
ENG A-STOP system (engine auto stop start system)..... 3-20 Front seats............................................................................ 2-22
Engine coolant ..................................................................... 7-17 Front turn signal light ..........................................................7-35
Engine coolant temperature light....................................... 2-86 Fuel consumption .......................................................2-56, 2-66
Engine hood ........................................................................... 5-2 Fuel filler cap .......................................................................... 5-1
Engine oil and filter ............................................................. 7-13 Fuel gauge ...................................................................2-53, 2-62
Engine oil consumption ........................................................ 3-2 Fuel recommendation............................................................ 1-1
Engine serial number .......................................................... 10-1 Full wheel cover ..................................................................... 8-6
Engine switch......................................................................... 3-5 Fuses.....................................................................................7-30
Engine trouble: Does not start ........................................... 8-12 Fuses in engine compartment ............................................7-30
Engine trouble: Overheating .............................................. 8-12 Fuses under dashboard ......................................................7-32
Engine trouble: Starter does not operate.......................... 8-12 G
ESP® OFF indicator light............................................ 2-82, 3-31 Gasoline containing MTBE.................................................... 1-1
ESP® OFF switch ................................................................. 3-31 Gasoline-ethanol blends ....................................................... 1-1
ESP® warning light ..................................................... 2-82, 3-31 Gear oil..................................................................................7-20
Exhaust gas warning............................................................. 3-1 Gear oil change ....................................................................7-20
F Gear oil level check.............................................................. 7-20
Flat tire repair kit.................................................................... 8-6 Glove box................................................................................ 5-7
Floor mats ............................................................................ 5-10

12-2

57RK0-14E
 INDEX

H Instantaneous fuel consumption...............................2-56, 2-66

Halogen headlights.............................................................. 7-34 Instrument cluster.......................................................2-52, 2-61
Hazard warning switch........................................................ 2-92 Interior light ...................................................................5-5, 7-39
Head restraints............................................................ 2-23, 2-24 Interior workable area for keyless push start system ........ 3-9
Headlight aiming.................................................................. 7-33 J
Headlight leveling switch.................................................... 2-90 Jacking instructions .............................................................. 8-2
Heated rear window switch................................................. 2-96 Jump-starting instructions..................................................8-10
Heating and air conditioning system................................. 5-14 K
High engine coolant temperature warning light Keyless entry system transmitter................................2-6, 2-12
(red color) ............................................................................. 2-86 Keyless push start system.................................................... 3-6
High-mount stop light ......................................................... 7-39 Keyless push start system remote controller ..................... 2-6
Highway driving ..................................................................... 4-3 Keys......................................................................................... 2-1
Hill hold control system ...................................................... 3-32 L
Horn ...................................................................................... 2-96 Lap-shoulder belt ................................................................. 2-29
How ABS works ................................................................... 3-29 LED headlight warning light................................................ 2-87
I LED headlights .....................................................................7-34
If you cannot shift CVT gearshift lever License plate light................................................................7-39
out of “P” (PARK) ................................................................ 3-19 Light reminder buzzer..........................................................2-90
Ignition key reminder ............................................................ 2-2 Lighting control lever ..........................................................2-89
Ignition switch........................................................................ 3-3 Lighting operation................................................................2-89
Illumination indicator light.................................................. 2-87 Listening to a CD..................................................................5-38
Immobilizer system ............................................................... 2-1 Listening to an iPod® ........................................................... 5-48
Immobilizer/keyless push start system warning light...... 2-85 Listening to an MP3/WMA/AAC disc .................................. 5-41
Improving fuel economy ....................................................... 4-2 Listening to files stored in a USB device...........................5-45
Information display..................................................... 2-55, 2-64 Listening to the radio........................................................... 5-36
Information switch............................................................... 2-80 Low engine coolant temperature light (blue color)...........2-86
Inside rearview mirror ......................................................... 2-20 Low fuel warning light .........................................................2-85
Installation of child restraint with top tether..................... 2-38 Luggage compartment carpet............................................. 5-11
Installation with ISOFIX type anchorages ......................... 2-36 Luggage compartment cover..............................................5-11
Installation with lap-shoulder seat belts ........................... 2-35 Luggage compartment hook...............................................5-10

12-3

57RK0-14E
INDEX

M Rear seats .............................................................................2-24

Main beam (high beam) indicator light .............................. 2-87 Rear window wiper/washer switch ..................................... 2-94
Maintenance recommended under severe driving Refill with oil and oil leakage check ...................................7-17
conditions............................................................................... 7-8 Refilling .................................................................................7-14
Maintenance schedule .......................................................... 7-2 Remote audio controls ........................................................ 5-64
Malfunction indicator light.................................................. 2-84 Running-in .............................................................................. 4-1
Manual heating and air conditioning system.................... 5-15 S
Manual transaxle.................................................................. 3-16 S (sport) mode indicator......................................................2-88
Master warning indicator light............................................ 2-88 Seat adjustment ...................................................................2-22
Mirrors .................................................................................. 2-20 Seat belt hanger ...................................................................2-32
O Seat belt inspection .............................................................2-32
Odometer..................................................................... 2-56, 2-69 Seat belt pretensioner system ............................................2-39
Off-road driving...................................................................... 4-6 Seat belt reminder................................................................2-30
Oil filter replacement ........................................................... 7-16 Seat belts and child restraint systems............................... 2-26
Oil level check...................................................................... 7-14 Seat height adjustment lever ..............................................2-23
Oil pressure light ................................................................. 2-83 Seat position adjustment lever ...........................................2-23
Open door warning light ..................................................... 2-85 Seatback angle adjustment lever .......................................2-23
Outside rearview mirrors .................................................... 2-21 Selection of coolant .............................................................7-17
Outside rearview mirrors folding switch ........................... 2-22 Selection of ignition modes .................................................. 3-7
P Selector position .........................................................2-56, 2-68
Parking brake ....................................................................... 7-25 Setting mode ...............................................................2-59, 2-70
Parking brake lever.............................................................. 3-10 Shoulder anchor height adjuster........................................2-31
Pedal ..................................................................................... 3-11 Side air bags and side curtain air bags .............................2-46
Periodic maintenance schedule ........................................... 7-3 Side door locks ...................................................................... 2-2
Power-assisted brakes........................................................ 3-27 Side turn signal light............................................................7-36
R Spark plugs...........................................................................7-19
Radio antenna ...................................................................... 5-26 SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................. 11-1
Raising vehicle with garage jack.......................................... 8-4 Specified fluid.......................................................................7-21
Rear bottle holder .................................................................. 5-9 Specified oil ..........................................................................7-13
Rear combination light........................................................ 7-37 Speedometer ...............................................................2-53, 2-62
Rear cup holder ..................................................................... 5-9 Stability control system.......................................................3-30

12-4

57RK0-14E
 INDEX

Starting engine U
(vehicle with keyless push start system) .......................... 3-13 Using transaxle ....................................................................3-16
Starting engine V
(vehicle without keyless push start system)..................... 3-12 Vehicle cleaning ..................................................................... 9-2
Steering wheel ..................................................................... 7-25 Vehicle identification ........................................................... 10-1
Stuck vehicle.......................................................................... 4-5 Vehicle loading....................................................................... 6-1
Sun visor ................................................................................ 5-4 W
Supplemental restraint system (air bags) ......................... 2-41 Warning and indicator lights...............................................2-80
T Warning and indicator messages.......................................2-72
Tachometer ................................................................. 2-53, 2-62 Washing .................................................................................. 9-4
Tailgate ................................................................................... 2-4 Waxing .................................................................................... 9-5
Temperature gauge ............................................................. 2-63 Windows ............................................................................... 2-18
Theft deterrent alarm system ............................................. 2-14 Windshield washer...............................................................2-94
Theft deterrent light............................................................. 2-18 Windshield washer fluid ......................................................7-43
Thermometer........................................................................ 2-65 Windshield wiper and washer lever ...................................2-92
Tilt/telescoping steering lock lever.................................... 2-95 Windshield wipers................................................................2-93
Tire chains.............................................................................. 4-4 Wiper and washer operation ...............................................2-93
Tire changing tool.................................................................. 8-1 Wiper blades......................................................................... 7-40
Tire inspection ..................................................................... 7-26
Tire rotation.......................................................................... 7-27
Tires ...................................................................................... 7-26
Total idling fuel saved ......................................................... 2-66
Total idling stop time........................................................... 2-66
Towing .................................................................................. 8-11
Traction control system ...................................................... 3-30
Trailer towing ......................................................................... 6-1
Transaxle warning light....................................................... 2-84
Trip meter .................................................................... 2-56, 2-69
Turn signal control lever..................................................... 2-91
Turn signal indicators ......................................................... 2-87
Turn signal operation .......................................................... 2-91

12-5

57RK0-14E
INDEX

MEMO

12-6

57RK0-14E